Sunteți pe pagina 1din 395

USER MANUAL

Germanischer Lloyds
GALIOM Version 2.0
GALIOM USER MANUAL

ASSET
INTEGRITY
MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
(AIM)

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

INDEX OF CONTENT
1
2
3
4

INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................... 8
HOW TO INSTALL GALIOM FROM FRONT END..................................................... 8
FAMILIARISATION OF GALIOM ENVIRONMENT .................................................. 9
GALIOM APPLICATION SECURITY.............................................................................. 14
4.1
HOW TOLOGON INTO GALIOM APPLICATION .......................................... 14
4.2
HOW TO REGISTER NEW USER........................................................................... 15
4.3
HOW TO CREATE RESPONSIBILITIES .............................................................. 18
4.4
HOW TO CREATE RESPONSIBLE GROUPS ..................................................... 19
4.5
HOW TO ASSIGN RESPONSIBILITIES TO USER ............................................ 21
4.6
HOW TO ASSIGN GROUP TO USER.................................................................... 23
4.7
HOW TO ASSIGN PROGRAM TO USER ............................................................. 25
5
ADMINSTRATION MODULE........................................................................................... 26
5.1
HOW TO REGISTER NEW MENU......................................................................... 26
5.2
HOW TO REGISTER NEW REPORT..................................................................... 28
5.3
HOW TO REGISTER NEW REFERENCE............................................................ 30
5.4
HOW TO CREATE A NEW USER REFERENCE VALUES............................. 31
5.5
HOW TO CREATE A NEW SYSTEM REFERENCE VALUES ....................... 33
5.6
HOW TO SETUP CLASS LEVEL SETUP............................................................... 34
5.7
HOW TO SETUP ASSET LEVEL SETUP .............................................................. 36
5.8
HOW TO DEFINE FEATURE FOR EQUIPMENT............................................ 38
5.8.1 INSERT FEATURE DIALOG BOX......................................................................... 39
5.8.2 INSERT MONITORING TESTPOINTS DIALOG BOX................................... 41
5.9
HOW TO DEFINE THE FEATURE TYPE PREFIX .......................................... 43
5.10 HOW TO DEFINE MONITORING TYPE PREFIX........................................... 45
5.11 HOW TO DEFINE CLASS VALUES ....................................................................... 47
5.12 HOW TO DEFINE ATTRIBUTE LIST ................................................................... 50
5.13 HOW TO DEFINE DATA FORM LIST.................................................................. 53
5.14 HOW TO DEFINE DATA FORM LOOKUP ENTRY........................................ 56
5.15 HOW TO DEFINE SPANISH LABEL..................................................................... 57
6
ASSET MANAGEMENT MODULE ................................................................................. 58
6.1
ASSET MANAGEMENT SCREEN .......................................................................... 58
6.2
ASSET HIERARCHY.................................................................................................... 61
6.3
HOW TO REGISTER THE TAG AND GEOGRAPHICAL LOCATIONS ... 62
6.4
HOW TO UPDATE MECHANICAL DESIGN DATA ....................................... 63
6.5
ASSIGN FAILURE MECHANISM TO TAG.......................................................... 64
6.6
LINKING DOCUMENTS TO TAG AND FACILITIES..................................... 66
6.7
HOW TO PROCESS DATE FOR A TAG ............................................................... 69
6.8
HOW TO CALICULATE THEORITICAL CORROSION RATES................... 70
6.9
RISK BASE INSPECTION.......................................................................................... 72
6.10 RBI BASIC ASSESSMENT TYPE.............................................................................. 72
6.10.1 CONSEQUENCE OF FAILURE RANKING...................................................... 72
6.10.2 PROBABILITY OF FAILURE RANKING........................................................... 74
6.10.3 RISK RANKING MATRIX....................................................................................... 75
6.11 API 581 SEMI - QUANTITATIVE ASSESSMENT TYPE. .............................. 77
6.11.1 COF RBI SQ ASSESSMENT BY HOLE SIZE.................................................. 77
6.11.2 COF RBI SEMI QUANTITATIVE ASSESSMENT FORM ........................... 78
6.11.3 SQ- THINNING MODEL ........................................................................................ 79
6.11.4 SQ- SCC MODEL........................................................................................................ 80
6.11.5 SQ- FATIGUE MODEL ............................................................................................ 82

Page 2 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


6.12 HOW TO TEST FAILURE MECHANISMS ........................................................... 83
6.13 HOW TO KNOW THE RAMAINING LIFE OF THE SELECTED ASSET . 85
6.14 HOW TO KNOW THE NEXT INSPECTION DUE DATES ........................... 87
6.15 INSPECTION CHECK LIST TAB ............................................................................ 88
6.15.1 HOW TO SET THE CHECKLIST FOR THE SELECTED TAG................... 88
6.16 DELETE MULTIPLE TAGS ...................................................................................... 92
6.17 PIPING TAG ATTRIBUTES UPDATE................................................................... 93
6.18 VESSEL TAG ATTRIBUTES UPDATE .................................................................. 94
6.19 PIPING TAG PROCESS DATA UPDATE ............................................................. 95
6.20 PIPING FEATURE ATTRIBUTES UPDATE........................................................ 96
6.21 VESSEL FEATURE ATTRIBUTES UPDATE ....................................................... 97
6.22 COPY FUNCTIONAL GROUP FROM LOCATION .......................................... 98
6.23 COPY FEATURE FROM ONE TAG TO ANOTHER ........................................ 99
6.24 ASSIGN FAILURE MECHANISM TO TAG BATCH........................................ 100
6.25 MOVE TAGS FROM ONE FUNCTIONAL GROUP TO ANOTHER ......... 101
6.26 MOVE TEST POINTS FROM ONE FEATURE TO ANOTHER .................. 103
6.27 ASSIGN COF TO PIPING BATCH..................................................................... 104
6.28 BATCH PRINTING - COF QUESTIONAIRE..................................................... 106
6.29 BATCH PRINTING - POF QUESTIONAIRE..................................................... 107
6.30 BATCH PRINTING RBI REPORTS.................................................................... 108
6.31 BATCH PRINTING TAG DATA SHEET ......................................................... 110
6.32 BATCH PRINTING TAG FEATURE DATA SHEET ................................ 111
6.33 BATCH PRINTING FFP RED NOT COMPLETED...................................... 112
6.34 BATCH PRINTING FOLLOW UP LESS THAN 30 DAYS........................... 114
7
ASSET MANAGEMENT REPORTS ............................................................................... 115
7.1
ASSET INSPECTION REPORT WITH CLAMP FITTED ............................ 115
7.2
EQUIPMENT ATTRIBUTES ................................................................................... 115
7.3
EQUIPMENT SUMMARY BY CLASS ................................................................... 116
7.4
LIST OF ITEMS ........................................................................................................... 117
7.5
LIST OF ITEMS WITH P&ID .................................................................................. 118
7.6
LIST OF ITEMS WITH SERIAL NO...................................................................... 119
7.7
LIST OF TAG WITHIN FUNCTIONAL GROUP.............................................. 120
7.8
PIPING ATTRIBUTES............................................................................................... 121
7.9
PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME ....................................... 122
7.10 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME CHART....................... 123
7.11 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME CHART WITH WORK
TO BE DONE............................................................................................................................ 124
7.12 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ............................................ 125
7.13 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE BETWEEN DATES ..... 126
7.14 PSV ATTRIBUTES ...................................................................................................... 127
7.15 SUMMARY OF FOLLOW UP REPORT RAISED TO DATE ......................... 128
7.16 TAG & FEATURE DESIGN DATA SHEET ....................................................... 129
7.17 TAG DESIGN DATA SHEET ................................................................................. 130
7.18 ULTRASONIC WALL THICKNESS MEASUREMENT ................................... 131
7.19 UTWT DATASHEET BETWEEN DATES ....................................................... 132
8
RBI REPORTS ....................................................................................................................... 133
8.1
COF-RBI SEMI QUANTITATIVE ASSESSEMENT FORM............................ 133
8.2
COF RBI SQ ASSESSMENT BY HOLE SIZE .................................................. 133
8.3
CONSEQUENCE OF FAILURE ASSESSMENT................................................ 134
8.4
FINAL REPORT TAG RISK STATUS RBI .................................................... 135
8.5
FINAL REPORT TAG RISK STATUS SQL................................................... 137
8.6
FLAMMABLE CONSEQUENCE AREA GRAPH........................................... 138
8.7
LIST OF TAGS WITH RISK RANKING - RBI.................................................... 139
Page 3 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


8.8
LIST OF TAGS WITH RISK RANKING - SQL .................................................. 140
8.9
LIST OF TAGS WITH RISK RANKING OVERALL - RBI.............................. 141
8.10 LIST OF TAGS WITH RISK RANKING OVERALL - SQL ........................... 142
8.11 PIPELINE CONSEQUENCE INDEX................................................................... 143
8.12 PIPELINE CORROSION INDEX .......................................................................... 144
8.13 PIPELINE DESIGN INDEX.................................................................................... 145
8.14 PIPELINE OPERATION INDEX .......................................................................... 146
8.15 PIPELINE PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE................................................ 147
8.16 PIPELINE REMAINING LIFE TIME INDEX ................................................... 148
8.17 PIPELINE THIRD PARTY DAMAGE INDEX .................................................. 149
8.18 PROBABILITY OF FAILURE ASSESSMENT - RBI.......................................... 150
8.19 PROBABILITY OF FAILURE ASSESSMENT - SQL......................................... 151
8.20 PROBABILITY OF FAILURE MECHANISM OCCURRENCE...................... 152
8.21 RISK CLASSIFICATION - RBI ................................................................................ 153
8.22 RISK CLASSIFICATION - SQL ............................................................................... 154
8.23 RISK RANKING REPORT RBI ........................................................................... 155
8.24 RISK RANKING REPORT SQL .......................................................................... 157
8.25 RISK RANKING REPORT (GRAPHICAL REPERSENTATION) ................ 158
8.26 SQ FATIGUE MODEL........................................................................................... 159
8.27 SQ SCC MODEL....................................................................................................... 160
8.28 SQ THINNING MODEL ....................................................................................... 161
8.29 TAGS WITH PROBABLE FAILURE MECHANISM......................................... 162
8.30 TOXIC RELEASE AREA CONTINUOUS........................................................ 163
8.31 TOXIC RELEASE AREA INSTANTANEOUS................................................ 164
9
INSPECTION MEMO REPORTS .................................................................................... 165
9.1
RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP BASED ON CONDITION CODES IN
(BL, EC)................................................................................................................................... 165
9.2
RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP BASED ON CONTAINMENT TYPE
166
9.3
RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP BASED ON FOLLOWUP TEXT .... 167
9.4
RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP BASED ON REPAIR CODES.......... 168
9.5
RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP REPORT ................................................ 169
9.6
RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP REPORT - FFP IS GREEN AND
COMPLETED ............................................................................................................................ 170
9.7
RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP REPORT - FFP IS GREEN AND NOT
COMPLETED ............................................................................................................................ 171
9.8
RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP REPORT - FFP IS ORANGE AND 30
DAYS TO OVERDUE ............................................................................................................. 172
9.9
RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP REPORT - FFP IS ORANGE AND
COMPLETED ............................................................................................................................ 173
9.10 RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP REPORT - FFP IS ORANGE AND
NOT COMPLETED ................................................................................................................. 174
9.11 RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP REPORT - FFP IS ORANGE AND
OVERDUE.................................................................................................................................. 175
9.12 RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP REPORT - FFP IS RED AND
COMPLETED ............................................................................................................................ 176
9.13 RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP REPORT - FFP IS RED AND NOT
COMPLETED ............................................................................................................................ 177
9.14 RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP REPORT PER TAG AND NOT
CLOSED ...................................................................................................................................... 178
10 MONITORED DATA REPORTS..................................................................................... 179
10.1 OXIDE SCALE THICKNESS MEASUREMENT ............................................... 179
10.2 MPI MEASUREMENT ............................................................................................... 180
Page 4 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


10.3 LPI MEASUREMENT ................................................................................................ 181
10.4 DIMENSION CHECK MEASUREMENT ............................................................ 182
10.5 FREESPAN MEASUREMENT ................................................................................ 183
10.6 CATHODIC PROTECTION MEASUREMENT ................................................. 184
10.7 INTELLIGENT PIGGING INSPECTION........................................................... 185
10.8 CORROSION COUPONS ......................................................................................... 186
10.9 CORROSION PROBE DATA .................................................................................. 187
10.10
RADIOGRAPHY DATA ....................................................................................... 188
10.11
TELETEST DATA .................................................................................................. 189
10.12
ULTRASONIC WALL THICKNESS.................................................................. 190
10.13
AUDIT REPORT FOR UTWT (MIN.WT<MAWT)........................................ 191
10.14
AUDIT REPORT FOR UTWT (Min.WT < MAWT + 1.5) ............................ 192
11 MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE REPORTS.................................................................. 193
11.1 MOC/OV LIST WITH OPEN STATUS................................................................. 193
11.2 MOC/OV LIST WITH COMPLETED STATUS.................................................. 194
11.3 MOC/OV LIST WITH WITHDRAWN STATUS ................................................ 195
11.4 MOC/OV LIST WITH EXTENDED STATUS.................................................... 195
11.5 MOC/OV LIST WITH REJECTED STATUS....................................................... 196
11.6 MOC/OV STATUS GRAPH ..................................................................................... 197
11.7 NUMBER OF MOC/OV DUE DATE EXPIRE IN 30 DAYS.......................... 198
11.8 NUMBER OF MOC/OV EXTENSION EXPIRES IN 14 DAYS .................... 199
11.9 MOC/OV REQUEST APPROVED WITHOUT WORK ORDER.................. 200
12 MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE / OPERATING VARIATION MODULE......... 200
12.1 HOW TO CONFIGURE MOC SETUP.................................................................. 201
12.2 HOW TO CONFIGURE THE MOC STATUS SETUP...................................... 205
12.3 HOW TO CONFIGURE THE MOC PRIORITY SETUP ................................. 206
12.4 HOW TO CONFIGURE THE MOC TAB SETUP.............................................. 208
12.5 HOW TO CHECK THE MOC ACTION ITEMS ................................................ 211
12.6 HOW TO CREATE MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE REQUEST ................. 213
12.7 HOW TO CREATE OPERATING VARIATION ............................................... 217
12.8 HOW TO REVIEW THE ENGINEER TAB........................................................ 222
12.9 HOW TO REVIEW THE INSPECTION TAB..................................................... 226
12.10
HOW TO REVIEW THE OPERATION TAB................................................. 229
12.11
HOW TO REVIEW MAINTENANCE TAB.................................................... 232
12.12
HOW TO REVIEW THE SENIOR MANAGEMENT TAB ........................ 236
12.13
HOW TO REVIEW THE HSE TAB................................................................... 239
12.13.1 HOW TO SET THE COF VALUE IN HSE TAB............................................ 242
12.14
HOW TO REVIEW THE WITHDRAWN TAB .............................................. 245
12.15
HOW TO REVIEW THE EXTENSION TAB ................................................. 247
12.16
HOW TO PRINT THE MOC/OV REPORTS ................................................. 250
13 ENGINEERING REFERENCE MODULE .................................................................. 251
13.1 ENGINEERING REFERENCE VALUES............................................................ 251
13.2 DEFINE MATERIAL SPECIFICATION .............................................................. 254
13.3 DEFINE PIPING CLASEES..................................................................................... 258
13.4 DEFINE SCHEDULE NOMINAL WT ................................................................. 260
13.5 UOM CONVERSION TABLE.................................................................................. 262
13.6 FAILURE MECHANISM ........................................................................................... 263
13.7 FAILURE MODE & MECHANISM........................................................................ 265
13.8 FAILURE INSPECTION EFFECTIVENESS....................................................... 267
13.9 FM POF OPTIONS ..................................................................................................... 269
14 RISK RANKING SETUP.................................................................................................... 271
14.1 COF SETUP .................................................................................................................. 271
14.1.1 COF VALUES ........................................................................................................... 271
Page 5 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


14.1.2 COF HEADS ............................................................................................................. 273
14.1.3 HEAD ELEMENTS.................................................................................................. 275
14.1.4 ASSIGN TO CLASS .................................................................................................. 278
14.1.5 ASSIGN TO DATA FORM..................................................................................... 280
14.2 POF SETUP................................................................................................................... 281
14.2.1 POF VALUES............................................................................................................. 281
14.2.2 POF HEADS............................................................................................................... 283
14.2.3 HEAD ELEMENTS.................................................................................................. 285
14.2.4 ASSIGN TO CLASS .................................................................................................. 288
14.2.5 ASSIGN TO DATA FROM..................................................................................... 290
14.3 RISK RANKING SETUP........................................................................................... 291
14.4 CONFIDENCE RATING SETUP........................................................................... 293
14.5 INSPECTION CHECKLIST SETUP ...................................................................... 295
14.5.1 CHECKLIST ENTRY SCREEN ............................................................................ 295
14.6 INSPECTION MEMO RECOMMENDATION SETUP ................................... 297
15 DATA LOADING UTILITIES.......................................................................................... 300
15.1 TAG & FEATURE DATA UPLOADING ............................................................. 300
16 INTERFACE MANAGEMENT........................................................................................ 301
16.1 INTERFACE SETUP .................................................................................................. 301
16.2 INTERFACE LOGS .................................................................................................... 303
17 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) STRATEGY............................................ 304
17.1 PM CONCEPT.............................................................................................................. 305
17.2 PM PROGRAMME...................................................................................................... 307
17.3 PM SCHEDULE........................................................................................................... 309
17.4 DEFINE MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES............................................................. 312
17.5 PM ACTIVITIES FOR THE FAILURE MECHANISM ..................................... 314
18 MONITORED DATA.......................................................................................................... 316
18.1 ASSET MANGEMENT MONITORING DATA TAB ....................................... 317
18.2 ULTRASONIC WALL THICKNESS INSPECTION METHOD ..................... 321
18.3 INSPECTION OF RADIOGRAPHY DATA ........................................................ 327
18.4 INSPECTION OF TELETEST................................................................................. 331
18.5 INSPECTION OF CORROSION COUPON........................................................ 335
18.6 INSPECTION OF CORROSION PROBE ............................................................ 339
18.7 INSPECATION OF MAGNETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION......................... 342
18.8 INSPECTION OF LIQUID PENETRATION ..................................................... 346
18.9 INSPECTION OF DIMENSION CHECK............................................................ 349
18.10
INSPECTION OF OXIDE SCALE THICKNESS MEASUREMENT ....... 352
18.11
INSPECTION OF INTELLIGENT PIGGING............................................... 355
18.12
INSPECTION OF FREE SPAN MEASUREMENT ....................................... 359
18.13
INSPECTION OF CATHODIC PROTECTION ............................................ 362
18.14
THE SINGLE ENTRY WINDOW ALL INSPECTION METHODS..... 365
18.14.1 HOW TO ATTACH THE DOCUMENTS IN THE INSPECTION TABS368
18.14.2 GRAPHICAL PRESENTATION TAB IN INSPECTION TABS ................ 370
18.15
EXPLANATION OF THE WINDOWS FOR DIFFERENT INSPECTION
METHODS.................................................................................................................................. 371
18.15.1 ULTRA WALL THICKNESS DATA.................................................................. 371
18.15.2 RADIOGRAPHY DATA....................................................................................... 371
18.15.3 TELETEST ............................................................................................................... 371
18.15.4 CORROSION COUPON....................................................................................... 372
18.15.5 CORROSION PROBE ........................................................................................... 372
18.15.6 MPI.............................................................................................................................. 372
18.15.7 LPI............................................................................................................................... 373
18.15.8 DIMENSION CHECK........................................................................................... 373
Page 6 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


18.15.9 OXIDE SCALE THICKNESS MEASUREMENT........................................... 373
18.15.10 INTELLIGENT PIGGING ................................................................................ 373
18.15.11 FREE SPAN MEASUREMENT ........................................................................ 374
18.15.12 CATHODIC PROTECTION ............................................................................. 374
19 SHUTDOWN WORKSCOPE PREPARATION............................................................ 374
19.1 WORKSCOPE PREPARATION.............................................................................. 375
19.2 ON-STREAM WORKSCOPE PREPARATION................................................... 377
19.2.1 HOW TO PRINT ULTRASONIC WALL THICKNESS DATASHEET...... 377
19.2.2 HOW TO PRINT RADIOGRAPHY DATASHEET......................................... 378
20 INSPECTION MEMO/REPORT ..................................................................................... 379
20.1.1 HOW TO ADD INSPECTION REPORT/MEMO FOR THE SELECTED
TAG .......................................................................................................................................... 380
20.2 HOW TO VIEW/MODIFY EXISTING INSPECTION MEMO/ REPORT?
388
21 HISTORICAL DATA RECORDING............................................................................... 389
21.1 ULTRASONIC WALL THICKNESS DATA RECORDING............................. 389
21.2 HOW TO RECORD UT WALL THICKNESS DATA? ...................................... 389
21.3 RADIOGRAPHY DATA RECORDING ............................................................... 390
21.4 HOW TO RECORD NRWT FROM RADIOGRAPHY? .................................... 390
22 POWER BOILER.................................................................................................................. 391
22.1 POWER BOILER TAG LEVEL MECHANICAL DESIGN DATA ***** ..... 391
22.2 POWER BOILER FEATURE LEVEL MECHANICAL DESIGN DATA
PIPING *****.............................................................................................................................. 391
22.3 POWER BOILER FEATURE LEVEL MECHANICAL DESIGN DATA
TUBE ****** ............................................................................................................................... 391
22.4 POWER BOILER FEATURE LEVEL MECHANICAL DESIGN DATASHELL ******* ........................................................................................................................... 391
22.5 POWER BOILER FEATURE LEVEL MECHANICAL DESIGN DATAHEAD ****** .............................................................................................................................. 391
23 GENERAL UTILITIES ....................................................................................................... 392
23.1 HOW THE FILTER OPTION WORKES.............................................................. 392
23.2 HOW TO WORK WITH SORT OPTION............................................................. 393
23.3 HOW TO CHANGE THE USER PASSWORD ................................................... 394

Page 7 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

INTRODUCTION

GALIOM an Asset Integrity Management Software is designed to help Germanischer Lloyd


and its Clients to manage its data for Asset, Inspection, Planning and Maintenance data.
GALIOM helps the operator to highlight the most critical items in the facility. This User
Manual Document is designed to assist user how to use the GALIOM application efficiently.
The document is defines the functional description of the GALIOM application and not
technical aspects. User Manual would help the user to navigate within GALIOM application.

HOW TO INSTALL GALIOM FROM FRONT END

This explanation covers the entire steps to install the Galiom Application from the front end.

Pre-requisites
1. The Galiom application is fully build and the application exe should be present.

Steps to use this window


1. Extract/copy the files into a folder say C:\GALIOM (Create a folder GALIOM in
c: drive).
2. Make a shortcut of galiom.exe into your desktop. (c:\galiom\galiom.exe).
3. First time, the application would ask for database type MS-SQL Server/MS-Access.
Select MS-Access and Point the path to galiom.mdb (C:\galiom\galiom.exe).
4. Click on the button.

Page 8 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Select GALIOM.mdb

Click on open button.

When you double click the shortcut for GALIOM in desktop, a ticket number would be
generated. And program would expect an activation code for it. Select and highlight the
ticket number field and right click to copy the ticket number. Send it via email to the
following support persons in KL.
1)
2)
3)
4)

galiom.support@gl-group.com
Gareth.Thomas@gl-group.com
Mathews.Varkey@gl-group.com
tong-chang.Lim@gl-group.com

You will receive an activation code for the sent ticket number to activate the program.

FAMILIARISATION OF GALIOM ENVIRONMENT


The GALIOM environment mainly has five basic elements.
1. General Menu Items, which is available GALIOM environment all the time.
2. Tool Buttons, These items are the most frequently used action within GALIOM
application.
3. Modules, It shows the main functional modules in GALIOM application.
4. Menu Items, these are the individual screens in GALIOM application.

Page 9 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


5. Asset Hierarchy tree, this is a graphical presentation of all the assets registered under the
company.

Pre-requisites
1. The user is active user of the GALIOM Application.
2. The user should have valid user id and password to login into GALIOM
Application.

Steps to use this window


1. General Menu Items:- Which are available as long as the GALIOM Application
is active.
a. File
i. Insert The system insert a record in the active window. This
menu item is accessed by shortcut key Ctrl+I.
ii. Delete The system delete the selected record in the active
window. This menu item is accessed by shortcut key Ctrl+D.
iii. Refresh The system refresh the current active window. This
menu item is accessed by shortcut key Ctrl+R.
iv. Save The system save the modified data or created record into
database of the active window. This menu item is accessed by
shortcut key Ctrl+S.
v. Save As The system save as the active window. This menu
option is enabled/disable based on the functional requirement of
GALIOM Application. This menu item is accessed by shortcut
key Ctrl +A.
vi. Print The system will print the data of the current display
screen, before that the system display the print setup window, so
that the user can choose the printer to print the job if there are
more than one printer is configured. This menu item is accessed
by shortcut key Ctrl+P.
vii. Print Preview The system display the current active window in
the print preview mode. This menu option is enable/disable
based on the functional requirement of GALIOM application.
viii. Page Setup The system provide a provision to set the page
setup to the current active window.
ix. Exit The system will exit from the GALIOM Application.
b. Options
i. Filter The system display a window with the filter options, to
filter the data of the current display window based on the filter
criteria requested by the user. This menu option is
enabled/disable based on the functional requirement of
GALIOM Application.
ii. Sort - The system sort the data in the current display window.
This menu option is enabled/disable based on the functional
requirement of GALIOM Application.
iii. Change password - The system display a window, to change the
user password.
c. Window
i. Display the names of the windows open or active
d. Help

Page 10 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. Active window details The system display the design elements
of the current display window.
ii. Index of content ****
iii. Online Help ****
iv. About me - The system display the window with details like,
GALIOM logo and GALIOM application version.
2. Tool Buttons
a. Insert The system insert a new record in the active window.
b. Delete The system delete the selected record from the active window.
c. Save The system save the modified or created record into database of
the current active window. This tool button is enable/disable based on the
Functional requirements of GALIOM Application.
d. Refresh The system refresh the current active window. This tool
button is enable/disable based on the Functional requirements of
GALIOM Application
e. Print The system will print the data of the current display screen,
before that the system display the print setup window, so that the user
can choose the printer to print the job if there are more than one printer
is configured. This tool button is enable/disable based on the Functional
requirements of GALIOM Application.
f. Detail The system display the details of the selected record in the
window. This tool button is enable/disable based on the Functional
requirements of GALIOM Application.
g. Exit The system exit from the GALIOM application.
3. Modules
a. Administration This module deals with the administrator activates of
the GALIOM Application. They are like menu registration, report
registration, new user registration, creating the new responsible groups &
responsibilities, assigning the programs to the users & assigning the
responsibilities to the users, Assigning the groups to the users and so
many configuration windows like class level setup, Asset level setup,
define features and their prefix, Data form lookup, data form look up
reference stc.
b. Asset management This module deals with the creation of new Assets
and modifying the existing assets. This is the core module of the
GALIOM Application. And this module deals with the RBI planning
functions which are associated to the Assets.
c. Document management - This module deals about the managing the
documents in the GALIOM application. They are like Define document
Categories, Define Document Format, Define Document Templates and
Register Document.
d. Engineering Reference This module deals about the Engineering
reference details entered in the system.
e. Risk Ranking Setup This module deals Risk ranking Set of
Consequence of Failure (COF) and Probability of Failure (POF).
f. Data Loading Utilities - This utility module helps the user to load the
Tag & Feature Data into selected Dataform which include the attributes
of Tag and Feature.
g. Monitored Data - This module records, manage and analyze the
inspection done on the equipments.

Page 11 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


h. Interface Management - This module deals to Maintain the Interface
logs and Interface schedule setup, if there is any interface is linked with
Galiom Application.
i. Management of Chang - This module will manage and record the
change requirement for operating variation and management of change.
j. Preventative maintenance This module deals *****
4. Menu Items The system display all the menu items related, to that module.
This menu items are the main functional items of the GALIOM Application.
They will invoke the Graphical user interfaces, where the user
create/delete/modify/save the records.
5. Asset Hierarchy tree - The system display all the assets registered under the
company with various levels in graphical mode. The Asset Hierarchy tree display
the assets based on the levels defined for the respective client during application
implementation.

Responsibilities
1. Any active GALIOM Application user.

Navigation
Login into GALIOM application - > Login user screen.

Tool Buttons
Modules

General Menu Items


GALIOM Menu Items

Page 12 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Asset Hierarchy tree

DESCRIPTION OF TOOL BUTTON ITEMS

Quit From GALIOM Application.


Show record detail from the active Screen.
Print records from the active Screen.
Refresh records in the active Screen.
Save records in the active Screen.
Delete record from the active Screen.
Insert new record into the active Screen.

Page 13 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

GALIOM APPLICATION SECURITY

INTRODUCTION
GALIOM starts with user authentication. Every user of GALIOM would be assigned with a
user id and password. The user ids are assigned with group code and responsibilities. Based
on the responsibilities, the users could only edit, modify, create and delete the assets in the
GALIOM application. Similar based on the user responsibilities the users can edit, modify,
create and delete the document in the GALIOM application. The user with Administrator
right can edit, create, modify and delete the assets and documents in the GALIOM
application.

4.1

HOW TOLOGON INTO GALIOM APPLICATION

When the GALIOM Application icon, or the application is invoked. The system display the
GALIOM Login screen with User Id, Password, Language columns and also with a window
to select the database.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user
2. The user should have valid user id and password.

Steps to use this window


1. Click on the GALIOM Application icon, or invoke the GALIOM Application

Responsibilities
1. Any Active GALIOM Application user.

Navigation
Click on GALIOM Application icon - > Login user screen

Page 14 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. User Id (M)
a. The user enter user id.
2. Password (M)
a. The user enters the password.
i. The system displays the special characters.
3. Language (M)
a. By default the system selects the English.
b. Based on the language selected, the system displays the menu and column labels
in the selected language.
c. Most of the time the default language is set during the installation time. Once it is
locked during implementation by the implementer, the language dropdown box
will be in disable mode.
4. Logon button (M)
a. Once the user enter the user id and password and clicked ok button, the system
allow the user to enter into GALIOM application
i. The system validate the user id and Password, if they are active and valid
the system permit the user to enter into the GALIOM Application
ii. If the user enters wrong user id or password, the system displays the
following message User id or password is incorrect with ok button.
5. Close button (M)
a. If the user does not want to enter into the GALIOM Application, the press close
button.
1. The system closes the GALIOM Login screen..

Report
None.

4.2 HOW TO REGISTER NEW USER


This screen allows the ADMIN to create a new application user who will have access to
GALIOM software. The user id and group code are the mandatory columns. This screen
would capture the date of creation and the admin user id, who has created the new user id.
GALIOM allows multiple users to become administrator.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADIMN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to use this window


1. Insert button:- The system insert a new record in the user registration window.
2. Delete button:- The system Delete the selected record from the user registration
window.

Page 15 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

3.
4.
5.
6.

a. When user try to delete the sleeted record, the system displays the following
message You are about to delete the selected record, Do you wish to
continuewith Yes and No buttons.
i. If user selects the Yes button, the system deletes the selected record. If
the user selects the No button, the system will not delete the selected
record.
Save button:- The system save the record.
Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display window.
Exit button:- The system Exit from the GALIOM Application.
RESET PASSWORD button:- The system set user id as password to the selected
user

Responsibilities
1. The user should have ADMIN responsibilities.

Navigation
Click Main menu

Click on Administration

Click on user registration menu item.

Column Description
1.

User ID (M)
a. Enter the new user GALIOM user id.
i. If the user try to save the record, without entering any value in this
column, the system display the following message User Id is must.

2.

User Name (O)


a. Enter the user name

3.

Description (O)
Page 16 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


a. Enter the description about the new user
4.

Group Code (M)


a. Select the responsible group for the new GALIOM user.
i. If the user try to save the record, without entering any value in this
column, the system display the following message Group code is
must.

5.

Employment Title (O)


a. Enter the Employment title of the new GALIOM user (i.e., AIM Engineer
etc).

6.

Employment Type (O)


a. Select the Employment type (i.e., Contract, Permanent, Temporary employee)
from the dropdown.

7.

Indicator
a. Enter the department name, to which the user is assigned

8.

Reporting Indicator (O)


a. Enter the name/user id of next hierarchical user, to whom the user is to
report.

9.

Email (O)
a. Enter the email id of the new GALIOM user.
i. Enter the valid email user id.

10. Office Phone (O)


a. Enter the Office phone number.
11. Home Phone (O)
a. Enter the new user residence phone number.
12. Fax (O)
a. Enter the Fax number.
13. Pass.Expiry Date (O)
a. This is one of the columns used as a security option in the GALIOM
application. Once the current date is greater than the pass.Expiry date, the
system will not allow the user to access the GALIOM application.
14. Active (M)
a. This is one of the columns used as a security option in the GALIOM
application. As long the active check box is selected against the selected user,
the user is active employee and the user can enable to access the GALIOM
application. By default the check box is checked (i.e., Active).
i. If the ADMIN uncheck this option against the selected user and the
selected user try to login into GALIOM, the system display a message
User ID or password is incorrect.
15. Created Date (D)
a. The system should display the created date, when ever user (i.e., ADMIN)
created this record.
Page 17 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

16. Created User (D)


a. The system should display the created user id that is created this record (i.e.,
ADMIN user Id).

Report
None.

4.3 HOW TO CREATE RESPONSIBILITIES


This is one of the windows in administration module, used to create the new responsibilities
or to modify the responsibility name, description, active columns for existing responsibility
record in GALIOM. The user, who is having ADMIN responsibilities, can only create the
new responsibility or modify the existing responsibility record.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADMIN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system insert a new record.
2. Save button:- The system save the record.
3. Delete button:- After selecting the record, when user press delete button the system
will display the following message You are about to delete the selected record, Do
you wish to continue with Yes & No buttons. If user press yes button, the selected
record is deleted. And if user presses No button, the system will not delete the selected
record.
4. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display.
5. Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1.

Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Administration

Click on responsibilities menu Item

Page 18 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1.

Responsibility Code (M)


a. Enter the responsible code.
i. Once the record is saved, the responsibilities code will not be editable
(i.e., it will be read only mode)

2.

Responsibility name (O)


a. Enter the responsibilities name.

3.

Description (O)
a. Enter the description for the responsibilities name.

4.

Active (M)
a. This is one of the columns used as a security option in the GALIOM
application. As long the active check box is selected against the selected
responsibilities, the responsibilities is active and all the users who are assign
with these responsibilities can perform the respective task defines in the
responsibilities. By default the check box is checked (i.e., Active).
i. If the ADMIN uncheck this option against the selected
responsibilities, then that responsibility is no more active group in the
GALIOM application.

5.

Created Date (D)


a. The system should display the created date, when ever user (i.e., ADMIN)
created this record.

6.

Created User (D)


a. The system should display the created user id that is created this record (i.e.,
ADMIN user Id).

Report
None

4.4 HOW TO CREATE RESPONSIBLE GROUPS


This is one of the windows in administration module, used to register the new responsible
group or used to modify the user group name, description, head name etc columns for the
existing record (i.e., for selected responsible group) in GALIOM. The user, who is having
ADMIN responsibilities, can only register the new responsible group or modify the columns
values in the existing responsible user record.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADMIN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to the usage of this window

Page 19 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


1. Insert button:- The system insert a new record.
2. Save button:- The system save the record.
3. Delete button:- After selecting the record, when user press delete button the system
will display the following message You are about to delete the selected record, Do
you wish to continue with Yes & No buttons. If user press yes button, the selected
record is deleted. And if user presses No button, the system will not delete the selected
record.
4. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display.
5. Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application

Responsibilities
Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Administration

Click on responsible group menu Item

Column Description
1. Group Code (M)
a. Enter the New responsible group code.
i. Once the responsible group code is saved, the value in this column is
not editable. It will be in display mode only.
2. Group Name (O)
a. Enter the responsible group name.
3. Description (O)
a. Enter the description for the responsible group.
4. Head Name (O)
a. Enter the respective head name (user name) against selected responsible
group.
5. Office Phone (O)
a. Enter the Office phone number.
Page 20 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

6. Home Phone (O)


a. Enter the residence Number.
7. Fax (O)
a. Enter the office fax number.
8. Active (M)
a. This is one of the columns used as a security option in the GALIOM
application. As long the active check box is selected against the selected
responsible group, the responsible group is active and all the users belong to
that responsible group can access the GALIOM application. By default the
check box is checked (i.e., Active).
i. If the ADMIN uncheck this option against the selected responsible
group that means the selected responsible group is no more active
group in the GALIOM application.
9. Created Date (D)
a. The system should display the created date, when ever user (i.e., ADMIN)
created this record.
10. Created User (D)
a. The system should display the created user id that is created this record (i.e.,
ADMIN user Id).

Report
None.

4.5 HOW TO ASSIGN RESPONSIBILITIES TO USER


This is one of the windows in administration module, used to assign the active
responsibilities to the GALIOM active users. The user, who is having ADMIN
responsibilities, can only create the new responsibility or modify the existing responsibility
record.
Note:- Description about the responsibilities
No

Responsibility
Code
1 ADMIN

Responsibility Name
Administrator

2 ASTEDT

Asset Editor

3 ASTVEW

Asset View

4 CORENG

Corrosion Engineer

5 DOCEDT

Document Editor

Responsibility Description
One who edit the whole Galiom
System
One who edits the Asset Register
Data.
One who wish to view the asset
Register but will not have any
access to add, delete or modify
data.
Corrosion Engineer For RBI
Analysis.
One who does editing of

Page 21 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


No

Responsibility
Code
6 ENGDEL
7 ENGEDT
8 MAINTC

9 MEMOEDT
10 MOCDEL
11 MOCEDIT
12 MONDEL
13 MONEDT
14
15
16
17

PLANDEL
PLANEDIT
REFEDT
RELENG

18 USRMGT

Responsibility Name

Responsibility Description

documents and links documents.


Engineering
Records One who can delete data in
Deletion
engineering references.
Engineering Ref Editor One who does editing of
engineering references.
Maintenance
For Maintenance Activities.
Coordinator
Memo Editors Right
One who does editing the memos
MOC Deletion
Who can delete the Management
of change and operating variation
request
MOC Editor
Who can edit the Management of
change and Operating variation
request
Monitoring Data
Users can Delete the Records in
the Minotoring Data windows
Monitored Data Editor One who does editing of
Monitored Data.
Role for Planner delete
Delete Authority
Planner Role
Reference Editor
Group that can edit references
Reliability Engineer
For RBI Analysis. Works closely
to Operations And Maintenance
Operators. Validates Historical
Data.
User Management
Group That Manages The Users.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADMIN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system insert a record.
2. Delete button:- After selecting the record, when user press delete button the system
will display the following message You are about to delete the selected record, Do
you wish to continue with Yes & No buttons. If user press yes button, the selected
record is deleted. And if user presses No button, the system will not delete the
selected record.
3. Save button:- The system save the record.
4. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display.
5. Exit:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Page 22 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Responsibilities
1.

Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Administration

Click on Assign Responsibility to users menu Item

Column Description
1.

Responsibility code (M)


a. Select the responsibility code from the drop down, for the selected user.

2.

Active (M)
a. The system by default assigns the selected responsibility to select user.
i. The ADMIN will uncheck, if any responsibility access is removed to
the selected user.

3.

Update date (D)


a. The system display the updated date, when ever user modifies the data.

4.

Updated user (D)


a. The system displays the updated user who ever modifies the data in this
window.

Report
None.

4.6 HOW TO ASSIGN GROUP TO USER


This is one of the windows in administration module, used to assign the groups to selected
user. Each user can be in one or more groups. The user, who is having ADMIN
responsibilities, can only Assign the group or modify the group code of the existing record.

Pre-requisites
Page 23 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

1. The login user should be ADMIN group.


2. The login ADMIN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system insert a record.
2. Delete button:- After selecting the record, when user press delete button the system
will display the following message You are about to delete the selected record, Do
you wish to continue with Yes & No buttons. If user press yes button, the
selected record is deleted. And if user presses No button, the system will not delete
the selected record.
3. Save button:- The system save the record.
4. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display.
5. Exit:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1.

Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Administration

Click on Assign group to users

Column Description
1. Group Code (M)
a. Select the respective responsible group from the drop down, which is going
to assign to the selected user.
2. Update date (D)
a. The system display the updated date, when ever user modifies the data.
3. Updated user (D)
a. The system displays the updated user who ever modifies the data in this
window.

Report
None.
Page 24 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

4.7 HOW TO ASSIGN PROGRAM TO USER


This is one of the windows in administration module, used to assign the modules/ menu
items to the GALIOM active users. The user, who is having ADMIN responsibilities, can
only assign the modules/ menu items to the users. Once user select the user, the system
display all the modules with menu items present in them with two check boxes options, one
is active checkbox and other one is View check box.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADMIN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Save button:- The system save the record.
2. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display.
3. Exit:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1.

Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Administration

Click on Assign program to user menu item

Column Description
1.

Active (M)
a. By default, all the modules and menu Items are accessible to the user. If the
ADMIN uncheck the active button against any module/menu item for the
selected user. The system will not display the respective menu item to the
user, when the user login into the GALIOM system.
Page 25 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. This is one of the security columns, used in GALIOM to provide
access/stop access to edit the modules/menu items in the GALIOM
application.
View (O)
a. By default, the check box is in uncheck (i.e., all the modules/menu items are
editable). If the ADMIN checks the view button against any module/menu
item for the selected user. The system will not allow the user to edit the
respective module/ menu item (i.e., the window will be read only)
i. This is one of the security columns, used in GALIOM to set to read
only option to the menu items.
3. Update date (D)
a. The system display the updated date, when ever user modifies the data.
2.

4.

Updated user (D)


a. The system displays the updated user who ever modifies the data in this
window.

Report
None

ADMINSTRATION MODULE
INTRODUCTION
This module mainly deals with the configuration setups by the Admistrator in the
GALIOM Application. Most of the configuration setups will be done during the
implimentation stage. All the configuration setup window can only accessed by the
ADMIN resposibility user.

5.1 HOW TO REGISTER NEW MENU


This is one of the administration configuration window to register the new menu item in
GALIOM. The user, who is having ADMIN responsibilities, can only register the new menu
item.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADMIN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button: - The system insert a new record.
2. Save button:- The system save the record.
3. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record. When user try to delete the
selected record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete the
selected record with Yes and No options. If the user clicks on No button, the
system will not delete the selected record, if the user select the Yes button, the
system delete the selected record from the database.
4. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display page.

Page 26 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


5.

Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
MainMenu

Administration

Click on menu registration.

Column Description
1. Module Name (M)
a. The user is to select the respective module name from the drop down, under
which the new menu should appear.
2. SEQ(O)
a. The seq number defines the position of the menu item in that particular
module.
3. Program code (M)
a. The user should specify the name of design element (i.e., PB window name).
4. Program name (M)
a. The name of the menu item should appear to the GALIOM users.
5. Parameter (O)
a. The parameter column is a provision to ADMIN, to configure a pre defined
value in the menu item based on the client requirements.
6. Active (M)

Page 27 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


a. This column provides one of the security accesses present in the GALIOM.
Based on the clients requirement, The ADMIN will provide the access/no
access to the menu items.
b. By default all the menu items are in active.
7. Updated date (O)
a. The system display the updated date, when ever user (i.e., ADMIN) modifies
the data.
8. Updated User (O)
a. The system displays the updated user, with the Admin user id, when ever user
modifies the data in this window.

Report
None

5.2 HOW TO REGISTER NEW REPORT


This is one of the administration configuration window to register the new report in
GALIOM. The user, who is having ADMIN responsibilities, can only register the new menu
item.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADMIN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Save button:- The system save the record.
2. Insert button:- The system will insert a new record.
3. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record. When user try to delete the
selected record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete the
selected record with Yes and No options. If the user clicks on No button, the
system will not delete the selected record, if the user select the Yes button, the
system delete the selected record from the database.
4. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display page.
5. Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
MainMenu

Administration

Click on report registration menu Item..

Page 28 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Module Name (M)
a. The user is to select the respective module name from the drop down, under
which the new report should appear.
2. SEQ (O)
a. The seq number defines the position of the report item in that particular
module.
3. Report code (M)
a. The user should specify the name of design element (i.e., PB window name).
4.

Report Name (M)


a. The name of the report should appear to the GALIOM users.

5. Updated date (D)


a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user (i.e., ADMIN)
modifies the data.
6. Updated User (D)
a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.

Report
None.

Page 29 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

5.3 HOW TO REGISTER NEW REFERENCE


This is one of the administration configuration windows to register the new reference in
GALIOM. The user, who is having ADMIN responsibilities, can only register the new
reference items.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADMIN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system will insert a new record.
2. Save button:- The system save the record.
3. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record. When user try to delete the
selected record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete the
selected record with Yes and No options. If the user clicks on No button, the
system will not delete the selected record, if the user select the Yes button, the
system delete the selected record from the database.
4. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display page.
5. Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Administration

Click on Reference Master menu Item..

Page 30 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Seq (D)
a. The system automatically displays the seq number.
i. The system increment the seq number automatically
2. Reference Type (M)
a. Enter the new reference type
3. Description (O)
a. Enter the description of the reference type.
4. Ref. Group (O)
a. Select the reference group from the drop down.
5. Updated date (D)
a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user (i.e., ADMIN)
modifies the data.
6. Updated User (D)
a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.

Report
None.

5.4 HOW TO CREATE A NEW USER REFERENCE VALUES


This is one of the administration configuration windows to register the new user reference in
GALIOM. The user, who is having ADMIN responsibilities, can only register the new user
reference items .

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADMIN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system will insert a new record.
2. Save button:- The system save the record.
3. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record. When user try to delete the
selected record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete the
selected record with Yes and No options. If the user clicks on No button, the
system will not delete the selected record, if the user select the Yes button, the system
delete the selected record from the database.
4. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display page.
5. Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
Page 31 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Administration

Click User Reference values menu Item..

Column Description
1. Seq (D)
a. Automatically the system displays the seq number.
2. Code (M)
a. Enter the code for the reference.
3. Reference Name (O)
a. Enter the reference name
4. Description (O)
a. Enter the description
5. Active (M)
a. If the check box is checked, the reference value is active. If the check box is
not checked, the reference value is not active.
i. By default the system check the check box.
6. Updated date (D)
a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user (i.e., ADMIN)
modifies the data.
7. Updated User (D)
a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.

Report
None

Page 32 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

5.5 HOW TO CREATE A NEW SYSTEM REFERENCE VALUES


This is one of the administration configuration windows to register the new system reference
in GALIOM. The user, who is having ADMIN responsibilities, can only register the new
system reference items.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADMIN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system will insert a new record.
2. Save button:- The system save the record.
3. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record. When user try to delete the
selected record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete the
selected record with Yes and No options. If the user clicks on No button, the
system will not delete the selected record, if the user select the Yes button, the system
delete the selected record from the database.
4. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display page.
5. Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Administration

Click System Reference values menu Item..

Column Description
1. Seq (D)
a. Automatically the system displays the seq number

Page 33 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


2. Code (M)
a. Enter the code for the reference
3. Reference Name (O)
a. Enter the reference name
4. Description (O)
a. Enter the description
5. Active (M)
a. If the check box is checked, the reference value is active. If the check box is
not checked, the reference value is not active.
i. By default the system check the check box.
6. Updated date (D)
a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user (i.e., ADMIN)
modifies the data.
7. Updated User (D)
a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.

Report
None

5.6 HOW TO SETUP CLASS LEVEL SETUP


This is one of the administration configuration windows to setup class level setup in
GALIOM Application. The user, who is having ADMIN responsibilities, can only setup
class level setup. This is the main core setup, which define the Asset/Class level Hierarchy in
GALIOM Application.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADMIN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system will insert a new record.
2. Save button:- The system save the record.
3. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record. When user try to delete the
selected record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete the
selected record with Yes and No options. If the user clicks on No button, the
system will not delete the selected record, if the user select the Yes button, the system
delete the selected record from the database.
4. Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Page 34 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Navigation
Main Menu

Administration

Click Class Level Setup menu Item.

Column Description
1. Level (M)
a. Enter the class level name.
2. Description (O)
a. Enter the description for the class
3. Level Group(D)
a. The system set the Level group as CLASSHIER.
i. The column is not editable.
4. Relationship (M)
a. Select the relationship for the class.
5. COF Required (O)
a. Check the check box, if the COF required for the class
6. Approval Required (O)
a. Check the check box, if the Approval required for the class
7. Updated date (D)
a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user (i.e., ADMIN)
modifies the data.
8. Updated User (D)
a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.
9. Created Date (D)
a. The system should display the created date, when ever user (i.e., ADMIN)
setup a class level setup.
10. Create User (D)
a. The system should display the created user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user setup a class level setup.

Page 35 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Report
None

5.7 HOW TO SETUP ASSET LEVEL SETUP


This is one of the administration configuration windows to setup asset level setup in
GALIOM Application. The user, who is having ADMIN responsibilities, can only setup
asset level setup. This is the main core setup, which define the Asset/Class level Hierarchy in
GALIOM Application.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADMIN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system will insert a new record, for the selected level i.e.,
Company/Business
unit/Area/Complex/Location/Functional/Tag/Feature
or
Equipemnt/testpoint.
2. Save button:- The system save the record.
3. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record. When user try to delete the
selected record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete the
selected record with Yes and No options. If the user clicks on No button, the
system will not delete the selected record, if the user select the Yes button, the system
delete the selected record from the database.
4. Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Administration

Click Asset Level Setup menu Item.

Column Description
Page 36 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

1. Level (M)
a. Enter the level name to be called or shown in the Asset hierarchal tree
2. Description (O)
a. Enter the description for the level
3. Level Group(M)
a. Select the value from the drop down, whether the level is MAINHER or
SUBHIER
4. Relationship (M)
a. Select the relationship from the drop down based on the Level scope. That is
whether this level is relation ship is one to many/one to one/Many to
many/Many to one
5. COF Required (O)
a. Check the check box, if the level required Consequence of failure.
6. Approval Required (O)
a. Check the check box, if the level required the Approval.
7. Installed (O)
a. Check the check box, if the level is installed or not.
8. Failure Mech.Required (O)
a. Check the check box, if the level required the Failure Mechanism.
9. Document Required (O)
a. Check the check box, if the level required the docuemtns.
10. Updated date (D)
a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user (i.e., ADMIN)
modifies the data
11. Updated User (D)
a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.
12. Created Date (D)
a. The system should display the created date, when ever user (i.e., ADMIN)
setup a asset level setup.
13. Create User (D)
a. The system should display the created user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user setup a asset level setup.
14. Class level (M)
a. Select the class level from the drop down for the selected level
15. Mandatory (M)
a. Check the check box, if the class type is mandatory

Page 37 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Report
None.

5.8 HOW TO DEFINE FEATURE FOR EQUIPMENT


Through this window the ADMIN will define features for a particular equipment type. The
feature types are already defined in the class values window under the FEATYP level. When
user tries to insert features for the TAG in the system, the system will automatically take the
Features for the TAG based on the Equipment type of the TAG.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADIMN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to use this window


1. Insert button:- The system insert a new record in the reference values window for the
selected Equipment type.
2. Delete button:- The system Delete the selected record from the reference value
window.
a. When user try to delete the sleeted record, the system displays the following
message Do you wish to delete the selected record with Yes and No buttons.
i. If user selects the Yes button, the system deletes the selected record. If
the user selects the No button, the system will not delete the selected
record.
3. Save button:- The system save the record.
4. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display window.
5. Exit button:- The system Exit from the GALIOM Application.

Responsibilities
1. The user should have ADMIN responsibilities.

Navigation
Click Main menu
menu item.

Click on Administration

Click on Define Feature for equipment

Page 38 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1.

Equipment Type ( M)
a. Select the Equipment from the drop down. System will display all the
active equipments present in the GALIOM application.

2.

Seq No(D)
a. The system automatically display the seq number for each feature defined
to that equipment.
i. The system automatically increment the seq number.

3.

Feature type (M)


a. Select the feature type from the drop down. Once the feature type is
selected, the prefix (i.e., feature name) will automatically display, if the
prefix is defined in the Define feature type prefix window for the
selected feature.
i. If the feature prefix is not defined for the selected feature, the
system display the following message Prefix not defined for the
feature type with Ok Button. And the system allows the user to
enter the prefix for the selected feature.

4.

Feature name (O)


a. Enter the feature name for the feature.

5.

Updated Date (D)


a. The system display the updated date, when ever user modifies the data.

6.

Updated User (D)


a. The system displays the updated user who ever modifies the data in this
window

Report
None
5.8.1 INSERT FEATURE DIALOG BOX
The dialog box is the popup window that appears to the user when he wants to insert
Features for the TAG. The Fig 8 below depicts how and where the Option is available to the
user. When the user is at the Tag level in the Asset tree and then the user right clicks the
drop down of the option will be available and the INSERT FEATURE option will help the
user to open the dialog box. On Applying (the option available in the dialog box) will insert
the Feature into the asset tree.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be GALIOM Application user and should login into GALIOM
application..
2. User should have the ASTEDT or the Asset edit rights to proceed with insertion of
new features into the system.

Page 39 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Steps to use this window


1. Right click mouse button, after selecting the tag in the Asset Hierarchy tree

Responsibilities
1. The user must have ASTEDT Responsibility rights.

Navigation
Asset Hierarchy Tree  Tag level Assets Right Click

When user selects Feature the following window will be displayed by the system.

Column Description
1. Seq no (D)
a. Sequence number for the number of feature attached to the TAG
2. Feature type (M)
a. Column classifying the feature type as defined in the Class Values for the
Class FEATYP
3. Feature Name (O)

Page 40 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


a. Column for entering the name of the feature of the equipment, the name will
take into account the prefix if already defined in the window for defining
prefix for the Feature. These Features will appear automatically if you try to
insert features for the Tag of the Equipment Type for which the Features are
defined. The records here will appear automatically if the Feature Names
have been defined in the other window Define Features for the Equipment
based on the Equipment Type of the TAG.
4. Selected (M)
a. Default appears as selected. This is taken into account when the user finally
presses the Apply button to add the Feature under the TAG . Only the
selected one will be the one which will get added into the system ie the
features will be added under the TAG in the tree Hierarchy.
5. Insert button:- Inserts a record in the list of the features that are being added for the
Tag.
6. Delete button:- Deletes a record from the list of the features that are being added for
the Tag.
7. Apply button:- Button which when clicked will initiate the activity of adding the
features under the tag finally. The popup window closes automatically after changes are
made in the Hierarchy.
8. Close button:- Button for closing the popup window without doing anything.

Report
None.
5.8.2 INSERT MONITORING TESTPOINTS DIALOG BOX
This dialog box is for the user to insert new test points into the system. Based on the
Monitoring type the Prefix appears automatically if it is defined in the window for Define
Prefix for Monitoring types. The other columns in the window help in naming the test
point. Thereby the window appears only at the feature level and not at any other level.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be GALIOM Application user and should login into GALIOM
application..
2. User should have the ASTEDT or the Asset edit rights to proceed with insertion of
new features into the system.

Steps to use this window


1. Right click mouse button, after selecting the feature in the Asset Hierarchy tree

Responsibilities
1. The user must have ASTEDT Responsibility rights.

Navigation
Asset Hierarchy Tree  Feature level Assets Right Click

Page 41 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

When user selects Insert Test point, the following window will be displayed by the
system.

Column Description
1. Monitoring Type (M)
a. Drop down for selecting the type of Monitoring testpoint under
consideration and that need to be added under the Feature in the Asset
Hierarchy.
2. Prefix (O)
a. In the prefix that either appears automatically if it is already defined in the
window Define Prefix for the Monitoring type or is editable for the user to
enter or can be left blank such that the Insert from , to sequence no will be
taken into consideration while forming the test point Name.
b. Validation check on the column Please select a Monitoring type appears if
the users presses the apply button without selecting a monitoring type. Since
the Test points created will have a certain class based on the Monitoring type
selected, this column cannot be left blank.
3. Insert From (M)
a. Is the numeric value that holds the test point start number for the test points
under the feature The arrow keys here can be used to increment/decrement
the number by 1.

Page 42 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


b.

Validation check on the column if tried to proceed without having proper


data in the column, the system gives the message Insert from cannot be
blank.

4. Insert To (M)
a. Is the numeric value that holds the test point to number for the test points
under the feature. The arrow keys here can be used to increment/decrement
the number by 1.
b. Validation check on the column if tried to proceed without having proper
data in the column, the system gives the message Insert to cant be blank.
c. Validation check on the column Insert to cant be less than Insert from ie
The value of insert to column is less than that in the Insert from. This goes
against the system logic and thereby the message. Accordingly the test points
will get created from the sequence no of insert from value to the insert to
value.
5. Apply button:- Once clicked will finally add the Testpoints under the Asset or the
Feature. The popup window will close automatically once it has done with the Adding
of the Testpoints to the Feature. The same will get reflected in the Asset tree
instantaneously.
6. Close button:- . This button is an option available to the user to close the popup
window without doing anything. Short cut is Alt c.

Report
None

5.9 HOW TO DEFINE THE FEATURE TYPE PREFIX


Through this window, the ADMIN can define the prefix for each feature defined in the
GALIOM Application.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADIMN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to use this window


1. Save button:- The system save the record.
2. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display window.
3. Print button:- The system will print the current display window, before print the
document, the system display the print setup window to select the printer if there is
more than one printer is configured.
4. Exit button:- The system Exit from the GALIOM Application.

Responsibilities
1. The user should have ADMIN responsibilities.

Navigation

Page 43 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


Click Main menu
menu item.

Click on Administration

Click on Define prefix for feature Type

Column Description
1.

Class (D)
a. The system display all the class values defined in the define class window
under the FEATYP level.
i. The system automatically display all the class values, it will not allow
the user to edit this column.

2.

Description (D)
a. The system display all the description data defined in the define class
window under the FEATYP level.
i. The system automatically display all the description data, it will not
allow the user to edit this column.

3.

Prefix (O)
a. Enter the prefix name.
i. The system will use this prefix name, when user inserts a feature in
the Asset Hierarchy tree.

4.

Updated Date (D)


a. The system display the updated date, when ever user modifies the data.

5.

Updated User (D)


a. The system displays the updated user who ever modifies the data in this
window.

Report
File

Print Preview

Page 44 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

5.10 HOW TO DEFINE MONITORING TYPE PREFIX


Through this window, the ADMIN can define the prefix for each monitoring type defined in
the GALIOM Application.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADIMN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to use this window


1. Save button:- The system save the record.
2. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display window.
3. Print button:- The system will print the current display window, before print the
document, the system display the print setup window to select the printer if there is
more than one printer is configured.
4. Exit button:- The system Exit from the GALIOM Application.

Responsibilities
1. The user should have ADMIN responsibilities.

Navigation
Click Main menu
Type menu item.

Click on Administration

Click on Define prefix for Monitoring

Page 45 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1.

Class (D)
a. The system display all the class values defined in the define class window
under the FEATYP level.
i. The system automatically display all the class values, it will not allow
the user to edit this column.

2.

Description (D)
a. The system display all the description data defined in the define class
window under the MONTYP level.
i. The system automatically display all the description data, it will not
allow the user to edit this column.

3.

Prefix (O)
a. Enter the prefix name
i. The system will use this prefix name, when user inserts a feature in
the Asset Hierarchy tree.

4.

Updated Date (D)


a. The system display the updated date, when ever user modifies the data.

5.

Updated User (D)


a. The system displays the updated user who ever modifies the data in this
window.

Report
File

Print Preview

Page 46 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

5.11 HOW TO DEFINE CLASS VALUES


This is one of the administration configuration windows to define the class values under the
class level hierarchy configured in GALIOM application. The user, who is having ADMIN
responsibilities, can only define the class values. And also user can define the parent class for
the selected class value. The user can link the data form for the selected class value and also
the user can define Linked checklist.
The class type changes with the change of asset levels. If user has selected Location level
then location type would be available for selection of class values. If the user is in functional
group level then functional group type would be available as selection for class values. And
then when Tag level is selected equipment type would be available as class values for
selection.
ASSET TYPE
CLASS TYPE
LOCATION
LOCTYP
FUNCTIONAL GROUP
FUCGRP
TAG
EQNTYP
FEATURE
FEATYP
TESTPOINT
MONTYP
TESTPOINT
REAPRO
If user has happen to change the class value the data related to asset would be deleted as
many of the data is related to the equipment type. Data related to mechanical design data and
process data, the consequence of failure and probability of failure would be deleted as for
new class values it may be different.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADMIN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system will insert a new record to define the new class value,
before pressing the insert button select the class level hierarchy, based on the class type
whether it is Feature type (FEATYP)/Monitor type (MONTYP)/Functional Group
(FUNGRP) etc .
2. Save button:- The system save the record.
Page 47 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


3. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record. When user try to delete the
selected record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete the
selected record with Yes and No options. If the user clicks on No button, the
system will not delete the selected record, if the user select the Yes button, the system
delete the selected record from the database.
4. Refresh button:-The system refreshes the current active window.
5. Print button:- The system will print the current display window. Before the print the
system display the print setup window to select the printer, if there is more than one
printer is configured.
6. Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Administration

Click Define class values menu Item.

Column Description
1. ClassId (D)
a. The system displays the id.
i. Automatically the system assigns the unique id to all class values
define in the GALIOM application.
2. Class value (M)
a. Enter the class value.
3. Active (M)
a. If the check box is checked, the class value is active, if the check box is not
checked the class value is not active.
i. By default the system check the check box.

Page 48 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


4. Description (O)
a. Enter the description for the class value.
5. Updated date (D)
a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user (i.e., ADMIN)
modifies the data.
6. Updated User (D)
a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.

7. Parent Class Tab Page


a. Insert button:- The system insert a row in the Parent class tab page.
i. Select the parent class from the drop down, If the current class value
is associated with any parent class.
ii. Update date, the system capture the update date.
iii. Update User, the system capture the updated user id.
b. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record from the Parent class
tab.
c. Save button:-The system save the record in the parent class tab.
d. Refresh button:- The system refresh the parent class tab page.

8. Data forms Linked Tab page


a. Insert Button:- The system insert a row in the Data forms Linked tab page
i. Select the data form from the drop down, if any data form should
linked for the current class value.
ii. Updated date, the system capture the update date.
iii. Update User, the system capture the updated user id.
b. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record from the Data forms
Linked tab page.

Page 49 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


c. Save button:-The system save the record in the Data form Linked tab page.
d. Refresh button:- The system refresh the Data form Linked tab page.

9. Linked Checklist Tab page


a. Insert Button:- The system insert a row in the Linked Checklist tab page
i. Select the check list name from the drop down, if any checklist
should linked for the current class value.
ii. Updated date, the system capture the update date.
iii. Update User, the system capture the updated user id.
b. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record from the Linked
Checklist tab page.
c. Save button:-The system save the record in the Linked Checklist tab page.
d. Refresh button:- The system refresh the Data form Linked tab page.

Report
File

Print preview

5.12 HOW TO DEFINE ATTRIBUTE LIST


This is one of the administration configuration windows to define the attribute list in
GALIOM. The user, who is having ADMIN responsibilities, can only define the attribute
values.

Pre-requisites

Page 50 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADMIN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system will insert a new record.
2. Save button:- The system save the record.
3. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record. When user try to delete the
selected record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete the
selected record with Yes and No options. If the user clicks on No button, the
system will not delete the selected record, if the user select the Yes button, the system
delete the selected record from the database.
4. Print button:- The system will print the current display window. before the print the
system display the print setup window to select the printer, if there is more than one
printer is configured.
5. Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Administration

Click Define attributes list menu Item.

Column Description
1. Attribute Name (M)
a. Enter the attribute name
2. label (O)
a. Enter the label for the attribute

Page 51 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

3. Description (O)
a. Enter the description for the attribute.
4. Data type (M)
a. Select the Attribute data type from the drop down.
5. Data size (O)
a. Set the data size by using spin control or edit the column to enter the data
size.
6. Dec size (O)
a. Set the Decimal size by using the spin control or edit the column to enter the
decimal values.
7. UOM (O)
a. Select the Unit of Measurement from the drop down.
8. Default Value (O)
a. Enter the default value for this attribute.
9. Ref Type (O)
a. Select the reference type from the drop down.
10. Column Mode (O)
a. Select the column mode (i.e., whether it is Optional, Mandatory, Display and
Hidden) from the drop down.
11. Text case(O)
a. Select the text case (i.e., ANY, UPPER and LOWER) from the drop down.
12. Active (M)
a. The attribute is active, if the check box is checked. The attribute is not active,
if the check box is not checked.
i. By default the system check the check box (i.e., the attribute is active)
13. Formula (O)
a. Set the formula, if the attribute require any formula.
i. The system provides the formula editor to compute the formula.
14. Updated date (D)
e. The system should display the updated date, when ever user (i.e., ADMIN)
modifies the data.
15. Updated User (D)
f. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.

Report
File

Print preview

Page 52 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

5.13 HOW TO DEFINE DATA FORM LIST


This is one of the administration configuration windows to create new data form and define
the number of attributes as columns in that data form. The user, who is having ADMIN
responsibilities, can only create new data form and define the attributes as columns.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADMIN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system will open a new window Data forms entry screen.

Page 53 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
a. ID (D)
i. The system displays the id automatically.
b. Form Name (M)
i. Enter the Form name
c. Form Label (O)
i. Enter the Form label
d. Description (O)
i. Enter the description about the form
e. Active (M)
i. If the checkbox is checked, the form is active. If the check box is not
checked, then the form is not in active.
1. By default the system checks the checkbox (i.e., Active)
f. Number of columns (O)
i. Specify the number of columns required in the new form.
1. By default the system display one column.
g. Update Date (D)
i. The system should display the updated date, when ever user (i.e.,
ADMIN) modifies the data.
h. Update User (D)
i. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id,
when ever user modifies the data in this window.
i.

Seq (M)
i. Enter the seq number ( i.e., Position) of the column in data form

j.

2.
3.

4.
5.

Code (M)
i. Select the GLCODE for the columns attribute from the drop down
list.
1. The system displays the values in the drop down from the
attributes list defined in the GALIOM.
2. The system display all the characters of the attribute like
column name, label, Data type, UOM, Data size etc.
Save button:- After entering the From name, press save button. The system save the
new data form.
Delete button:- The system delete the selected record. When user try to delete the
selected record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete the
selected record with Yes and No options. If the user clicks on No button, the
system will not delete the selected record, if the user select the Yes button, the system
delete the selected record from the database.
Print button:- The system will print the current display window. before the print the
system display the print setup window to select the printer, if there is more than one
printer is configured.
Refresh:- The system will refresh the current display window.

Page 54 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


6. Detail:-The system will open the data form Entry screen window with all the details
of the form including the attributes defined in the form.
7. Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Administration

Click Data form List menu Item.

Column Description
1. Form Name (D)
a. The system displays the form name.
2. Description (D)
a. The system displays the description of the Data form.
3. Active (D)
a. The system displays whether the data form is active(A) or in active (I)
4. Updated date (D)
a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user (i.e., ADMIN)
modifies the data.
5. Updated User (D)
a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.

Report
None.

Page 55 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

5.14 HOW TO DEFINE DATA FORM LOOKUP ENTRY


This is one of the administration configuration windows to define the lookup entries for the
attributes in a selected data form. The user, who is having ADMIN responsibilities, can only
define the lookup entries for the attributes.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADMIN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system will insert a new record in data forms Lookup Entry for
the selected data form.
2. Save button:- The system save the record.
3. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record. When user try to delete the
selected record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete the
selected record with Yes and No options. If the user clicks on No button, the
system will not delete the selected record, if the user select the Yes button, the system
delete the selected record from the database.
4. Refresh button:- The system will refresh the current active window.
5. Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Administration

Click Data Form Lookup Reference menu Item.

Column Description
Note:- The columns are generic, based on the data form is selected in the header

Page 56 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

1. Updated date (D)


a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user (i.e., ADMIN)
modifies the data.
2. Updated User (D)
a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.

Report
None.

5.15 HOW TO DEFINE SPANISH LABEL


This is one of the administration configuration windows to define the labels/Titles/Message
in Spanish against each English label/Titles/messages defined in the GALIOM Application
The user, who is having ADMIN responsibilities, can only access this menu item. The data
displayed in this screen, is form sys_language_t table.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADMIN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Save button:- The system save the record.
2. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current active window.
3. Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Administration

Click Define Spanish Label menu Item.

Column Description
Page 57 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

1. ID (D)
a. The system displays the id for each label.
2. Text type (D)
a. The system display what kind of Text type it is i.e., whether the displayed text
is Label/ReportTitile/ErrMsg/Menu/WinTitile/MicroHelp/File etc.
3. English (O/E)
a. The system displays the label language in English.
i. The system allows the user to edit this column, so that user can enter
the proper input.
4. Spanish (O/E)
a. The system display the label Language in Spanish
i. The system allows the user to edit this column, so that user can enter
the proper input.
5. Updated date (D)
a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user (i.e., ADMIN)
modifies the data.
6. Updated User (D)
a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.

Report
None.

ASSET MANAGEMENT MODULE


INTRODUCTION

This is the core module in the Galiom Application.

6.1 ASSET MANAGEMENT SCREEN


This screen allows user to create new Assets and modify existing one. Also performs many
other RBI, planning functions associated to an Asset. This is the core of the GALIOM
System. Assets are entered in well structured form, in hierarchical form. Geographical and
functional name are recorded and underneath would be the each physical items that are
equipments which are static or are moveable in nature.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user
2. At least one asset is registered in the asset hierarchy tree.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:-.*******
Page 58 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


2.
3.
4.
5.

Delete button:-.*******
Save button:- The system save the new or modify values.
Refresh button:- The system refresh the current active window.
Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
1) Select Asset Management from Modules.
2) From the menu Items select and double-click on
Asset Management.
3) Asset management Screen will appear.
4) Click on Asset Hierarchy tab below the menu
options screen.
5) The below image shows the Asset Hierarchy and
Asset Management screen.

Column Description
Asset Details
1. Name (D)
a. The system displays the name of the Asset, which is selected in the asset
hierarchy tree.

Page 59 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


2. Description (O)
a. The system displays the description of the Asset.
b. The user having ASSET EDIT or ADMIN responsibility can edit this
column.
3. Approval Flag (O)
a. whether the selected asset is approved/Initiated
b. The user having ASSET EDIT or ADMIN responsibility can edit this
column
4. Approval date (D)
a. System display the approval date, when the selected record is approved.
b. The system will not allow the user to edit this column.
5. Asset Status (O)
a. Whether the selected asset is in service or off service.
6. Approved By (D)
a. The system displays the user id in approved by column, when the user is
approving the asset.
7. Updated Date (D)
a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies the
data
8. Updated User (D)
a. The system should display the updated user, when ever user modifies the
data in this window
Class Information
1. Class type (D)
a. The system displays the class type of the selected asset.
2. Class Id (D)
a. The system displays the class id of the selected asset.
3. Class Value (M)
a. The system displays the class value of the selected asset. The system also
allows the user to edit this column.
4. Description (D)
a. The system displays the class description of the selected asset.

Report
None.

Page 60 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

6.2

ASSET HIERARCHY

The Asset Hierarchy is a graphical representation of Asset register in the GALIOM


application. The Asset Hierarchy is defined by the ADMIN responsibility user, during the
implementation. The clients asset hierarchy is reviewed and studied before levels are defined.

Pre-requisites
1. Study the client asset hierarchy.
2. Classifying the assets into levels.
3. There should be at least one user how should have ADMIN responsibilities in the
GALIOM application.

Steps to the usage of this window


None

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. The user having ASSET EDIT or ADMIN responsibility can edit the tree.

Navigation
GALIOM Application icon

Login into the GALIOM application.


(Levels are defined during implementation. The
clients asset hierarchy is reviewed and studied before
levels are defined)
Level-1 as Company Name, is set as GUPCO
Level-2 as Business/Asset Unit are SOUTH CENTRAL
GOS, NORTH CENTRAL GOS, SOUTH GOS
etc.
Level-3 as Area, MORGAN, BADRI
Level4 as Complex, MORGAN 1, MORGAN 8
Level5 as Location, M36-PH IV
Level6 as Functional Group/System, M36-PH IVFLARE GAS
Level7 as Tag, M36-PH IV-H154-3, M36-PH IVH155-3
Level8 as Feature
Level9 as Test Point is actual measuring points.
(UT/RT/TELETEST)
Page 61 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

NOTE: This asset hierarchy can be defined differently by the implementers using the Administration
Module. Asset Hierarchy levels are configurable.

Column Description
None.

Report
None.

6.3 HOW TO REGISTER THE TAG AND GEOGRAPHICAL


LOCATIONS
The GALIOM provides the provision to register the tag and geographical locations under
feature through the asset hierarchy tree.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should successfully login into the GALIOM Application.
2. The asset are registered and shown in the Asset Hierarchy tree.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the asset in the asset hierarchy tree and right click the mouse button.
2. Enter the Tag Name in tree itself and press enter on completion.
3. Application would create the TAG and would allow you to select the equipment type
in right side pane. Equipment Type is a class type in GALIOM.
4. Select the equipment type in case it is asset level TAG.

Responsibilities
1. The user should be active user of the GALIOM application.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility to edit.

Navigation
Enter into GALIOM Application

Click on the asset Hierarchy

Page 62 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
None.

Report
None.

6.4

HOW TO UPDATE MECHANICAL DESIGN DATA

This is one of the tab page present in the Asset management window under the other
information section. This tab page is used to define the Mechanical design data of the
selected Asset. The Mechanical design attributes data allows determining some of the Failure
mechanism automatically

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The asset is registered in the asset hierarchy tree.
3. The selected asset should have the mechanical design data.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Save button:- The system save the record.
2. Exit button:- The system exit form the GALIOM Application..

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation

Page 63 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


Main Menu
Asset Management
the Mechanical Design Data.

Click Asset Management menu Item

Click on

NOTES:
Attributes are listed based on configuration. Addition of attributes can be done from configuration. Class and
data form configuration allows setting the attributes. Data forms like mechanical design data is only visible if
data forms are attached to the class (In above image - Liquid Filter).

Column Description
1. The Attributes are generically displayed from the configuration, based on the asset
selected in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Report
None.

6.5 ASSIGN FAILURE MECHANISM TO TAG


Users are allowed to enter/select the failure mode and failure mechanism associated to the
equipment. The failure mechanism selected in this screen is latter brought into probability of
failure assessment screen. Probability of failure due to failure mechanism and what was the
effectiveness of previous inspection for each of this failure mechanism is determined. Also
these failure mechanisms would be observed during the inspection. Inspection memo screen
will record the observations against each failure mechanism associated.

Page 64 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user
2. At least one asset is registered in the asset hierarchy tree.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system insert a new record, to select the new failure mechanism
associated with the asset.
2. Delete button:- The system delete the selected failure mechanism.
3. Save button:- The system save the new or modify values.
4. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current active window.
5. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Failure Mechanism tab page.

Click Asset Management menu Item

Select the

Column Description
1. Failure Mode (M)
Page 65 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


a. Select the Failure mode from the drop down for the selected asset.
i. The system display all the failure modes related to the selected asset
in the asset hierarchy tree.
2. FMID - (Failure Mechanism ID) (M)
a. Select the Failure Mechanism from the drop down for the selected asset.
i. The system display all the failure mechanism related to the selected
asset in the asset hierarchy tree.
3. Failure Mechanism (D)
a. The system display the failure Mechanism, based on the Failure mechanism id
is selected by the user.
4. Created date (D)
a. The system displays the created date, when the failure mechanism is created
for the selected asset.
5. Created user (D)
a. The system displays the created user id, when the user is created the failure
mechanism for the selected asset.

Report
None

6.6 LINKING DOCUMENTS TO TAG AND FACILITIES


This feature allows documents to be linked to any levels in the asset hierarchy. Different
category of documents can be linked. Typical types of document could be P&ID, Vendor
documents, U1A forms for equipments, Isometric drawings, images etc.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The asset is registered in the asset hierarchy tree.
Select the respective TAG to attach the documents.
The selected asset should have related documents in the computer.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system opens the Document register.

Page 66 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

2. Delete button:- The system delete the selected document from the document tab
page.
3. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current active window.
4. Exit button:-The system Exit from the GALIOM Application.

Responsibilities
1.
2.
3.
4.

Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.


Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.
Any user having DOCEDIT Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
the Documents tab.

Click Asset Management menu Item

Click on

Column Description
1. Document name (D)
a. The system displays the document name.
i. The system will automatically generate the document name.
2. Description (O)
a. Enter the description about the document.
3. Doc Type (M)
a. Select the doc type from the drop down.

Page 67 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


4. Doc Status (O)
a. Select the doc status from the drop down.
i. By default the system set DRAFT
5. Doc Author (O)
a. Select the doc author from the drop down.
6. Doc Owner (O)
a. Select the doc owner from the drop down.
7. Version No (O)
a. Enter the Version Number.
8. Keyword search (O)
a. Enter the word to search the document.
9. File Name (M)
a. Click the browse button to select the file from the source location (i.e.,
computer)
i. If there is any destination folder defined in configuration, application
would copy automatically the source file into destination folder.
10. File Format (O)
a. Select the File Format from the drop down.
11. Create From Template (O)
a. Check the check box, if the document is to created from template.
i. If you are creating from template file available, then click on create
from template. Application would automatically look for the template
file configured and would create a copy of it.
12. Update Date (D)
a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies the
data
13. Update User (D)
a. The system should display the updated user, when ever user modifies the data
in this window.
14. Created Date (D)
a. The system displays the created date, when the failure mechanism is created
for the selected asset.
15. Create User (D)
a. The system displays the created user id, when the user is created the failure
mechanism for the selected asset.

Report
None.

Page 68 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

6.7 HOW TO PROCESS DATE FOR A TAG


This window is used to set the values for each attribute defined for the selected tag in order
to process the data. The system display attributes for the selected tag from the data form.
The attributes are displayed under groups. They are like General, MixureMole%, Mixture,
Vapour, HC Liquid, Aqueous, Component Mass, MW % etc.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user
2. The attributes for the tag is defined in the data form.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Save button:- The system will compute the values entered in the value column.
2. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current active window.
3. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Process data tab page.

Click Asset Management menu Item

Select the

Column Description
1. Seq. (D)
a. The system displays the Seq number automatically.
2. Attribute Name (D)
a. The system displays the attributes under the respective group headings with
expand and collapse icon.

Page 69 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. The system displays all the attributes for the selected tag defined in
the data from.
ii. The system provides a feature to expand the attributes by clicking (+)
icon and collapse the attribute list, by clicking the (-) icon.
3. Value (O)
a. Enter the value for the attribute, to process the data. If the value is related to
any formula. Using the formula editor user can keen the formula.
i. The system displays the formula editor icon, just after the value
column.
4. UOM (D)
a. Based on the value the system displays the corresponding unit of
measurement.

Report
None

6.8 HOW TO CALICULATE THEORITICAL CORROSION RATES


This window is used to set the values for each attribute defined for the selected tag in order
to calculate theoretical corrosion rates. The system display attributes for the selected tag from
the data form..

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user
2. The attributes for the tag is defined in the data form.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Save button:- The system will compute the values entered in the value column.
2. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current active window.
3. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Theoritical Corrosion Rates tab page.

Click Asset Management menu Item

Select the

Page 70 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Seq. (D)
a. The system displays the Seq number automatically.
2. Attribute Name (D)
a. The system displays the attributes under the respective group headings with
expand and collapse icon.
i. The system displays all the attributes for the selected tag defined in
the data from.
ii. The system provides a feature to expand the attributes by clicking (+)
icon and collapse the attribute list, by clicking the (-) icon.
3. Value (O)
a. Enter the value for the attribute, to process the data. If the value is related to
any formula. Using the formula editor user can keen the formula.
i. The system displays the formula editor icon, just after the value
column.
4. UOM (D)
a. Based on the value the system displays the corresponding unit of
measurement.

Report
None

Page 71 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

6.9 RISK BASE INSPECTION


6.10 RBI BASIC ASSESSMENT TYPE
6.10.1 CONSEQUENCE OF FAILURE RANKING
Consequence of failure is one of the steps performed to assess the risk zone. This is derived
by consequence questionnaires on categories like safety, environment, asset and reputation.
The worst case is rolled up as consequence of failure for the equipment. Also the
consequence value has to be adjusted according to the importance of question to the subject.
If the importance of a particular question is low to medium consequence the value should
not have an option with high value, else the worst case roll up would take high value
resulting consequence as high.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user
2. At least one asset is registered in the asset hierarchy tree.
3. COF is configured for the selected asset class type in COF setup window, which is
present in Risk Ranking setup.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Save button:- The system save the new or modify values.
2. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current active window.
3. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
Select the
Risk Base Inspection Tab.
Select the RBI assessment type in the Assessment type drop
down Click on Consequence tab page.

Page 72 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. COF Heads (D)
a. Display all the configured COF heads for the selected asset class.
i. System displays the data from the COF setup.
2. Answers (E/M)
a. By default the answers are also displayed based on the COF setup for the
selected asset class in COF setup window.
i. System displays the data from the COF setup.
b. If the user wants to set the different answer, Click on answer field and a list
of consequence of options will appear for the COF element.
c. Once the user change the answer, press the SAVE button or Press Ctrl + S
to save the changes.
3. Update date (D)
a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies the
data.
4. Updated user (D)
a. The system displays the user id, when the user is modify the value in this
window.

Report
None

Page 73 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


6.10.2 PROBABILITY OF FAILURE RANKING
Probability of failure is the next step that helps to identify the risk zone. Like consequence of
failure, probability of failure also has questionnaire which are qualitative, semi quantitative
and quantitative questions. What would be the probability of failure by a particular failure
mechanism? What is the inspection effectiveness of previous inspection to identify the failure
mechanisms? What is the remaining life? Etc.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user
2. At least one asset is registered in the asset hierarchy tree.
3. POF is configured for the selected asset class type in POF setup window, which is
present in Risk Ranking setup.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Save button:- The system save the new or modify values.
2. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current active window.
3. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
Select the
Risk Base Inspection Tab
Select the RBI assessment type in the Assessment type drop
down
Click on Probability tab

Page 74 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. POF Heads (D)
a. Display all the configured POF heads for the selected asset class.
i. System displays the data from the POF setup.
ii. Failure Mechanism:- Factor by failure mechanism and effectiveness,
below POF detail shows the failure mechanisms. Select the options
below for each failure mechanism. These failure mechanisms are
same are those selected in the tag level data.
iii. Remaining life: - Factor by remaining life is based on monitored data.
Application allows you to record UT/RT and other inspection data.
Minimum wall thickness is derived and then remaining life is
calculated. User can select manually also
2. Answers (E/M)
a. By default the answers are also displayed based on the POF setup for the
selected asset class in POF setup window.
i. System displays the data from the POF setup.
b. If the user wants to set the different answer, Click on answer field and a list
of consequence of options will appear for the POF element.
c. Once the user change the answer, press the SAVE button or Press Ctrl + S
to save the changes.
3. Update date (D)
a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies the
data.
4. Updated user (D)
a. The system displays the user id, when the user is modify the value in this
window.
5. Failure Mechanism (POF Detail) (D)
a. Select the options below for each failure mechanism
i. For Factor by failure mechanism and effectiveness, the POF details
show the failure mechanisms.
ii. These failure mechanisms are same are those selected in the tag level
data.
6. Failure Mechanism Options (E/M)
a. Select the options from the drop down.

Report
None
6.10.3 RISK RANKING MATRIX
Once consequence of failure and probability of failure assessment is done, risk ranking is
done automatically. All the data displayed on this screen is fully configured. The Risk
Ranking Screen, Consequence and probability values and the color are be configured during
the implementation. The formula for Risk Ranking matrix is Risk = COF x POF.

Page 75 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user
2. At least one asset is registered in the asset hierarchy tree.
3. POF & COF Assessment is done for the selected asset.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current active window.
2. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
Select the
Risk Base Inspection Tab
Select the RBI assessment type in the Assessment type drop
down Click on Risk Matrix tab

Column Description
1. COF Value (D)
a. The system displays the configured COF value.
2. COF (D)
a. The system displays the configured COF description against each COF value.
3. POF Value (D)
Page 76 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


a. The system displays the configured POF value.
4. POF (D)
a. The system displays the configured POF description against each POF value

Report
None

6.11 API 581 SEMI - QUANTITATIVE ASSESSMENT TYPE.


6.11.1 COF RBI SQ ASSESSMENT BY HOLE SIZE
This tab show the attributes with their values used to calculate risk base inspection of COF
RBI Assessment by Hole size for the selected asset class. All the data displayed on this
screen is fully configured.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user
2. The dataform should be defined for the selected Asset class in COF & POF setup
for the selected Assessment type.
3. The system should display the tabs based on the no of dataforms selected.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current active window.
2. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application.
3. Recalculate:- If there is any change made in the tab, The system compute the values.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
Select the
Risk Base Inspection Tab
Select the API 581-Semi-Quatitative assessment type in the
Assessment type drop down
Click on COF RBI SQ Assessment by Hole size

Page 77 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Seq(D)
a. The system display the seq no for each attribute defined in the dataform.
i. The system displays the value form the dataform.
2. Attribute Name (D)
a. The system display the attribute defined in the dataform.
i. The system displays the attribute list from the dataform.
3. Value (D)
a. The system display the values defined in the dataform
i. The system displays the attributes values from the dataform.
4. UOM (D)
a. The system display the unit of measurement defined in the dataform.
i. The system displays the attribute UOM from the dataform.

Report
None
6.11.2 COF RBI SEMI QUANTITATIVE ASSESSMENT FORM
This tab show the attributes with their values used to calculate risk base inspection of COF
RBI Semi Quantitative Assessment for the selected asset class. All the data displayed on this
screen is fully configured.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user
2. The dataform should be defined for the selected Asset class in COF & POF setup
for the selected Assessment type.
3. The system should display the tabs based on the no of dataforms selected.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current active window.
2. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application.
3. Recalculate:- If there is any change made in the tab, The system compute the values.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
Select the
Risk Base Inspection Tab
Select the API 581-Semi-Quatitative assessment type in the
Assessment type drop down
Click on COF RBI Semi Quantitative Assessment Form.

Page 78 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Seq(D)
a. The system display the seq no for each attribute defined in the dataform.
2. Attribute Name (D)
a. The system display the attribute defined in the dataform.
3. Value (E/D)
a. The system display the values defined in the dataform
b. The system also allow the user to change the values or to keen the formula in
the editable column, by clicking the icon (To invoke the Formula editor)
.
4. UOM (D)
a. The system displays the Unit of measurement from the dataform.

Report
None
6.11.3 SQ- THINNING MODEL
This tab shows the attributes with their values used to calculate risk base inspection of SQ
Thinning Model Assessment for the selected asset class. All the data displayed on this screen
is fully configured.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user
2. The data form should be defined for the selected Asset class in COF & POF setup
for the selected Assessment type.
3. The system should display the tabs based on the no of dataforms selected.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current active window.
2. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application.
3. Recalculate:- If there is any change made in the tab, The system compute the values.

Page 79 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
Select the
Risk Base Inspection Tab
Select the API 581-Semi-Quatitative assessment type in the
Assessment type drop down
Click on SQ-Thinning Model.

Column Description
1. Seq(D)
a. The system display the seq no for each attribute defined in the dataform.
2. Attribute Name (D)
a. The system display the attribute defined in the dataform.
3. Value (E/D)
a. The system display the values defined in the dataform.
b. The system also allows the user to change the values or to keen the formula
in the editable column, by clicking the icon (To invoke the Formula
.
editor).
4. UOM (D)
a. The system displays the Unit of measurement from the dataform

Report
None
6.11.4 SQ- SCC MODEL
This tab shows the attributes with their values used to calculate risk based inspection of SQ
SCC Model Assessment for the selected asset class. All the data displayed on this screen is
fully configured.
Page 80 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The data form should be defined for the selected Asset class in COF & POF setup
for the selected Assessment type.
3. The system should display the tabs based on the no of dataforms selected.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current active window.
2. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application.
3. Recalculate:- If there is any change made in the tab, The system compute the values.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
Select the
Risk Base Inspection Tab
Select the API 581-Semi-Quatitative assessment type in the
Assessment type drop down
Click on SQ-SCC Model.

Column Description
1. Seq(D)
a. The system display the seq no for each attribute defined in the dataform.
2. Attribute Name (D)
a. The system display the attribute defined in the dataform.
3. Value (E/D)
a. The system display the values defined in the dataform.

Page 81 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


b. The system also allows the user to change the values or to keen the formula
in the editable column, by clicking the icon (To invoke the Formula
editor).
4. UOM (D)
a. The system displays the Unit of measurement from the dataform.

Report
None
6.11.5 SQ- FATIGUE MODEL
This tab shows the attributes with their values used to calculate risk based inspection of SQ
Fatigue Model Assessment for the selected asset class. All the data displayed on this screen
is fully configured.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The data form should be defined for the selected Asset class in COF & POF setup
for the selected Assessment type.
3. The system should display the tabs based on the no of dataforms selected.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Refresh button: - The system refreshes the current active window.
2. Exit button: - The system will exit from the GALIOM Application.
3. Recalculate: - If there is any change made in the tab, the system compute the values.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
Select the
Risk Base Inspection Tab
Select the API 581-Semi-Quatitative assessment type in the
Assessment type drop down
Click on SQ-Fatigue Model.

Page 82 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Seq(D)
a. The system display the seq no for each attribute defined in the dataform.
2. Attribute Name (D)
a. The system display the attribute defined in the dataform.
3. Value (E/D)
a. The system display the values defined in the dataform.
b. The system also allows the user to change the values or to keen the formula
in the editable column, by clicking the icon (To invoke the Formula
editor).
4. UOM (D)
a. The system displays the Unit of measurement from the dataform.

Report
None

6.12 HOW TO TEST FAILURE MECHANISMS


The listed failure mechanisms in this screen can be tested for whether it is immune or it is
susceptible to the particular failure mechanism. The value in probability column can be Not
Test, Immune, High, Medium and Low. User has to click on Test button to test
the susceptibility of the failure mechanism.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user
2. At least one asset is registered in the asset hierarchy tree.
3. POF & COF Assessment is done for the selected asset.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current active window.
2. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Test FM Tab

Asset Management

Click Asset Management menu Item

Select the

Page 83 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Failure Mode (D) - The system displays the failure mode from the failure mechanism
tab present in Asset tab in asset management window.
2. ID (D) - The system displays the failure mechanism id from the failure mechanism
tab present in Asset tab in asset management window.
3. Failure Mechanism (D) - The system display the Failure mechanism description from
the failure mechanism tab present in Asset tab in asset management window.
4. Probability (D) - If the failure Mechanism is not tested then the probability column
shows Not Tested. The probability is tested when user press the Check button.
The value can be High/Medium/Low/Immune and Not Tested.
5. Click the Attach All High probability (B) On clicking this button all the High
probability will be attached to the currently selected asset.
6. Click the Attach All Medium Probability(B) - on clicking this button all the
Medium probability will be attached to the current selected asset.
7. Click the Attach All Low Probability(B) On clicking this button all the Low
probability will be attached to the current selected asset.

Report
None

Page 84 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

6.13 HOW TO KNOW


SELECTED ASSET

THE

RAMAINING

LIFE

OF

THE

This tab display the reaming life and retirement dates for each monitoring points present
under the selected tag in the Asset Hierarchy. This tab provides the information like the
monitoring type, test point, feature, Rem.Life, Ret date and next due date etc. This tab also
displays the graph showing the details of the retirement dates for each monitoring points.

Pre-requisites
1. At least one asset is registered in the asset hierarchy tree.
2. POF & COF Assessment is done for the selected asset.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current active window.
2. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Rem. Life Tab

Asset Management

Click Asset Management menu Item

Select the

Page 85 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Mon.Type (D)
a. The system displays the Monitoring type of the testpoint.
2. Test Point (D)
a. The system displays the test point id
3. Feature (D)
a. The system displays the feature, under which the test point is present.
4. Rem.Life (D)
a. The system displays the Rem.Life.
5. Ret.Date (D)
a. The system displays the Ret.Date.
6. Next Due Date (D)
a. The system displays the next inspection due date.
7. Theo.CR (D)
a. Fsas
8. Rec.CR (D)
a. Sf
9. Ovr. CR (D)
a. Dsfdf

Page 86 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

10. NWT (D)


a. The system displays the Nominal wall Thickness
11. MAWT (D)
a. The system displays the Minimum allowable wall thickness.

Report
None

6.14 HOW TO KNOW THE NEXT INSPECTION DUE DATES


This window display the due date of all features and equipment of the selected tag. This
window show all the information like Tag, Feature, Test point, Retirement Date, Confidence
Factor and next due date.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user
2. At least one asset is registered in the asset hierarchy tree.
3. At least one inspection has taken place in the selected tag.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Due Date Tab

Asset Management

Click Asset Management menu Item

Select the

Column Description

Page 87 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


1. Tag (D)
a. The system display the selected tag in the asset tree hierarchy
2. Feature (D)
a. The system display the features of the selected tag
3. Test Point (D)
a. The system display the test point sequence number
4. Ret.Date (D)
a. The system display the Retirement date against each feature present in the
selected tag.
5. Conf. Factor (D)
a. The system displays the confidence factor.
6. Next Due Date (D)
a. The system display the next due date for the inspection.

Report
None

6.15 INSPECTION CHECK LIST TAB


Using this window, the user can view the previous Inspection checklist of the selected tag.
And the user can enter the new checklist by pressing the Insert button. And user can view
the inspection checklist details by double clicking on the selected inspection checklist record.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user
2. At least one asset is registered in the asset hierarchy tree.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:window.

The system display the CHECKLIST ENTRY SCREEN

6.15.1 HOW TO SET THE CHECKLIST FOR THE SELECTED TAG


The user uses this screen to set the checklist for inspection for the selected tag. The
system automatically displays the asset name in the asset column. And the Insp Date
column by default display the current date. The user is to enter the report number which
is mandatory column. Once the user select the Check list name from the drop down , the
system display the following message You are about to populate the checklist,
application will save automatically with Yes and No buttons. If the user click on
Yes button, the system display the selected check list and save the checklist record. If
the user click on No buttons the system will cancel the job and set the focus on check
list name column.

Page 88 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user
2. At least one asset is registered in the asset hierarchy tree.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Save button:- The system save the inspection checklist Report/memo, after user
enter data in all the mandatory columns.
2. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current active window
3. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Checklist Tab

Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
Click on Insert button

Select the

Column Description
1. Asset Name (D)
a. The system displays the asset name of the selected tag.
2. Insp. Date (M)
a. Enter the Inspection date.
b. If user try to save the record, without entering any date in this column. The
system display the following message Enter the Insp.Date.
i. By default the system display the current date.
3. Report No (M)
a. Enter the Report name for this Inspection checklist.
Page 89 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


b. If the user try to save the record, without entering any data in this column.
The system display the following message Report no is mandatory.
4. Checklist Name (M)
a. Select the Inspection checklist from the drop down.
b. If the user try to save the record, without selecting the check list from the
drop down, the system display the following message checklist Name is
mandatory.
i. The system displays all the checklist forms with inspection type.
These are all configured in the system.
5. Insp Type (D)
a. Based on the checklist selection the Inspection type will be automatically
displayed by the system.
6. Updated date (D)
a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies the
data.
7. Updated User (D)
a. The system displays the user id, when the user is modify the value in this
window.
8. Checklist Details
a. Seq (D)
i. The system display the seq Number
b. Section (D)
i. The system display the section
c. Sub section (D)
i. The system display the sub section
d. Description (O)
i. Enter the Description for the selected section.
e. Checked (O)
i. Check the checkbox
f. Observation (O)
i. Enter the Observations
9. Update Date (D)
a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies the
data.
10. Update user (D)
a. The system displays the user id, when the user is modify the value in this
window.
REPROT
None.

Page 90 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


1. Delete button:- The system deletes the selected record form the Inspection checklist
window. Before deleting the record, the system display the message You are about
to delete the selected Inspection Report/memo with Yes and No buttons. If user
clicks on No button, system will not delete the selected record. If the user select the
yes button, the system deletes the selected record from the inspection report/memo
window.
2. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current active window.
3. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application.
4. Double click:- select a record in the Inspection checklist and double click on it, the
system display the details of that record.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
check list Tab

Asset Management

Click Asset Management menu Item

Select the

Column Description
1. Insp Date (D)
a. The system display the Inspection date.
2. Insp.Type (D)
a. The system display the Inspection Type
3. Checklist (D)
a. The system display the checklist selected for this tag on the respective
Inspection date and Inspection type.
4. Inspected by (D)
a. Display the user Id , who inspected this.
5. Updated Date (D)
a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies the
data.
Page 91 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

6. Updated User (D)


a. The system displays the created user id, when the user is created the failure
mechanism for the selected asset.

Report
None

6.16 DELETE MULTIPLE TAGS


Using this window the user can delete the tags present in specific functional group.

Pre-requisites
1. None.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application
2. Delete button:- The system delete all the selected tags from the specified functional
group.
3. Close button:- The system close the delete tag from functional group window.
4. Select All:- The system select all the tag check boxes.
5. Deselect All:- The system deselect the check box for all the tags.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Asset Management

Click Delete Multiple tags menu Item.

Column Description
1. Source location (M)
Page 92 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


a. Select the Location from the drop down.
2. Source Functional Group (M)
a. Select the Functional group, for which the tags to be deleted.
i. Once the user selects the functional group value, the system display
all the tags present under the selected functional group.
REPORT
None.

6.17 PIPING TAG ATTRIBUTES UPDATE


Using this window the user can update the attributes of the tags whose class value is piping
present in a functional group.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should select the functional group in asset hierarchy tree and the functional
group should have the tag whose class name is piping.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application
2. Save button:- The system will save the values entered in the attributes against each
tag of the selected functional group.
3. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display screen.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Asset Management

Click Piping Tag Attributes Update menu Item.

Column Description
Page 93 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

1. Tag name (D)


a. The system display the tag name whose class value is piping..
2. Description (D)
a. The system displays the description of the tag.
3. Attributes (O)
a. Based on the Tag the system displays the attributes.
REPORT
None.

6.18 VESSEL TAG ATTRIBUTES UPDATE


Using this window the user can update the attributes of the tags whose class value is Vessel
present in a functional group.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should select the functional group in asset hierarchy tree and the functional
group should have the tag whose class name is vessel.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application
2. Save button:- The system will save the values entered in the attributes against each
tag of the selected functional group.
3. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display screen.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Asset Management

Click Vessel Tag Attributes Update menu Item.

Page 94 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Tag name (D)
a. The system display the tag name whose class value is vessel..
2. Description (D)
a. The system displays the description of the tag.
3. Attributes (O)
a. Based on the Tag the system displays the attributes.
REPORT
None.

6.19 PIPING TAG PROCESS DATA UPDATE


Using this window the user can update the tags process data whose class value is piping
present in a functional group.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should select the functional group in asset hierarchy tree and the functional
group should have the tag whose class name is piping.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application
2. Save button:- The system will save the values entered in the attributes against each
tag of the selected functional group.
3. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display screen.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Asset Management

Click piping Tag process data Update menu Item.

Page 95 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Tag name (D)
a. The system display the tag name whose class value is piping
2. Description (D)
a. The system displays the description of the tag.
3. Attributes (O)
a. Based on the Tag the system displays the attributes.
REPORT
None.

6.20 PIPING FEATURE ATTRIBUTES UPDATE


Using this window the user can update the feature attributes whose class value is piping
present in a functional group.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should select the functional group in asset hierarchy tree and the functional
group should have the tag whose class name is piping.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application
2. Save button:- The system will save the values entered in the attributes against each
tag of the selected functional group.
3. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display screen.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Asset Management

Click piping feature attributes Update menu Item.

Page 96 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Tag name (D)
a. The system display the tag name whose class value is piping
2. Description (D)
a. The system displays the description of the tag.
3. Feature (O)
a. The system displays the feature name present in a tag.
4. Attributes (O)
a. Based on the Feature the system displays the attributes.
REPORT
None.

6.21 VESSEL FEATURE ATTRIBUTES UPDATE


Using this window the user can update the feature attributes whose class value is vessel
present in a functional group.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should select the functional group in asset hierarchy tree and the functional
group should have the tag whose class name is vessel.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application
2. Save button:- The system will save the values entered in the attributes against each
tag of the selected functional group.
3. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display screen.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Asset Management

Click vessel feature attributes Update menu Item.

Page 97 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Tag name (D)
a. The system display the tag name whose class value is Vessel
2. Description (D)
a. The system displays the description of the tag.
3. Feature (O)
a. The system displays the feature name present in a tag.
4. Attributes (O)
a. Based on the Feature the system displays the attributes.
REPORT
None.

6.22 COPY FUNCTIONAL GROUP FROM LOCATION


This window is used to copy the selected functional group from one location to another
location.

Pre-requisites
None.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application
2. Ok button:- The system move the selected functional group from selected location
to destination location.
3. CANCEL button:- The system will not copy the functional group from selected
location to destination location and close the window.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Item.

Asset Management

Click Copy Functional Group from Location menu

Page 98 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Source location (M)
a. Select the Location from the drop down.
2. Source Functional Group (M)
a. Select the Functional group.
3. Destination Location (M)
a. Select the destination location from the drop down.
4. Destination Functional Group (M)
a. Enter the Destination Functional group.
REPORT
None.

6.23 COPY FEATURE FROM ONE TAG TO ANOTHER


This window is used to copy the selected feature from one tag to another tag.

Pre-requisites
None.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application
2. Ok button:- The system move the selected Feature from selected tag to destination
tag.
3. CANCEL button:- The system will not copy the Feature from selected tag to
destination tag and close the window.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
menu Item.

Asset Management

Click Copy Feature From One Tag to Another

Page 99 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Source Tag (M)
a. Select the tag from the drop down.
2. Source Feature (M)
a. Select the Feature which is decided to move.
3. Destination Tag (M)
a. Select the destination tag from the drop down, to where the feature wants to
move.
4. Destination Feature (M)
a. Enter the Destination Feature name.
REPORT
None.

6.24 ASSIGN FAILURE MECHANISM TO TAG BATCH


This window is used to Assign failure mode with Failure Mechanism to tags present under
select Location.

Pre-requisites
1. The selected location should have the tags.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application
2. APPLY button:- The system apply the selected Failure Mechanism to all the tags
present under the selected Location.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
menu Item.

Asset Management

Click on assign Failure Mechanism to tag- batch

Page 100 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Location (M)
a. Select the Location.
2. Failure mode (M)
a. Select the failure mode from the drop down.
i. Select the failure mode which is going to set for the entire tags
present under the selected location.
3. FM ID (M)
a. Select the Failure Mechanism from the drop down.
i. Select the Failure Mechanism from the drop down which is going to
set fro the entire tags present under the selected location.
4. Failure Mechanism(D)
a. Based on the FM ID selected, the system displays the Failure Mechanism.
REPORT
None.

6.25 MOVE TAGS FROM ONE FUNCTIONAL GROUP TO


ANOTHER
This window is used to move the tags from one functional group to another functional
group.

Pre-requisites
1. The tags should be present in the source functional group.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application

Page 101 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


2. Move button:- The system move the tags from source functional group to
destination functional group.
3. Close button:- The system will not move the tags from source functional group
to destination functional group and close the window.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
another menu Item.

Click move tag from one functional group to

Column Description
1. Source Location (M)
a. Select the source location from the drop down.
2. Destination Location (M)
a. Select the destination location from the drop down.
3. Source Functional Group (M)
a. Select the source functional group from the drop down.
4. Destination Functional group (M)
a. Select t the Destination Functional group from the drop down.
REPORT
None.

Page 102 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

6.26 MOVE TEST POINTS FROM ONE FEATURE TO ANOTHER


This window is used to move the test points from one feature to another feature.

Pre-requisites
1. The test points should be present in the source feature.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application
2. Move button:- The system move the tags from source functional group to
destination functional group.
3. Close button:- The system will not move the tags from source functional group to
destination functional group and close the window.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
menu Item.

Asset Management

Click move test point from one feature to another

Column Description
1. Source Location (M)
a. Select the source location from the drop down.
2. Destination Location (M)
a. Select the destination location from the drop down.
3. Source Functional Group (M)
a. Select the source functional group from the drop down.

Page 103 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


4. Destination Functional group (M)
a. Select t the Destination Functional group from the drop down.
5. source tag (M)
a. Select the source tag from the drop down.
6. Destination tag(M)
a. Select the destination tag from the drop down.
7. Source feature (M)
a. Select the source feature from the drop down.
8. Destination feature (M)
a. Select the destination feature from the drop down.
REPORT
None.

6.27 ASSIGN COF TO PIPING BATCH


This window provides the facility to the user to set the Consequence of Failure (COF) for all
the tags of the selected class name (foe example PIPING). The user can set the COF for
both assessment types (i.e., GALIOM RBI Assessment, API 581- Semi Quantitative).

Pre-requisites
1. COF setup for piping equipment group should be defined.
2. The COF is configured at least for one assessment type (i.e., Galiom RBI Assessment
or API 581- Semi Quantitative).

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application
2. Apply button:- The system Apply the COF to the selected tags for the selected
assessment type.
3. Close button:- The system close the Assign COF for PIPING from Functional
group window.
4. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display window.
5. Select All:- The system select the all tags displayed in source list section.
6. Deselect All:- The system deselect all the tags displayed in source list section.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Asset Management

Click Assign COF to Piping Tag menu Item.

Page 104 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


For API 581- Semi Quantitative Assessment Type

For GALIOM RBI Assessment Type

Column Description
1. Select (M)
a. Select the check box of the tag, if the COF is to assign to the tag of the
selected Assessment Type.
2. Tag (D)
a. Based on the class name selected, the system display all the tags, under that
class name..
3. Description (D)
a. The system displays the description of each tag.
4. Functional Group (D)
a. The system display the Functional group of the displayed tag..

Page 105 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


REPORT
None.

6.28 BATCH PRINTING - COF QUESTIONAIRE


This window is used to print the entire COF questionnaire assigned for the equipments
present under the selected Location. This window is having two sections 1. Select location 2.
Equipment/line tag list.

Pre-requisites
1. The COF questionnaire is assigned to the equipments.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application
2. Print button:- The system print the all the COF questionnaire of each
equipment/Line tag. Before start printing the system display the printer setup
window, to select the printer to do the print job.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Item.

Asset Management

Click Batch Printing COF Questionnaire menu

Column Description
1. Select Location
a. Location (M)
i. Select the Location from the drop down.
1. The system displays all the Equipments registered under the
selected location.
2. Equipment/Line Tag List
a. Equipment Name (D)
Page 106 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. The system displays all the equipments present under the selected
location.
b. Description (D)
i. The system displays the description of the each equipment against
each equipment.
c. Class (D)
i. The system displays the class of the equipment.
d. Class description (D)
i. The system displays the Class description of each equipment.
e. Functional group (D)
i. The system displays the functional group name of the equipment,
under which the equipment is registered.
REPORT
None.

6.29 BATCH PRINTING - POF QUESTIONAIRE


This window is used to print the entire POF questionnaire assigned for the equipments/
Line tag present under the selected Location. This window is having two sections 1. select
location 2. Equipment/line tag list.

Pre-requisites
1. The POF questionnaire is assigned to the equipments.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application
2. Print button:- The system print the all the POF questionnaire of each equipment
/Line tag. Before start printing the system display the printer setup window, to select
the printer to do the print job.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Item.

Asset Management

Click Batch Printing POF Questionnaire menu

Page 107 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Select Location
a. Location (M)
i. Select the Location from the drop down.
1. The system displays all the Equipments registered under the
selected location.
2. Equipment/Line Tag List
a. Equipment Name (D)
i. The system displays all the equipments present under the selected
location.
b. Description (D)
i. The system displays the description of the each equipment against
each equipment.
c. Class (D)
i. The system displays the class of the equipment.
d. Class description (D)
i. The system displays the Class description of each equipment.
e. Functional group (D)
i. The system displays the functional group name of the equipment,
under which the equipment is registered.
REPORT
None.

6.30 BATCH PRINTING RBI REPORTS


This window is used to print the entire RBI reports assigned for the equipments/ Line tag
present under the selected Location. This window is having two sections 1. select location 2.
Equipment/line tag list.

Pre-requisites
Page 108 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

1. None.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application
2. Print button:- The system print the all the RBI reports of each equipment /Line tag.
Before start printing the system display the printer setup window, to select the printer
to do the print job.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Asset Management

Click Batch Printing RBI Reports menu Item.

Column Description
1. Select Location
a. Location (M)
i. Select the Location from the drop down.
1. The system displays all the Equipments registered under the
selected location.
2. Equipment/Line Tag List
a. Equipment Name (D)
i. The system displays all the equipments present under the selected
location.
b. Description (D)
i. The system displays the description of the each equipment against
each equipment.
c. Class (D)

Page 109 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. The system displays the class of the equipment.
d. Class description (D)
i. The system displays the Class description of each equipment.
e. Functional group (D)
i. The system displays the functional group name of the equipment,
under which the equipment is registered.
REPORT
None.

6.31 BATCH PRINTING TAG DATA SHEET


This window is used to print the entire tag data present under the selected Location. This
window is having two sections 1. select location 2. Equipment/line tag list.

Pre-requisites
1. The tags are registered under the selected location.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application
2. Print button:- The system print the all the tag data. Before start printing the system
display the printer setup window, to select the printer to do the print job.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Asset Management

Click Batch Printing Tag Data sheet menu Item.

Page 110 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Select Location
a. Location (M)
i. Select the Location from the drop down.
1. The system displays all the Equipments registered under the
selected location.
2. Equipment/Line Tag List
a. Equipment Name (D)
i. The system displays all the equipments present under the selected
location.
b. Description (D)
i. The system displays the description of the each equipment against
each equipment.
c. Class (D)
i. The system displays the class of the equipment.
d. Class description (D)
i. The system displays the Class description of each equipment.
e. Functional group (D)
i. The system displays the functional group name of the equipment,
under which the equipment is registered.
REPORT
None.

6.32 BATCH PRINTING TAG FEATURE DATA SHEET


This window is used to print the entire feature data present under the selected Location. This
window is having two sections 1. Select location 2. Equipment/line tag list.

Pre-requisites
1. The features are registered under the selected location.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application
2. Print button:- The system print the all the tag data. Before start printing the system
display the printer setup window, to select the printer to do the print job.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Page 111 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Main Menu
Item.

Asset Management

Click Batch Printing Tag Feature Data sheet menu

Column Description
1. Select Location
a. Location (M)
i. Select the Location from the drop down.
1. The system displays all the Equipments registered under the
selected location.
2. Equipment/Line Tag List
a. Equipment Name (D)
i. The system displays all the equipments present under the selected
location.
b. Description (D)
i. The system displays the description of the each equipment against
each equipment.
c. Class (D)
i. The system displays the class of the equipment.
d. Class description (D)
i. The system displays the Class description of each equipment.
e. Functional group (D)
i. The system displays the functional group name of the equipment,
under which the equipment is registered.
REPORT
None.

6.33 BATCH PRINTING FFP RED NOT COMPLETED


This window show all the assets those FFP is RED and the status not completed.

Page 112 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application
2. Print button:- The system print the all the FFP red not completed. Before start
printing the system display the printer setup window, to select the printer to do the
print job.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
menu Item.

Asset Management

Click Batch Printing FFP Red Not completed

Column Description
1. Busunt Name (D)
a. The system displays the Business Unit name.
2. Complex Name (D).
a. The system displays the Complex name.
3. Location Name (D)
a. The system displays the Location Name.
4. Location Desc (D)
a. The system displays the Location description.
REPORT
None.

Page 113 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

6.34 BATCH PRINTING FOLLOW UP LESS THAN 30 DAYS


This window shows all the tags whose inspection date is due in less than 30 days.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. There should be inspection dates.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application
2. Print button:- The system print the all the records. Before start printing the system
display the printer setup window, to select the printer to do the print job.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
menu Item.

Asset Management

Click Batch Printing Follow up less Than 30 days

Column Description
1. Busunt Name (D)
a. The system displays the Business Unit name.
2. Complex Name (D).
a. The system displays the Complex name.
3. Location Name (D)
a. The system displays the Location Name.
4. Location Desc (D)
a. The system displays the Location description.

Page 114 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


REPORT
None.

ASSET MANAGEMENT REPORTS

7.1 ASSET INSPECTION REPORT WITH CLAMP FITTED


The system displays all the assets whose inspection contained type is clamp fitted.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management Report menu Item
Select the Asset- Inspection report with clamp fitted

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

7.2 EQUIPMENT ATTRIBUTES


This report would allow user to report all the equipments in the functional group. The report
would show the attributes of equipment in horizontal format.

Page 115 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user


There should be few asset are registered in GALIOM application.
The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree
Attributes are defined for the registered Equipments.
The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Functional group in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Select the Equipment Attributes

Click Asset Management Report menu Item

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

7.3 EQUIPMENT SUMMARY BY CLASS


This report would allow user to report graphically the summary of equipments in a selected
functional group. A summary count would be shown for each type of equipments.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user
2. There should be few asset are registered in GALIOM application.
3. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.

Page 116 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


4. There should be few equipments are registered in GALIOM application.
5. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the functional group in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management Report menu Item
Select the Equipment summary by class

7.4 LIST OF ITEMS


This report displays all the items present under the selected item in the Asset Hierarchy. The
report display the data based on the level selected in the Asset Hierarchy.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Page 117 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Select the List of Items.

Click Asset Management Report menu Item

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

7.5 LIST OF ITEMS WITH P&ID


This report shows the list of item within functional group with P&ID connected. This report
would show the fields like functional group, class, class description, tag name and tag
description with P&ID.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
There should few assets are registered in the GALIOM Application.
The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the functional group in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Page 118 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Select List of items with P & ID.

Click Asset Management Report menu Item

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

7.6 LIST OF ITEMS WITH SERIAL NO


This report shows the list of item within functional group with Serial No. connected. This
report would show fields like functional group, class, class description, tag, tag description
and serial number.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
There should be few assets are registered in GALIOM Application.
The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the functional group in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Select List of items with Serial No

Click Asset Management Report menu Item

Page 119 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

7.7 LIST OF TAG WITHIN FUNCTIONAL GROUP


This report display all the active tags present under the selected functional group in the asset
hierarchy tree.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
There should be few asset are registered in the GALIOM Application.
There are few tags are defined under the functional group.
The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the functional group in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management Report menu Item
Select List of Tag within functional group.

Page 120 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

7.8 PIPING ATTRIBUTES


This report shows the list of piping within functional group and is represented in
horizontally in a landscape format. The fields like operating pressure and operating
temperature, P&ID, insulated yes/no and service with isometrics document number is
shown in this report.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
There should be few assets are registered in the GALIOM application.
The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the functional group in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Select Piping Attributes.

Click Asset Management Report menu Item

Page 121 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

7.9 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME


This report shows the preventative maintenance programme. The fields like functional
group, tag, tag description, class and all other attributes are shown in this report.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
Few assets are registered in the GALIOM Application.
The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Functional group in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management Report menu Item
Select Preventative maintenance Programme.

Page 122 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

7.10 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME CHART


This report shows the preventative maintenance programme chart. The fields like functional
group, tag, inspection type, program start date, program end date, frequency and the plan
distribution are shown in this report.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
Few assets are registered in the GALIOM Application.
The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management Report menu Item
Select Preventative maintenance Programme chart.

Page 123 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

7.11 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME CHART


WITH WORK TO BE DONE
This report shows the preventative maintenance programme chart with work to be done for
the forth coming cycle. The fields like functional group, tag, inspection type, program start
date, program end date, frequency and the plan distribution and failure mechanism with
probability and description of work to be done for the forth coming inspection are shown in
this report.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
Few assets are registered in the GALIOM Application.
The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the functional group in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management Report menu Item
Select Preventative maintenance programme chart with work to be done.

Page 124 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

7.12 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE


This report shows the preventative maintenance schedule. This list shows the forth coming
inspection activities. The fields like functional group, tag, description, schedule type, start and
end date and the schedule status are shown in this report.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
Few assets are registered in the GALIOM Application.
The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the functional group in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management Report menu Item
Select Preventative maintenance schedule.

Page 125 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

7.13 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE BETWEEN


DATES
This report shows the preventative maintenance schedule for the selected between dates.
This list shows the forth coming inspection activities. The fields like functional group, tag,
description, schedule type, start and end date and the schedule status are shown in this
report.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
The system should display a window to select the dates.
The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.
2. Once the report is selected from the Report viewer window, the system display a
window allowing the user to select the start date and end dates.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management Report menu Item
Select Preventative maintenance schedule between dates.

Page 126 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

7.14 PSV ATTRIBUTES


This report shows the list of Pressure safety relief valves within functional group and is
represented in horizontally in a landscape format. The fields like functional group, tag, tag
description, manufacturer, and model no, service, P&ID, orifice size and SAP No. are shown
in this report.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
There should be few assets are registered in GALIOM application.
The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the functional group in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation

Page 127 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


Main Menu
Asset Management
Select PSV Attributes.

Click Asset Management Report menu Item

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

7.15 SUMMARY OF FOLLOW UP REPORT RAISED TO DATE


This report shows the summary of follow up report by platform/location. This report shows
fields like location, description and how many RED, ORANGE and GREEN anomalous
follow up report is created.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
Few assets are registered in the GALIOM Application.
The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management Report menu Item
Select Summary of follow up report raised to date.

Page 128 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

7.16 TAG & FEATURE DESIGN DATA SHEET


This report shows all the attributes for Tag and Feature levels for the selected Tag. The fields
like functional group, tag, tag description, class, feature and all other attributes are shown in
this report.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
There should be few assets are registered in the GALIOM Application.
The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the functional group in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Select Tag-Feature Design Data sheet.

Click Asset Management Report menu Item

Page 129 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

7.17 TAG DESIGN DATA SHEET


This report shows all the attributes for Tag level for the selected Tag. The fields like
functional group, tag, tag description, class and all other attributes are shown in this report.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
There should be few assets are registered in the GALIOM Application.
The tags are defined under the functional group level.
The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the tag in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Select Tag design data sheet.

Click Asset Management Report menu Item

Page 130 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

7.18 ULTRASONIC WALL THICKNESS MEASUREMENT


This report displays the ultrasonic wall thickness measurement details of the selected tag in
the asset Hierarchy.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management Report menu Item
Select Ultrasonic Wall Thickness Measurement.

Page 131 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

7.19 UTWT DATASHEET BETWEEN DATES


This report displays the ultrasonic wall thickness measurement datasheet, based on the dates
selected.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
The user should have access right to view this report.
The system should display the window select between dates and allowing the user
to Edit the start date and End date columns.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management Report menu Item
Select UTWT Datasheet Between Dates.

Page 132 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

RBI REPORTS

8.1 COF-RBI SEMI QUANTITATIVE ASSESSEMENT FORM


This report displays the consequence of failure assessment from of API 581- Semi
quantitative assessment type for the selected tag in the Asset Hierarchy tree.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Semi Quantitative Assessment Form

Click RBI Reports menu Item

Select. COF-RBI

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

8.2 COF RBI SQ ASSESSMENT BY HOLE SIZE

Page 133 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


This report displays the COF-RBI SQ Assessment by hole size of API 581- Semi quantitative
assessment type for the selected tag in the Asset Hierarchy tree.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
SQ Assessment by hole size.

Click RBI Reports menu Item

Select. COF-RBI

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

8.3 CONSEQUENCE OF FAILURE ASSESSMENT


This report would report the options available to be selected in consequence of failure for a
selected Tag and the right options selected for each Tag.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. There are few assets are registered in GALIOM Application.

Page 134 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


4. The Consequence questions are configured in the GALIOM Application.
5. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the tag in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Consequence of failure Assessment.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

8.4 FINAL REPORT TAG RISK STATUS RBI


This report would allow user to report the total risk profile by showing the attribute items in
two column format. Report shows the failure mechanism attached and the risk value with
overall consequence of failure and overall probability of failure with risk matrix showing the
risk value.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
There should be few assets are registered in the GALIOM Application.
POF and COF are configured.
POF and COF is calculated for the selected tag.
The user should have access right to view this report.

Page 135 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the tag in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Report Tag Risk Status - RBI.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select Final

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

Page 136 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

8.5 FINAL REPORT TAG RISK STATUS SQL


This report would allow user to report the total risk profile by showing the attribute items in
two column format. Report shows the failure mechanism attached and the risk value with
overall consequence of failure and overall probability of failure with risk matrix showing the
risk value.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Report Tag risk Status - SQL.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select Final

Page 137 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

8.6 FLAMMABLE CONSEQUENCE AREA GRAPH


This report present the graphical presentation of the flammable consequence for different
hole size of the selected tag in the Asset Hierarchy.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Consequence Area - Graph.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select Flammable

Page 138 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

8.7 LIST OF TAGS WITH RISK RANKING - RBI


This report will highlight the tags with Risk ranking of RBI assessment type for the selected
functional group. This report shows the Consequence of failure and probability of failure
with Risk (showing the color format). This would be one of the reports which would be
printed as deliverable for typical RBI projects. The following steps would allow you to get
the report.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
There are few assets are registered in the GALIOM Application.
COF and POF is calculated for the tags.
The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the functional group in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Page 139 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Main Menu
Asset Management
Tags with Risk Ranking - SQL.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select List of

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

8.8 LIST OF TAGS WITH RISK RANKING - SQL


This report will highlight the tags with Risk ranking of API 581- Semi Quantitative
assessment type for the selected functional group. This report shows the Consequence of
failure and probability of failure with Risk (showing the color format). This would be one of
the reports which would be printed as deliverable for typical RBI projects. The following
steps would allow you to get the report.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
There are few assets are registered in the GALIOM Application.
COF and POF is calculated for the tags.
The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the functional group in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
2. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Page 140 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Main Menu
Asset Management
Tags with Risk Ranking -SQL.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select List of

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

8.9 LIST OF TAGS WITH RISK RANKING OVERALL - RBI


This report will highlight the tags with overall Risk ranking of RBI assessment type for the
selected functional group. This report shows the Consequence of failure and probability of
failure with Risk (showing the color format). This would be one of the reports which would
be printed as deliverable for typical RBI projects. The following steps would allow you to get
the report.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
The user should have access right to view this report.
COF and POF is calculated for the tags.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation

Page 141 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


Main Menu
Asset Management
Tags with Risk Ranking Overall -RBI.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select List of

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

8.10 LIST OF TAGS WITH RISK RANKING OVERALL - SQL


This report will highlight the tags with overall Risk ranking of API 581- Semi Quantitative
type for the selected functional group. This report shows the Consequence of failure and
probability of failure with Risk (showing the color format). This would be one of the reports
which would be printed as deliverable for typical RBI projects. The following steps would
allow you to get the report.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
The user should have access right to view this report.
COF and POF is calculated for the tags

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation

Page 142 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


Main Menu
Asset Management
Click RBI Report menu Item
Tags with Risk Ranking Overall -SQL.

Select List of

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

8.11 PIPELINE CONSEQUENCE INDEX


This report displays the consequence index data for the selected tag in Asset Hierarchy. This
report displays the functional group of the tag with class name, attributes, and values with
unit of measurement under the tag.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Consequence Index.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select Pipeline

Page 143 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

8.12 PIPELINE CORROSION INDEX


This report displays the corrosion index data for the selected tag in Asset Hierarchy. This
report displays the functional group of the tag with class name, attributes, and values with
unit of measurement under the tag.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
corrosion Index.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select Pipeline

Page 144 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

8.13 PIPELINE DESIGN INDEX


This report displays the pipeline design index data for the selected tag in Asset Hierarchy.
This report displays the functional group of the tag with class name, attributes, and values
with unit of measurement under the tag.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
The user should have access right to view this report.
The selected tag class name should be PLOFF.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Design Index.

Asset Management

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select Pipeline

Page 145 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

8.14 PIPELINE OPERATION INDEX


This report displays the pipeline operation index data for the selected tag in Asset Hierarchy.
This report displays the functional group of the tag with class name, attributes, and values
with unit of measurement under the tag.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
The user should have access right to view this report.
The selected tag class name should be PLOFF.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Operation Index.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select Pipeline

Page 146 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

8.15 PIPELINE PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE


This report displays the pipeline preventative maintenance data for the selected tag in Asset
Hierarchy. This report displays the functional group of the tag with class name, attributes,
and values with unit of measurement under the tag.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
The user should have access right to view this report.
The selected tag class name should be PLOFF.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click RBI Report menu Item
PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE.

Select PIPELINE

Page 147 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

8.16 PIPELINE REMAINING LIFE TIME INDEX


This report displays the pipeline remaining life time index data for the selected tag in Asset
Hierarchy. This report displays the functional group of the tag with class name, attributes,
and values with unit of measurement under the tag.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
The user should have access right to view this report.
The selected tag class name should be PLOFF.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Remaining Life Time Index.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select Pipeline

Page 148 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

8.17 PIPELINE THIRD PARTY DAMAGE INDEX


This report displays the pipeline third party damage index data for the selected tag in Asset
Hierarchy. This report displays the functional group of the tag with class name, attributes,
and values with unit of measurement under the tag.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
The user should have access right to view this report.
The selected tag class name should be PLOFF.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Third party Damage Index.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select Pipeline

Page 149 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

8.18 PROBABILITY OF FAILURE ASSESSMENT - RBI


This report shows the result of probability of failure analysis with RBI assessment type.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
Few assets are registered in GALIOM Applications.
The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the tag in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
of failure assessment - RBI.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select Probability

Page 150 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

8.19 PROBABILITY OF FAILURE ASSESSMENT - SQL


This report shows the result of probability of failure analysis with API 581- Semi
Quantitative type.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
Few assets are registered in GALIOM Applications.
The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the tag in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
of failure assessment - SQL.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select Probability

Page 151 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

8.20 PROBABILITY OF FAILURE MECHANISM OCCURRENCE


This report displays the probability of failure mechanism of all the tags under selected
functional group in Asset Hierarchy. This report displays the tag name, class name, failure
mode, failure Mechanism and the probability.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
of failure Mechanism Occurrence.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select Probability

Page 152 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

8.21 RISK CLASSIFICATION - RBI


This report displays the Risk classification of COF and POF for RBI assessment type for the
selected functional group in the asset Hierarchy.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Classification-RBI.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select Risk

Page 153 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

8.22 RISK CLASSIFICATION - SQL


This report displays the Risk classification of COF and POF for API 581- Semi Quantitative
assessment type for the selected functional group in the asset Hierarchy.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Classification-SQL.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select Risk

Page 154 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

8.23 RISK RANKING REPORT RBI


This report displays the Risk ranking report of RBI Assessment type for the selected tag.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Ranking Report -RBI.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select Risk

Page 155 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

Page 156 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

8.24 RISK RANKING REPORT SQL


This report displays the Risk ranking report of API 581- Semi Quantitative Assessment type
for the selected tag.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Ranking Report - SQL.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select Risk

Page 157 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

8.25 RISK RANKING REPORT (GRAPHICAL REPERSENTATION)


This report shows graphical representation of risk profile with in functional group. Based on
the risk color the bar is colored. It shows the tag with the risk value scored while risk
ranking.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
Few assets are registered in the GALIOM Application.
The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the functional group in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click RBI Report menu Item
Ranking Report (Graphical Representation).

Select Risk

Page 158 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

8.26 SQ FATIGUE MODEL


This report displays the SQ- Fatigue Model for the selected tag in the asset Hierarchy.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Fatigue Model.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select SQ-

Page 159 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

8.27 SQ SCC MODEL


This report displays the SQ- SCC Model for the selected tag in the asset Hierarchy.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
MODEL.

Asset Management

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select SQ- SCC

Page 160 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

8.28 SQ THINNING MODEL


This report displays the SQ- Thinning Model for the selected tag in the asset Hierarchy.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Thinning Model.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select SQ-

Page 161 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

8.29 TAGS WITH PROBABLE FAILURE MECHANISM


This report displays the failure mechanism and failure mode set to the each tag present under
the selected functional group in Asset hierarchy.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
The user should have access right to view this report.
The failure mechanism and Failure mode should set to the each tag.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Probable Failure Mechanism.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select Tags with

Page 162 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

8.30 TOXIC RELEASE AREA CONTINUOUS


This report show the graphical presentation of toxic release based on hole size and time
intervals - continuous.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Release Area - Continuous.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select Toxic

Page 163 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

8.31 TOXIC RELEASE AREA INSTANTANEOUS


This report show the graphical presentation of toxic release based on hole size and time
intervals Instantaneous.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Release Area - Instantaneous.

Click RBI Report menu Item

Select Toxic

Page 164 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

INSPECTION MEMO REPORTS

9.1 RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP BASED ON CONDITION


CODES IN (BL, EC)
This report displays the recommendation follow up based on condition codes in (BL, EC)
The codes to be selected by the user.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
The user should have access right to view this report.
The system should display the select criteria window with condition codes.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report
Page 165 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Inspection memo Report menu Item
Select Recommendation Follow up based condition codes.

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

9.2 RECOMMENDATION
CONTAINMENT TYPE

FOLLOW

UP

BASED

ON

This report displays the recommendation follow up based on containment type in


(CLAFIT, reduced pressure) The codes to be selected by the user

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
The user should have access right to view this report.
The system should display the select criteria window with containment type.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Inspection memo Report menu Item
Select Recommendation Follow up based on containment Type

Page 166 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

9.3 RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP BASED ON FOLLOWUP


TEXT
This report displays the recommendation follow up based on follow-up text. The user has to
keen the text in the follow up text window.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
The user should have access right to view this report.
The system should display a window Follow up Text and allow the user to enter
the text and also allow the user to click on Apply and Cancel buttons.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Inspection memo Report menu Item
Select Recommendation Follow up based on Follow up text.

Page 167 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

9.4 RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP BASED ON REPAIR


CODES
This report displays the recommendation follow up based on Repair codes. The user has to
select from the select criteria window.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
The user should have access right to view this report.
The system should display the window with repair codes.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Inspection memo Report menu Item
Select Recommendation follow up based on repair codes.

Page 168 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

9.5 RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP REPORT


This report generates the follow up from inspection memo screen. This reports shows fields
like report no, asset name, inspection type, condition codes, repair code, contained, raised
date, follow up text with follow up due date.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
Few assets are registered in the GALIOM application.
The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Functional group in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Inspection memo Report menu Item
Select Recommendation Follow up report.

Page 169 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

9.6 RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP REPORT - FFP IS GREEN


AND COMPLETED
This report generates the follow ups for FFP which are green and completed.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Inspection memo Report menu Item
Select Recommendation Follow up report FFP is Green and Completed.

Page 170 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

9.7 RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP REPORT - FFP IS GREEN


AND NOT COMPLETED
This report generates the follow ups for FFP which are green and not completed.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Inspection memo Report menu Item
Select Recommendation Follow up report FFP is green and Not Completed.

Page 171 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

9.8 RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP REPORT - FFP IS


ORANGE AND 30 DAYS TO OVERDUE
This report generates the follow ups for FFP which are Orange and 30 days to overdue.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Inspection memo Report menu Item
Select Recommendation Follow up Report FFP is orange and 30 days to overdue.

Page 172 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

9.9 RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP REPORT - FFP IS


ORANGE AND COMPLETED
This report generates the follow ups for FFP which are Orange and Completed.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Inspection memo Report menu Item
Select Recommendation Follow up report FFP is Orange and completed.

Page 173 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

9.10 RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP REPORT - FFP IS


ORANGE AND NOT COMPLETED
This report generates the follow ups for FFP which are Orange and Not Completed.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Inspection memo Report menu Item
Select Recommendation Follow up report FFP is Orange and not completed.

Page 174 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

9.11 RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP REPORT - FFP IS


ORANGE AND OVERDUE
This report generates the follow ups for FFP which are Orange and overdue.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Inspection memo Report menu Item
Select Recommendation Follow up report FFP is Orange and Overdue.

Page 175 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

9.12 RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP REPORT - FFP IS RED


AND COMPLETED
This report generates the follow ups for FFP which are Red and completed.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Inspection memo Report menu Item
Select Recommendation follow up report FFP is Red and completed.

Page 176 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

9.13 RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP REPORT - FFP IS RED


AND NOT COMPLETED
This report shows recommendation follow up report for those item which are classed as
critical RED and there is no maintenance done yet on those follow ups. This report contains
fields like report no, asset name, inspection type, condition codes, repair codes, contained,
raised date, follow up text, FFP status and follow up date.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user.


The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
Few assets are registered in GALIOM Application.
The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the functional group in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Inspection memo Report menu Item
Select Recommendation follow up report FFP is Red and Not completed.

Page 177 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

9.14 RECOMMENDATION FOLLOW UP REPORT PER TAG AND


NOT CLOSED
This report generates the follow ups for each tag and not closed.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Inspection memo Report menu Item
Select Recommendation follow up report per tag and not closed.

Page 178 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button.

10 MONITORED DATA REPORTS


10.1 OXIDE SCALE THICKNESS MEASUREMENT
This report displays the Oxide scale thickness measurements data of each test point under
the selected tag in the Asset Hierarchy.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Monitored Data
Thickness Measurement.

Monitored Data Reports

Select the Oxide Scale

Page 179 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

10.2 MPI MEASUREMENT


This report displays the Magnetic Particle Inspection data of each test point under the
selected tag in the Asset Hierarchy.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Measurement

Monitored Data

Monitored Data Reports

Select the MPI

Page 180 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

10.3 LPI MEASUREMENT


This report displays the Liquid penetration inspection data of each test point under the
selected tag in the Asset Hierarchy.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Measurement.

Monitored Data

Monitored Data Reports

Select the LPI

Page 181 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

10.4 DIMENSION CHECK MEASUREMENT


This report displays the Dimension check inspection data of each test point under the
selected tag in the Asset Hierarchy.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Monitored Data
Check Measurement

Monitored Data Reports

Select the Dimension

Page 182 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

10.5 FREESPAN MEASUREMENT


This report displays the Freespan measurements data of each test point under the selected
tag in the Asset Hierarchy.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Measurement

Monitored Data

Monitored Data Reports

Select FreeSpan

Page 183 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

10.6 CATHODIC PROTECTION MEASUREMENT


This report displays the Cathodic Protection measurements data of each test point under the
selected tag in the Asset Hierarchy.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Monitored Data
protection Measurement

Monitored Data Reports

Select the Cathodic

Page 184 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

10.7 INTELLIGENT PIGGING INSPECTION


This report displays the Intelligent Pigging Inspection data of each test point under the
selected tag in the Asset Hierarchy.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Monitored Data
Pigging Inspection

Monitored Data Reports

Select the Intelligent

Page 185 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

10.8 CORROSION COUPONS


This report displays the Corrosion coupons measurements data of each test point under the
selected tag in the Asset Hierarchy.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
coupons

Monitored Data

Monitored Data Reports

Select the Corrosion

Page 186 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

10.9 CORROSION PROBE DATA


This report displays corrosion probe measurements data of each test point under the selected
tag in the Asset Hierarchy.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Data

Monitored Data

Monitored Data Reports

Select Corrosion Probe

Page 187 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

10.10 RADIOGRAPHY DATA


This report displays the radiography data of each test point under the selected tag in the
Asset Hierarchy.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Data

Monitored Data

Monitored Data Reports

Select the Radiography

Page 188 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

10.11 TELETEST DATA


This report displays the teletest measurements data of each test point under the selected tag
in the Asset Hierarchy.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu

Monitored Data

Monitored Data Reports

Select the Teletest data

Page 189 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

10.12 ULTRASONIC WALL THICKNESS


This report displays the ultrasonic wall thickness measurements data of each test point under
the selected tag in the Asset Hierarchy.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
wall thickness

Monitored Data

Monitored Data Reports

Select the Ultrasonic

Page 190 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

10.13 AUDIT REPORT FOR UTWT (MIN.WT<MAWT)


This report displays the audit data for UTWT (MIN.WT <MAWT) of each test point under
the selected tag in the Asset Hierarchy.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Monitored Data
for UTWT (Min.WT < MAWT)

Monitored Data Reports

Select the Audit Report

Page 191 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

10.14 AUDIT REPORT FOR UTWT (Min.WT < MAWT + 1.5)


This report displays the audit data for UTWT (MIN.WT <MAWT + 15) of each test point
under the selected tag in the Asset Hierarchy.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. The user should have access right to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Monitored Data
Monitored Data Reports
for UTWT (Min.WT < MAWT + 1.5)

Select the Audit Report

Page 192 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

11 MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE REPORTS


11.1 MOC/OV LIST WITH OPEN STATUS
This report displays all the Management of change or operating variation requests whose
status is Open or Approved.

Pre-requisites
1. There should be MOC or OV request with status Open or Approved.
2. The user should have access to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the MOC/OV List with Open status report in the Select Report drop down in
MOC Report Viewer.

Responsibilities
None.

Navigation
Main Menu
Management of change
with Open Status.

MOC Reports

Select the MOC/OV List

Page 193 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

11.2 MOC/OV LIST WITH COMPLETED STATUS


This report displays all the Management of change or operating variation requests whose
status is completed.

Pre-requisites
1. There should be MOC or OV request with status Completed.
2. The user should have access to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the MOC/OV List with completed status report in the Select Report drop down
in MOC Report Viewer.

Responsibilities
None.

Navigation
Main Menu
Management of change
with Open Status

MOC Reports

Select the MOC/OV List

Page 194 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

11.3 MOC/OV LIST WITH WITHDRAWN STATUS


This report displays all the Management of change or operating variation requests whose
status is withdrawn.

Pre-requisites
1. There should be MOC or OV request with status withdrawn.
2. The user should have access to view this report..

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the MOC/OV List with withdrawn status report in the Select Report drop down
in MOC Report Viewer.

Responsibilities
None.

Navigation
Main Menu
Management of change
with withdrawn Status

MOC Reports

Select the MOC/OV List

11.4 MOC/OV LIST WITH EXTENDED STATUS


This report displays all the Management of change or operating variation requests whose
status is extended.

Pre-requisites
1. There should be MOC or OV request with status extended.
Page 195 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


2. The user should have access to view this report..

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the MOC/OV List with extended status report in the Select Report drop down in
MOC Report Viewer.

Responsibilities
None.

Navigation
Main Menu
Management of change
with extended Status

MOC Reports

Select the MOC/OV List

11.5 MOC/OV LIST WITH REJECTED STATUS


This report displays all the Management of change or operating variation requests whose
status is rejected.

Pre-requisites
1. There should be MOC or OV request with status rejected.
2. The user should have access to view this report..

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the MOC/OV List with rejected status report in the Select Report drop
down in MOC Report Viewer.

Responsibilities
None.

Page 196 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Navigation
Main Menu
Management of change
with rejected Status

MOC Reports

Select the MOC/OV List

11.6 MOC/OV STATUS GRAPH


This report displays the Total Management of change and Operating Variation request with
their status (i.e., Open/Completed/Approved/Withdrawn/Extended/Rejected). An also the
data will be shown in graphical mode also..

Pre-requisites
1. There should be MOC or OV request generated in the GALIOM Application.
2. The user should have access to view this report..

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the MOC/OV status graph report in the Select Report drop down in MOC
Report Viewer.

Responsibilities
None.

Navigation
Main Menu
Status Graph

Management of change

MOC Reports

Select the MOC/OV

Page 197 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

11.7 NUMBER OF MOC/OV DUE DATE EXPIRE IN 30 DAYS


This report displays all the Management of change or operating variation requests whose due
date will expire in 30 days from the current date.

Pre-requisites
1. There should be MOC or OV request with status approved and having due date.
2. The user should have access to view this report..

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select Number of MOC/OV Due date Expire in 30 Days report in the Select Report
drop down in MOC Report Viewer.

Responsibilities
None.

Navigation
Main Menu
Management of change
MOC/OV due date expire in 30 days

MOC Reports

Select the Number of

Page 198 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

11.8 NUMBER OF MOC/OV EXTENSION EXPIRES IN 14 DAYS


This report displays all the Management of change or operating variation requests whose due
date will expire in 30 days from the current date.

Pre-requisites
1. There should be MOC or OV request with extended status.
2. The user should have access to view this report.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select Number of MOC/OV Extension Expire in 30 Days report in the Select Report
drop down in MOC Report Viewer.

Responsibilities
None.

Navigation
Main Menu
Management of change
MOC/OV Extension Expires in 14 days.

MOC Reports

Select Number of

Page 199 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

11.9 MOC/OV REQUEST APPROVED WITHOUT WORK ORDER


This report displays all the Management of change or operating variation requests whose
status is Approved, but does not have the work order request.

Pre-requisites
1. There should be MOC or OV request with status Approved and should not have the
work order.
2. The user should have access to view this report..

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select MOC/OV requests Approved without work order report in the Select Report
drop down in MOC Report Viewer.

Responsibilities
None.

Navigation
Main Menu
Management of change
Request approved without work order

MOC Reports

Select the MOC/OV

12 MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE / OPERATING VARIATION

MODULE
INTRODUCTION
Management of change and Operating variation is the part of GALIOM application. This
module will manage and record the change requirement for Operating variation and

Page 200 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


management of change. For any variation in operations and maintenance parameters, it
would require proper change management and escalation. Different user groups are involved
at different stages of change management and operating variation workflow process. Every
Management of change request or operating variation request would have an initiator.
This module allows all the GALIOM users to create Management of change
request/Operating Variation request, who are having the MOC/OV initiator responsible
right. The initiated request would undergo several review and approval process cycles by
different user groups who are involved in the Management of change /Operating variation
workflow process. Based on the type of request (i.e., either the Operating Variation
/management of change), the module is capable of handling the workflow, review and
approval process.
The review and approval process of Management of Change request/Operating Variation
request by the different user groups is configured in the module. Based on the configuration
values, the module allow the different user groups to review and approve the Management of
change request / operating variation Request.

12.1 HOW TO CONFIGURE MOC SETUP


This is one of the MOC/OV configuration setup windows. The user, who is having ADMIN
responsibilities, will only configure the data. This window is facilitated with several types of
configurable options like, in how many days the MOC/OV request should complete or
eligible for extension once the respective MOC/OV request is approved, by the Final
authority responsible group. This window facilitates configurable options like yes/no, to
send an email to MOC/OV initiator when the MOC/OV request is
withdrawn/Approved/Rejected. And also provides the option to the user for customizing
the Email Subject, Email Message, which are appear in the mails sent to the MOC/OV
Requester. This window is also having a Provision to lock/unlock the review tabs, once the
respective MOC/OV Request cross the Max priority days. And user also configure, whether
the work order column present in the MOC/OV request form should be editable by the
MOC/OV initiator or the data for that column to be filled automatic by the system during
the MOC/OV request raised, if there is any work order existing in the interface table to this
MOC/OV request. This window displays the existing configuration values, when it is
opened.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADMIN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Press Insert button: - The system insert a new record, but before that the system
display a user message Do you want to delete the current MOC/OV workflow
configuration valueswith Yes and No options. If the user press No option, the
system will keep the existing configuration values in live. If the user press yes option,
the system will delete the current configuration values and insert the new record.
2. Press Save button:- The system save the modifications done on the existing
configuration values, when user press save button.

Page 201 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

3. Press Print button:- The system prints the current display page.
4.

Press Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
MainMenu

Management of Change

Click on MOC Setup menu Item

Column Description
1. MOC/OV Due days (O)
a. This column defines in how many days the MOC/OV request should
completed or eligible for extension, once after the MOC/OV request is
approved by the responsible group who are having Final authority.
b. The MOC due date column, present in MOC/OV request from should
display the value, which is the date of MOC/OV approved plus the number
of days specified in this column.
c. If user try to save the record by entering the negative value in this column, the
system display the following message Please Enter the Positive values
2. MOC/OV Extension Valid days (O)
a. This column defines how many days of Extension should the MOC/OV
request will get, Once the Extension request is approved by the responsible
group who are having Final Authority when the MOC/OV request is crossed
the MOC/OV due date and the MOC/OV status is not
completed/rejected/withdrawn.
Page 202 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


b. The Validity Start date column present in the MOC/OV extension tab of
MOC/OV request from display the date, which is the date of Extension
approved plus the number of days specified in this column.
c. If user try to save the record by entering the negative value in this column, the
system display the following message Please Enter the Positive values.
3. Send Email on MOC/OV withdrawn (O)
a. If check box is checked. An email is sent to the MOC/OV request Initiator,
when the respective MOC/OV withdraw request is approved by the final
authority group.
4. Subject of Email on MOC/OV withdrawn (O)
a. The subject of the Email
5. Message in Email on MOC/OV withdrawn (O)
a. The Message in the Email
6. Send Email on MOC/OV Rejected (O)
a. If check box is checked. An email is sent to the MOC/OV request Initiator,
when the respective MOC/OV is rejected by the final authority group.
7. Subject of Email on MOC/OV Rejected (O)
a. The subject of the Email
8. Message in Email on MOC/OV Rejected (O)
a. The Message in the Email.
9. Send Email on MOC/OV Accepted (O)
a. If check box is checked. An email is sent to the MOC/OV request Initiator,
when the respective MOC/OV is accepted by the responsible group who are
having the Final authority
10. Subject of Email on MOC/OV Accepted (O)
a. The subject of the Email.
11. Message in Email on MOC/OV Accepted (O)
a. The Message in the Email.
12. Send Email on MOC/OV Created (O)
a. If the check box is checked. An email is sent to the all the user groups who are
involved in the Management of change/Operation variation, when a
MOC/OV request is raised by any user having MOC/OV initiator right.
13. Subject of Email on MOC/OV Created (O)
a. The subject of the Email.
14. Message in Email on MOC/OV Created (O)
a. The Message of the Email.
15. Send Email for MOC/OV workflow note (O)
a. If the check box is checked. An email is sent to next hierarchical responsible
group in the MOC/OV workflow. Alerting the responsible group, to have a
review or approval on the MOC/OV request.
Page 203 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

16. MOC/OV Work order Number (O)


a. If the value is set to Manual. The MOC/OV request Initiator, should select
the Work order number from the drop down in Work Order column Present
in the MOC/OV request Form.
b. If the value is set to Automatic. The system will automatically display the work
order number, work order priority, work order status etc, if there is any work
order exiting in Interface table for this MOC/OV request.
17. After MOC/OV Priority days Lock the tabs (O)
a. If the value is set to Lock, the system will lock all the review tabs (including
withdrawn and extension) of the responsible groups present in the MOC/OV
request form, once the respective MOC/OV priority max days is completed.
b. If the value is set to unlock, the system allow the users to edit their respective
tab (including withdrawn and extension tab), even the MOC/OV max days is
completed.
18. Updated date (O)
a. The system display the updated date, when ever user (i.e., ADMIN) modifies
the data.
19. Updated User (O)
a. The system displays the updated user, with the Admin user id, when ever user
modifies the data in this window.
Report
Press File

Print Preview

Page 204 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

12.2 HOW TO CONFIGURE THE MOC STATUS SETUP


This is one of the MOC/OV configuration setup windows. The user, who is having ADMIN
responsibilities, will only configure the data. The user can configure the MOC/OV rights
(i.e., Initiated, Review, Approval, Withdrawn and Extension) to each responsible group who
are involved in the Management of change /Operating variation workflow process and the
MOC/OV initiation right to the users. When user selects a desired responsible group from
the drop down, the system automatically displays the MOC/OV responsible group rights. If
the selected user group needs any responsible group right, check the check box against each
MOC/OV responsible rights (By default is NO (i.e., un check) and press save button.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADMIN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Press Save button:- The system save the modifications done on the existing
configuration values, when user press save button.
2. Press Print button:- The system prints the current display page.
3. Press Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application

Responsibilities
Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window

Navigation
MainMenu

Management of Change

Click on MOC status setup menu Item.

Column Description
1. Seq No (D)
a. The system automatic generates the seqno and display.
2. Moc status (D)
a. The system automatically displays the Moc status type (i.e., Initiated, Review,
Approval, Withdrawn and Extension). When user select the Responsible

Page 205 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


group in the drop down window. The MOC/OV request workflow process is
totally depended on these configuration user rights of each responsible group
3. Responsible Group Rights (M)
a. The system provides the check box against each MOC/OV Responsible
group right. Check (i.e., Yes) if the right should applicable to the selected
responsible group, Uncheck (i.e., No) if the right should not applicable to
the selected responsible group. By default the value is No, (i.e., uncheck).
4. Updated date (D)
a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user (i.e., ADMIN)
modifies the data.
5. Updated User (D)
a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.

Report
Press File

Print Preview

12.3 HOW TO CONFIGURE THE MOC PRIORITY SETUP


This is one of the MOC/OV configuration setup windows. The user, who is having ADMIN
responsibilities, will only configure the data. The user configure the priority days for the
MOC or OV request to each responsible user group for the different priority levels (i.e.,
HIGH, MEDIUM, HIGH). The user should select the priority type from the drop down and
enter the days to each user group, who are involved in the MOC/OV request workflow.
Based on the priority selected in the MOC or OV request form, the MOC/OV workflow is
depended.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADMIN group user should have Access to invoke this window.
Page 206 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Press Save button:- The system save the modifications done on the existing
configuration values, when user press save button.
2. Press Print button:- The system prints the current display page.
3. Press Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application

Responsibilities
Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
MainMenu

Management of Change

Click on MOC Priority setup menu Item.

Column Description
1. Seq No (D)
a. The system automatic generates the seqno and display.
2. Responsible Group (D)
a. The system will show all the responsible groups who are involved at different
stages of change management and operating variation workflow process.
3. Days (M)
a. The user will enter the days. The value of this column will influence the
workflow process of MOC/OV request. By default 0 days.
i. The system will display the following message The days should not
be Null , when user try to create or modify the existing record,
without entering any data in this column. And the system will not
save the date, unless the user enters the data into this column.
ii. The system will display the following message The days should not
be less than Zero , when user try to create or modify the existing
record, by entering negative number in this column. And the system
will not save the date, unless the user enters the value greater than or
zero.
4. Updated date (D)

Page 207 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user (i.e., ADMIN)
modifies the data.
5. Updated User (D)
a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.

Report
Press File

Print Preview

12.4 HOW TO CONFIGURE THE MOC TAB SETUP


This is one of the MOC/OV configuration setup windows. The user, who is having ADMIN
responsibilities, will only configure the data. The configuration values in this window play
major significance role in the MOC/OV Request workflow process. The seqno column,
defines the responsible group hierarchy in the management of change or Operating variation
request workflow process and the value Y in the work request req column defines the
responsible group, which is having the Final Authority right to Approve/reject/decide later
on MOC/OV request and also the approval/reject/decide later on withdrawn or extension.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should be ADMIN group.
2. The login ADMIN group user should have Access to invoke this window.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Press Insert button:- The system insert a new record.
2. Press Save button:- The system save the modifications done on the existing
configuration values, when user press save button. And if user try to save the new
record by entering existing seqno or with existing responsible group. The system
display the following message There should not be duplicate seqno/ there should not
be duplicate responsible group and the application will not update/add the record
into database table.

Page 208 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


3. Press Delete button:- After selecting the record, when user press delete button the
system will display the following message You are about to delete the selected record,
Do you wish to continue with Yes & No buttons. If user press yes button, the
selected record is deleted. And if user presses No button, the system will not delete the
selected record.
4. Press Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display.
5. Press Print button:- The system prints the current display page.
6. Press Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application

Responsibilities
Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
MainMenu

Management of Change

Click on MOC Tab setup menu Item

Column Description
1. Seq No (M)
a. The seq no is unique to each Responsible group. This seq No defines the tab
sequence order of Responsible group in the management of change
/Operating variation Request form and also defines the workflow sequence
followed for the review and approval of MOC/OV request.
i. The system will not allow the user to enter the duplicate seqno. If user
tries to save the record with duplicate seqno the system will display the
user message There should not be duplicate seqno.
ii. The system display the following message Tab Sequence Number is
mandatory. , If the user try to save/create a record without entering
any data in this column
iii.
2. Responsible Group (M)
a. Select the responsible group, who are involve in the MOC/OV workflow
process from the drop down.

Page 209 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. The system will not allow the user to select same responsible group, if
the respective responsible group is selected already in the window. If
user tries to save the record with duplicate responsible group the
system will display user message There should not be duplicate
responsible group.
ii. The system display the following message Responsible Group is
mandatory. , If the user try to save/create a record without entering
any data in this column.
3. Responsible Group Label (M)
a. The user can describe any name (i.e., Label) to the each responsible group.
Since the data in this column is configurable, so it is an advantage to client to
have their own Labels to each responsible group.
i. The system display the following message Responsible group label is
mandatory. , If the user try to save/create a record without entering
any data in this column.
4. Work Request Req (M)
a. The data value Y in this column defines the Final authority right to that
responsible group to approve/ reject/decide later on MOC/OV requests and
approval/reject/decided later on with drawn requests/ Extension requests.
i. Only one responsible group should have final authority right.
ii. The system display the following message Raised Work Request is
mandatory. , If the user try to save/create a record without entering
any data in this column.
5. Updated Date (D)
a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.
6. Updated User (D)
a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.

Report
1. Press File

Print Preview

Page 210 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

12.5 HOW TO CHECK THE MOC ACTION ITEMS


This window show all the MOC/OV request related mails received to that particular user.
This window show messages only when user computer is configured with Outlook. The user
can see the mail sender name, subject, Date & Time, with a Read/unread mark, form whom
the email came from, to address and the message of the mail. This window has option to
delete the selected mail, if the user having MOCDEL right. And also close button, to close
the window. This mail inbox will receive the mails only when ADMIN check the email send
options in the MOC workflow configuration Setup.

Pre-requisites
1. The Microsoft outlook should present in the PC.
2. All the GALIOM users should have the email ID or all the users who are having
MOC/OV initiation, review and approval right.
3. The MOC/OV users and the users who are having MOC/OV initiation right should
have Microsoft outlook access with userid and password.
4. The MOC/OV initiator should have the emailed, if the user wants to receive the
emails.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Press delete button:- The system will delete the selected record from the Mail
Inbox. And the user should have MOCDEL right to delete the mails.
2. Press close button:- The system will close the Mail inbox.
3.

Press Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
The user should be under any one of the responsible groups, which are involved in the
Management of change /Operating variation review and approval process. to check
the workflow related mails.(i.e., the email subject like The MOC/OV is to review.
2. Any GALIOM user, who is having the MOC/OV initiator right for the Management
of change request/ operating variation request.
3. The user should have MOCDEL responsibility to delete the mails.

1.

Navigation
MainMenu

Management of Change

Click on MOC Action Items menu Item

Page 211 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1.

Sender (D)
a. The system displays the mail id of the sender.

2.

Subject (D)
a. The system displays the subject of the mail.

3.

Date & Time (D)


a. The system displays the Date & time of the mail received.

4.

Unread mail (D)


a. The system displays the check mark, if the respective mail is not read by the
user.

5.

From (D)
a. The system display the mail id from whom the selected mail has came.

6.

To (D)
a. The system display the entire mail ids of the users, who and all received this
selected mail.

7.

Subject (D)
a. The system displays the subject of the selected mail.

8.

Message (D)
a. The system displays the mail message of the selected mail.

9.

Status (D)
a. The system displays the status message about the mail process like. Login
success, reading the mails etc.

Report
1. None.

Page 212 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

12.6 HOW TO CREATE MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE REQUEST


This window is used to initiate a Management of change request. Any Responsible group
having initiator right can request the Management of change. To initiate the management of
change for an asset, the user has to select the respective Asset in the Asset hierarchy tree and
click on the INSERT button. Once the user clicks on insert button, the system provides an
option to the user to initiate Management of change or Operating variation for the selected
Asset. Based on the selection the system display the Management of change or Operating
variation request form, and then enter the data in all mandatory columns press SAVE button.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should have MOC/OV initiator right, to request the management of
change and also to attach the documents in the document tab for that MOC.
2. The login user should have access to invoke the Asset level & Total MOC/OV
Request list menu item.
3. The login user should have Asset view right to select the Asset, for which the user
wants to initiate the Management of change.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system display a message box click yes to create the
management of change/ click No to create the operating variation having Yes and
No options. If user press yes button, the system display the Management of change
request Form. If the user press No button, the system display the Operating
variation request form.
2. Note:- If the user wants to insert a document to the MOC, the user has to click the
document tab page and press Insert button. If the user does not have the MOC/OV
initiator right, the system displays the following message you do not have the rights
to attach the documents to the selected MOC/OV request.
3. Delete button:- The system delete the selected document from the document tab
page. The user cannot delete the Management of change or operating variation
request from this window. If there is no documents present in the documents tab
page of the selected MOC/OV request, the system display the following message
you do not have any attached documents to delete. If user not selected any
document in the document tab page and press the deleted button, the system will
display the following message select any document in document tab page and press
delete button. When user select the document in the document tab page and press
delete button, the system display the following message You are about to delete the
document selected, do you wish to continue with Yes and No buttons. If the user
press Yes button, the system delete the selected document from the document tab
page. If the user press the No button, the system will not delete the selected
document from the document tab page.
4. Detail button: - The system will display the selected document details. If there is no
document present the system displays the following message You do not have any
attached documents to show details .
5. Save button:- The system will save the new/modified Management of change
request.
Page 213 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

6. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display.


7. Print button:- The system will give print job of the current display page.
8. Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
The user should have MOC/OV initiator right.
The user should have MOCDEL responsibility to delete the documents.
The user should have ASTEDT to access the Asset Hierarchy tree, to select the
asset for which the user wants to request the management of change request.
4. The user should have DOC EDIT responsibility to edit the document.

1.
2.
3.

Navigation
MainMenu
Management of Change
Click on MOC Requests menu Item
Press
Insert button (After selecting the respective asset, to which the user wants to initiate the
Management of change).

Column Description
1.

MOC No (D)
a. The MOC number will be automatically generated by the system.

2.

Asset Name (D)


a. The system displays the asset name selected in the Asset Hierarchy.

3.

Raised date (M)


a. This column shows the MOC raised date. By default the system will display
the respective day date, and this column is also editable, user can change the
raised date, before user initiate the MOC/OV request.

Page 214 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. The user can not initiate Management of change / Operating
variation request less than Current day date.
ii. Once the MOC/OV is requested, The Raised date columns can not
be editable except to the ADMIN or the user how has initiated the
MOC/OV request.
iii. The system display the following message Raised Date is mandatory.
, If the user try to save/create a record without entering any data in
this column.
4.

Location (O)
a. The user has to enter the Location of the Asset i.e., company level/ Business
unit level /Complex level/Location level//Functional group level etc

5.

MOC Priority (M)


a. The user has to select the MOC priority (i.e., HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW)
i. The system display the following message Priority is mandatory. , If
the user try to save/create a record without entering any data in this
column.

6.

MOC status (M)


a. By default the system display the MOC status is OPEN.
i. The system allows the user to edit this column, once the MOC/OV
status is approved, this option is provide to the user to change the
MOC status from Approved to Complete, when the MOC/OV is
completed.
ii. The system allow the ADMIN and the user how initiated the
respective MOC/OV to edit this column, though MOC status is
OPEN. This option is provided, just to correct the mistake, if any
user selects the wrong MOC/OV status and save the MOC/OV
Request.
iii. If the MOC/OV status is changed to OPEN by the ADMIN or the
MOC/OV initiator, the MOC due date and complete date columns
should be null.

7.

MOC Due date (D)


a. The system displays the MOC due date, when the MOC/OV is approved by
the Final Authority Responsible user group.
i. The MOC Due date is always in display mode.
ii. The value (i.e., date) should be display only when the respective MOC
is approved by the Final Authority Responsible group.
iii. The value (i.e., date) should be always greater than MOC raised date
and the date should be, the date of MOC/OV is approved plus the
number of days specified in the MOC/OV Due days column in the
MOC setup window.

8.

Work Description (M)


a. The user should enter the work description, why the MOC is initiated for the
selected Asset.
i. The system display the following message work Description is
mandatory. , If the user try to save/create a record without entering
any data in this column.

9.

Reason For Change (O)


Page 215 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


a. The user will enter the reason for change, this is an optional column, though
the user can not enter any description, the MOC will be created.
10. Wo

Number (D/E)
a. On saving the Management of change request, the system displays the work
order number, if there is any work order present for this MOC number in the
SAP system, The system display the work order only, when the ADMIN set
the option Automatic for the column MOC/OV work order Number in
MOC/OV workflow configuration window.
i. This column will be display mode, if the ADMIN selects Automatic
option in the MOC/OV work order number column present in the
MOC setup
b.

The column is in editable mode; also show all the work order numbers
present in the SAP system, if the ADMIN selects Manual option in the
MOC/OV work order number column present in the MOC setup.
i. If the user selects any work order number from the drop down, the
system will display the Wo status, Wo priority, Wo close Date of the
selected Wo order.

11. Wo

Status (D)
a. The system displays the Wo status based on the wo order number selected by
the user from the drop down When the MOC request is created, if the system
finds work order in the SAP system for this MOC number, then the system
display the respective Wo status.

12. Wo

Priority (D)
a. The system displays the Wo Priority Based on the wo order number selected
by the user from the drop down When the MOC request is created, if the
system finds work order in the SAP system for this MOC number, then the
system display the respective Wo Priority.

13. Wo

close date (D)


a. The system displays the Wo close date based on the wo order number
selected by the user from the drop down When the MOC request is created,
if the system finds work order in the SAP system for this MOC number, and
then the system displays the respective Wo close date.

14. Created

Date (D)
a. When the MOC is initiated, the system displays the current day date as
created date.

15. Created

user (D)
a. When the MOC is initiated, the system displays the MOC initiator user id as
created User.

16. Update

date (D)
a. The system display the updated date, when ever modifies the data.

17. Updated

user (D)
a. The system displays the updated user who ever modifies the data in this
window.

Page 216 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Report
1. Press File

Print Preview

12.7 HOW TO CREATE OPERATING VARIATION


This window is used to initiate an operating variation. Any Responsible group having
initiator right can request the operating variation. To initiate operating variation for an asset,
the user has to select the respective Asset hierarchy tree and click on the INSERT button.
Once the user clicks on insert button, the system provides an option to the user to initiate
Management of change or Operating variation. for the selected Asset. Based on the selection
the system display the Management of change or Operating variation request form, and then
enter the data in all mandatory columns press SAVE button.

Pre-requisites
The login user should have MOC/OV initiator right, to request the management of
change and also to attach the documents in the document tab for that OV.
2. The login user should have access to invoke the Asset level & Total MOC/OV
Request list menu item.
3. The login user should have Asset view right to select the Asset, for which the user
wants to initiate the Operating variation.
4. There should not be any work order exist in the interface table.
1.

Steps to the usage of this window


1.

Press Insert button:- The system display a message box click yes to create the
management of change/ click No to create the operating variation having Yes and

Page 217 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


No options. If user press yes button, the system display the Management of change
request Form. If the user press No button, the system display the Operating
variation request form.
2.

Note:- If the user wants to insert a document to the OV, the user has to click the
document tab page and press Insert button. If the user does not have the MOC/OV
initiator right, the system displays the following message you do not have the rights
to attach the documents to the selected MOC/OV request.

3.

Press Delete button:- The system delete the selected document from the document
tab page. The user cannot delete the Management of change or operating variation
request from this window. If there is no documents present in the documents tab
page of the selected MOC/OV request, the system display the following message
you do not have any attached documents to delete. If user not selected any
document in the document tab page and press the deleted button, the system will
display the following message select any document in document tab page and press
delete button. When user select the document in the document tab page and press
delete button, the system display the following message You are about to delete the
document selected, do you wish to continue with Yes and No buttons. If the user
press Yes button, the system delete the selected document from the document tab
page. If the user press the No button, the system will not delete the selected
document from the document tab page.

4.

Press Detail button: - The system will display the selected document details. If
there is no document present the system displays the following message You do not
have any attached documents to show details .

5.

Press Save button:- The system will save the new/modified Operating variation
Request. And when the final authority responsible group approves the Operating
variation, insert a record in the Interface table.

6.

Press Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display and If there is a work
order available for the respective Operating variation request in the interface table,
the system will display the Work order number, work order status, work order
priority and work order close date.

7.

Press Print button:- The system will give print job of the current display page.

8.

Press Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. The user should have MOC/OV initiator right.
2. The user should have MOCDEL responsibility to delete the documents.
3. The user should have ASTEDT to access the Asset Hierarchy tree, to select the asset
for which the user wants to request the management of change request.
4. The user should have DOC EDIT responsibility to edit the document.

Navigation
MainMenu
Management of Change
Click on MOC requests menu Item
Press
Insert button (After selecting the respective asset, to which the user wants to initiate the
operating variation).
Page 218 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1.

OV No (D)
a. The OV number will be automatically generated by the system.

2.

Asset Name (D)


a. The system displays the asset name selected in the Asset Hierarchy.

3.

Raised date (M)


a. This column shows the OV raised date. By default the system will display the
respective day date, and this column is also editable, user can change the
raised date, before user initiate the MOC/OV request.
i. The user can not initiate Management of change / Operating
variation request less than Current day date.
ii. Once the MOC/OV is requested, The Raised date columns can not
be editable except to the ADMIN or the user how has initiated the
MOC/OV request.
iii. The system display the following message Raised Date is mandatory.
, If the user try to save/create a record without entering any data in
this column.

4.

Location (O)
a. The user has to enter the Location of the Asset i.e., company level/ Business
unit level /Complex level/Location level//Functional group level etc.

OV Priority (M)
a. The user has to select the OV priority (i.e., HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW)
i. The system display the following message Priority is mandatory. , If
the user try to save/create a record without entering any data in this
column.
6. OV status (M)
a. By default the system display the OV status is OPEN.
5.

Page 219 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. The system allows the user to edit this column, once the MOC/OV
status is approved, this option is provide to the user to change the
OV status from Approved to Complete, when the MOC/OV is
completed.
ii. The system allow the ADMIN and the user how initiated the
respective MOC/OV to edit this column, though OV status is
OPEN. This option is provided, just to correct the mistake, if any
user selects the wrong MOC/OV status and save the MOC/OV
Request.
iii. If the MOC/OV status is changed to OPEN by the ADMIN or the
MOC/OV initiator, the MOC due date and complete date columns
should be null.
7.

OV Due date (D)


a. The system displays the OV due date, when the MOC/OV is approved by
the Final Authority Responsible user group.
i. The OV Due date is always in display mode.
ii. The value (i.e., date) should be display only when the respective OV
is approved by the Final Authority Responsible group.
iii. The value (i.e., date) should be always greater than OV raised date
and the date should be, the date of MOC/OV is approved plus the
number of days specified in the MOC/OV Due days column in the
MOC setup window.

8.

Work Description (M)


a. The user should enter the work description, why the OV is initiated for the
selected Asset.
i. The system display the following message work Description is
mandatory. , If the user try to save/create a record without entering
any data in this column.

9.

Reason For Change (O)


a. The user will enter the reason for change, this is an optional column, though
the user can not enter any description, the OV will be created.

10. Wo

Number (D)
a. Once the respective Operating variation is updated with the work order in
the intermediate table, the system will display the respective work order
number.
i. This column will be display mode, once the Interface system updates
the work order number for the respective Operating variation
request.
b. The column is in editable mode, also show all the work order numbers
present in the SAP system, if the ADMIN selects Manual option in the
MOC/OV work order number column present in the MOC setup.
i. If the user selects any work order number from the drop down, the
system will display the Wo status, Wo priority, Wo close Date of the
selected Wo order.

11. Wo

Status (D)
a. The system displays the Wo status based on the wo order number selected by
the user from the drop down When the MOC request is created, if the system
Page 220 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


finds work order in the SAP system for this OV number, then the system
display the respective Wo status.
12. Wo

Priority (D)
a. The system displays the Wo Priority Based on the wo order number selected
by the user from the drop down When the MOC request is created, if the
system finds work order in the SAP system for this OV number, then the
system display the respective Wo Priority.

13. Wo

close date (D)


a. The system displays the Wo close date based on the wo order number
selected by the user from the drop down When the MOC request is created,
if the system finds work order in the SAP system for this OV number, and
then the system displays the respective Wo close date.

14. Created

Date (D)
a. When the OV is initiated, the system displays the current day date as created
date.

15. Created

user (D)
a. When the OV is initiated, the system displays the MOC initiator user id as
created User.

16. Update

date (D)
a. The system display the updated date, when ever modifies the data.

17. Updated

user (D)
a. The system displays the updated user who ever modifies the data in this
window.

Report
1. Press File

Print Preview

Page 221 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

12.8 HOW TO REVIEW THE ENGINEER TAB


This is the one of the review tab in the MOC/OV workflow, after the MOC/OV is created.
The MOC/OV review/approval workflow process will start from this tab. The MOC/OV
workflow works based on sequential or based on the priority Days. After the MOC/OV is
raised and the engineer group user login into the system, if the engineer group is having
review right the user can edit the engineer tab page and review. The user can also take action
(i.e., Approve/reject/decide later) on current MOC/OV, if the user group is having right to
Approve. After review, Press save button, to save the review comments
The Sequential workflow:- When the review/approval process of MOC/OV by different
responsible user groups, is based on the seqno configured in the MOC/OV tab sequence,
Tab labels and work request Requirement setup screen.
The MOC Priority Days workflow:- When the system allow the respective responsible user
group user to edit their respective tab page for review/approval based on the days set against
each responsible group for the selected MOC/OV priority in MOC/OV Priority Setup
window. The MOC/OV raised date will be the key factor in MOC/OV priority Days
workflow.
For Example:MOC Priority screen for High.
Responsible group
Engineer
Inspector
Operation
HSE
Maintc
Seniormanagement

Days
0
1
1
2
2
2

MOC/OV Priority
High
High
High
High
High
High

If a MOC/OV request is raised on 12/09/2006 and the MOC priority is set to high. Based
on the above configuration priority, the system will allow the Engineer user group user to
edit the Engineer tab page on 12/09/2006 (since the days set is 0), and the responsible
user group should have the MOC/OV review rights. And from 13/09/2006, the system
allow the Inspector, Operation user to edit their respective tabs (since the days set is 1),
and the responsible user group should have the MOC/OV review rights. In similar way, the
system allows the HSE, Maintenance and Senior management user to edit their respective tab
pages from 15/09/2006.
The system is smart enough to handle the workflow process of MOC/OV, when the
workflow is not in sequential then the system will work based on the MOC/OV priority
selected for that respective MOC/OV.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should belong to Engineer responsible group, and should have review
rights and also the group should have MOCEDIT to edit this tab.

Page 222 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


2. The login user is ADMIN or the login user is the MOC/OV creator (i.e., Initiator),
can edit this tab.
3. When the respective MOC/OV is following sequence or priority days workflow, can
edit this tab.
4. When the admin selected unlock in After MOC/OV priority days Lock the tabs
column present in MOC workflow configuration, can edit this tab.
5. The login user should have the access to the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request
List menu item.
6. The system will not allow the user to edit this tab, in the following scenarios.
a. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, if the respective MOC
status is Approve/Rejected/extended and withdrawn.
b. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, if MOC/OV request does
not follow either sequential or MOC/OV priority Days workflow.
c. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, once the MOC priority
Max days is over, and the lock option is selected in the MOC workflow
configuration window.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Access the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request List:- The user should click
on the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request List menu. Once the window is open,
selected the respective asset in the asset hierarchy, for which the MOC/OV request
is created and pending for the Engineer group review/approval and double click on
the MOC/OV request (i.e., the MOC/OV status will be OPEN) .
a. Edit from the Asset Level MOC/OV Request List.:- Once the Asset
Level & Total MOC/OV Request List menu is clicked, selected the
respective asset in the asset hierarchy, for which the MOC/OV request is
created and pending for the Engineer group review/approval and double
click on the MOC/OV request (i.e., the MOC/OV status will be OPEN)
b. Edit from the Total MOC/OV Request List:- Once the Asset Level &
Total MOC/OV Request List menu is clicked, select the total MOC/OV
request list tab and after that select the Open tab. And select the respective
MOC/OV request pending for the Engineer group review/approval and
double click on the MOC/OV request (i.e., the MOC/OV status will be
OPEN)
2. Access through the MOC button:- If there is any Management of change or
Operating variation request is pending for review/approval by the engineer group,
the system will enable the MOC button present in the screen. Once the user click on
the MOC button, the system will open a window with entire management of change
or operating variation request, which are pending for the review/approval by the
engineer group.
c. If there is no Management of change or operating variation request is
pending for review/approval by the login responsible group, the MOC
button will be in disable mode.
3. Press Print button:- The system will give print job of the current display page.
4.

Press Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
Page 223 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.

The user should have MOC/OV review right, to enter the review comments.
The user should have the MOC/OV approval right, to approve/reject the respective
MOC/OV request.
The user should have MOCDEL responsibility to delete the documents.
The user should have ASTEDT to access the Asset Hierarchy tree, to select the asset
for which the MOC/OV request is created and pending for the review/approve by
the engineer group.
The user should have DOC EDIT responsibility to edit the document.
The user should have MOCEDIT to access the MOC/OV requests.

Navigation
MainMenu
Management of Change
on Engineer tab.

Click on MOC Request menu item

Click

Column Description
1.

Review Date (D/O)


a. When user enters any comments in the review comments column, the system
displays the current day date in this column. And also the column is Editable.
i. The review date should not less than MOC/OV raised date.
ii. If the user try to save the review comments by changing the review
date less than the MOC/OV raised date, the system display the
following message The Review Date should be greater than the
MOC Raised Date. And the system will not update the data, unless
user enters the correct date.
iii. If the user try to save the review comments by changing the review
date greater than the current day date, the system display the
following message The Review Date should be not be greater than
or less than the Today's Date. And the system will not update the
data, unless user enters the correct date.

Page 224 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


2.

Review Comments (E/O)


a. The user will enter the review comments for the respective MOC/OV.
i. If the user does not have review rights, the system will not allow the
user to edit this column.
ii. If the respective MOC/OV is following the sequence workflow, the
system will allow the user to edit this column.
iii. If the respective MOC/OV is following the priority days workflow,
the system should allow the user to edit this column, only after the
user group qualifies the priority days, from the date of MOC/OV
request is raised.

3.

Work Order Required (E/O)


a. By default the value for this check box is No. If the user wants to request for
the work order generation for the MOC, the user has to check this option.
i. If the Engineer group has the final authority to approve the MOC
status and the group approves the MOC/OV request, by checking
this option, the system will generate a work order request and create a
row in the Interface table by displaying a user message "The Work
Order is requested for the Following Management of Change".

4.

Acceptance (E/O)
a. If the Engineer group has the approval right, the user can take decision (i.e.
Approved/Rejected/Decide later.), for the respective MOC/OV Request.
b. If the Engineer group has the approval right and Final authority to take
decision on MOC/OV Request, then based on the decision ((i.e.
Approved/Rejected/Decide later.), the system will change the MOC status.
i. If the Engineer group has the approval right, and having final
authority to take decision on MOC/OV Request and selected
approved and save the MOC/OV, then the system will change the
MOC status to Approved. And the system will display the MOC due
date (Today + the number of days enter in the MOC/OV due days in
the MOC workflow configuration setup).
ii. If the Engineer group has the approval right, and having final
authority to take decision on MOC/OV Request and selected rejected
and save the MOC/OV, then the system will change the MOC status
to rejected. And the system will not allow the user the edit any of the
columns in the MOC/OV request form, except if the user is admin
or MOC/OV request initiator.
iii. If the Engineer group has the approval right, and having final
authority to take decision on MOC/OV Request and selected decide
later and save the MOC/OV, then the system will not change the
MOC status (i.e., MOC/OV open). And their will not be any value in
the MOC due date or in complete date column.

5.

Update date (D)


a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.

6.

Updated user (D)


a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.

Report

Page 225 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

1. None

12.9 HOW TO REVIEW THE INSPECTION TAB


After the MOC/OV is raised, when the Inspection group user login into the system, If the
Inspection group is having review right the user can edit the Inspection tab page and review.
The user can also take action (i.e., Approve/reject/decide later) on current MOC/OV, If the
user group is having right to Approve. After review, Press save button, to save the review
comments.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

The login user should belong to inspection responsible group, and should have
review rights and also the group should have MOCEDIT to edit this tab.
The login user is ADMIN or the login user is the MOC/OV creator (i.e., Initiator),
can edit this tab.
When the respective MOC/OV is following sequence or priority days workflow, can
edit this tab.
When the admin selected unlock in After MOC/OV priority days Lock the tabs
column present in MOC workflow configuration, can edit this tab.
The login user should have the access to the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request
List menu item.
The system will not allow the user to edit this tab, in the following scenarios.
a. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, if the respective MOC
status is Approve/Rejected/extended and withdrawn.
b. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, if MOC/OV request does
not follow either sequential or MOC/OV priority Days workflow.
c. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, once the MOC priority
Max days is over, and the lock option is selected in the MOC workflow
configuration window.

Steps to the usage of this window


1.

Access the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request List:- The user should click on
the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request List menu. Once the window is open,
selected the respective asset in the asset hierarchy, for which the MOC/OV request is
created and pending for the inspection group review/approval and double click on the
MOC/OV request (i.e., the MOC/OV status will be OPEN) .
a. Edit from the Asset Level MOC/OV Request List.:- Once the Asset
Level & Total MOC/OV Request List menu is clicked, selected the
respective asset in the asset hierarchy, for which the MOC/OV request is
created and pending for the inspection group review/approval and double
click on the MOC/OV request (i.e., the MOC/OV status will be OPEN)
b. Edit from the Total MOC/OV Request List:- Once the Asset Level &
Total MOC/OV Request List menu is clicked, select the total MOC/OV
request list tab and after that select the Open tab. And select the respective
MOC/OV request pending for the inspection group review/approval and
double click on the MOC/OV request (i.e., the MOC/OV status will be
OPEN)

Page 226 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

2.

Access through the MOC button:- If there is any Management of change or


Operating variation request is pending for review/approval by the engineer group, the
system will enable the MOC button present in the screen. Once the user click on the
MOC button, the system will open a window with entire management of change or
operating variation request, which are pending for the review/approval by the
inspection group.
a. If there is no Management of change or operating variation request is
pending for review/approval by the login responsible group, the MOC
button will be in disable mode.

3.

Press Print button:- The system will give print job of the current display page.

4.

Press Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.

The user should have MOC/OV review right, to enter the review comments.
The user should have the MOC/OV approval right, to approve/reject the respective
MOC/OV request.
The user should have MOCDEL responsibility to delete the documents.
The user should have ASTEDT to access the Asset Hierarchy tree, to select the asset
for which the MOC/OV request is created and pending for the review/approve by
the inspection group.
The user should have DOC EDIT responsibility to edit the document.
The user should have MOCEDIT to access the MOC/OV requests.

Navigation
MainMenu
Management of Change
on Inspection tab.

Click on MOC Request menu item

Click

Page 227 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Review Date (D/O)
a. When user enters any comments in the review comments column, the system
displays the current day date in this column. And also the column is Editable.
i. The review date should not less than MOC/OV raised date.
ii. If the user try to save the review comments by changing the review
date less than the MOC/OV raised date, the system display the
following message The Review Date should be greater than the
MOC Raised Date. And the system will not update the data, unless
user enters the correct date.
iii. If the user try to save the review comments by changing the review
date greater than the current day date, the system display the
following message The Review Date should be not be greater than
or less than the Today's Date. And the system will not update the
data, unless user enters the correct date.
2. Review Comments (E/O)
a. The user will enter the review comments for the respective MOC/OV.
i. If the user does not have review rights, the system will not allow the
user to edit this column.
ii. If the respective MOC/OV is following the sequence workflow, the
system will allow the user to edit this column.
iii. If the respective MOC/OV is following the priority days workflow,
the system should allow the user to edit this column, only after the
user group qualifies the priority days, from the date of MOC/OV
request is raised.
3. Work Order Required (E/O)
a. By default the value for this check box is No. If the user wants to request for
the work order generation for the MOC, the user has to check this option.
i. If the Inspection group has the final authority to approve the MOC
status and the group approves the MOC/OV request, by checking
this option, the system will generate a work order request and create a
row in the Interface table by displaying a user message "The Work
Order is requested for the Following Management of Change".
4. Acceptance (E/O)
a. If the Inspection group has the approval right, the user can take decision (i.e.
Approved/Rejected/Decide later.), for the respective MOC/OV Request.
b. If the Inspection group has the approval right and Final authority to take
decision on MOC/OV Request, then based on the decision ((i.e.
Approved/Rejected/Decide later.), the system will change the MOC status.
i. If the Inspection group has the approval right, and having final
authority to take decision on MOC/OV Request and selected
approved and save the MOC/OV, then the system will change the
MOC status to Approved. And the system will display the MOC due
date (Today + the number of days enter in the MOC/OV due days in
the MOC workflow configuration setup).
ii. If the Inspection group has the approval right, and having final
authority to take decision on MOC/OV Request and selected rejected
and save the MOC/OV, then the system will change the MOC status
to rejected. And the system will not allow the user the edit any of the
Page 228 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


columns in the MOC/OV request form, except if the user is admin
or MOC/OV request initiator.
iii. If the Inspection group has the approval right, and having final
authority to take decision on MOC/OV Request and selected decide
later and save the MOC/OV, then the system will not change the
MOC status (i.e., MOC/OV open). And their will not be any value in
the MOC due date or in complete date column.
5. Update date (D)
a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.
6. Updated user (D)
a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.

Report
1. None

12.10 HOW TO REVIEW THE OPERATION TAB


After the MOC/OV is raised, when the operations group user login into the system, If the
operations group is having review right the user can edit the operations tab page and review.
The user can also take action (i.e., Approve/reject/decide later) on current MOC/OV, If
the user group is having right to Approve. After review, Press save button, to save the review
comments.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

The login user should belong to operations responsible group, and should have review
rights and also the group should have MOCEDIT to edit this tab.
The login user is ADMIN or the login user is the MOC/OV creator (i.e., Initiator),
can edit this tab.
When the respective MOC/OV is following sequence or priority days workflow, can
edit this tab.
When the admin selected unlock in After MOC/OV priority days Lock the tabs
column present in MOC workflow configuration, can edit this tab.
The login user should have the access to the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request
List menu item.
The system will not allow the user to edit this tab, in the following scenarios.
a. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, if the respective MOC
status is Approve/Rejected/extended and withdrawn.
b. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, if MOC/OV request does
not follow either sequential or MOC/OV priority Days workflow.
c. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, once the MOC priority
Max days is over, and the lock option is selected in the MOC workflow
configuration window.

Steps to the usage of this window

Page 229 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


1.

Access the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request List:- The user should click on
the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request List menu. Once the window is open,
selected the respective asset in the asset hierarchy, for which the MOC/OV request is
created and pending for the operations group review/approval and double click on the
MOC/OV request (i.e., the MOC/OV status will be OPEN) .
a. Edit from the Asset Level MOC/OV Request List.:- Once the Asset
Level & Total MOC/OV Request List menu is clicked, selected the
respective asset in the asset hierarchy, for which the MOC/OV request is
created and pending for the operations group review/approval and double
click on the MOC/OV request (i.e., the MOC/OV status will be OPEN)
b. Edit from the Total MOC/OV Request List:- Once the Asset Level &
Total MOC/OV Request List menu is clicked, select the total MOC/OV
request list tab and after that select the Open tab. And select the respective
MOC/OV request pending for the operations group review/approval and
double click on the MOC/OV request (i.e., the MOC/OV status will be
OPEN)

2.

Access through the MOC button:- If there is any Management of change or


Operating variation request is pending for review/approval by the engineer group, the
system will enable the MOC button present in the screen. Once the user click on the
MOC button, the system will open a window with entire management of change or
operating variation request, which are pending for the review/approval by the
operations group.
a. If there is no Management of change or operating variation request is
pending for review/approval by the login responsible group, the MOC
button will be in disable mode.

3.

Press Print button:- The system will give print job of the current display page.

4.

Press Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.

The user should have MOC/OV review right, to enter the review comments.
The user should have the MOC/OV approval right, to approve/reject the respective
MOC/OV request.
The user should have MOCDEL responsibility to delete the documents.
The user should have ASTEDT to access the Asset Hierarchy tree, to select the asset
for which the MOC/OV request is created and pending for the review/approve by
the operations group.
The user should have DOC EDIT responsibility to edit the document.
The user should have MOCEDIT to access the MOC/OV requests.

Navigation
MainMenu
Management of Change
on Operation tab.

Click on MOC Request menu item

Click

Page 230 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1.

Review Date (D/O)


a. When user enters any comments in the review comments column, the system
displays the current day date in this column. And also the column is Editable.
i. The review date should not less than MOC/OV raised date.
ii. If the user try to save the review comments by changing the review
date less than the MOC/OV raised date, the system display the
following message The Review Date should be greater than the
MOC Raised Date. And the system will not update the data, unless
user enters the correct date.
iii. If the user try to save the review comments by changing the review
date greater than the current day date, the system display the
following message The Review Date should be not be greater than
or less than the Today's Date. And the system will not update the
data, unless user enters the correct date.

2.

Review Comments (E/O)


a. The user will enter the review comments for the respective MOC/OV.
i. If the user does not have review rights, the system will not allow the
user to edit this column.
ii. If the respective MOC/OV is following the sequence workflow, the
system will allow the user to edit this column
iii. If the respective MOC/OV is following the priority days workflow,
the system should allow the user to edit this column, only after the
user group qualifies the priority days, from the date of MOC/OV
request is raised.

3.

Work Order Required (E/O)


a. By default the value for this check box is No. If the user wants to request for
the work order generation for the MOC, the user has to check this option.
i. If the operations group has the final authority to approve the MOC
status and the group approves the MOC/OV request, by checking
this option, the system will generate a work order request and create a

Page 231 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


row in the Interface table by displaying a user message "The Work
Order is requested for the Following Management of Change".
4. Acceptance (E/O)
a. If the operations group has the approval right, the user can take decision (i.e.
Approved/Rejected/Decide later.), for the respective MOC/OV Request.
b. If the operations group has the approval right and Final authority to take
decision on MOC/OV Request, then based on the decision ((i.e.
Approved/Rejected/Decide later.), the system will change the MOC status.
i. If the operations group has the approval right, and having final
authority to take decision on MOC/OV Request and selected
approved and save the MOC/OV, then the system will change the
MOC status to Approved. And the system will display the MOC due
date (Today + the number of days enter in the MOC/OV due days in
the MOC workflow configuration setup).
ii. If the operations group has the approval right, and having final
authority to take decision on MOC/OV Request and selected rejected
and save the MOC/OV, then the system will change the MOC status
to rejected. And the system will not allow the user the edit any of the
columns in the MOC/OV request form, except if the user is admin
or MOC/OV request initiator.
iii. If the operations group has the approval right, and having final
authority to take decision on MOC/OV Request and selected decide
later and save the MOC/OV, then the system will not change the
MOC status (i.e., MOC/OV open). And their will not be any value in
the MOC due date or in complete date column.
5.

Update date (D)


a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.

6.

Updated user (D)


a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.

Report
1.

None

12.11 HOW TO REVIEW MAINTENANCE TAB


After the MOC/OV is raised, when the Maintenance group user login into the system, If the
Maintenance group is having review right the user can edit the Maintenance tab page and
review. The user can also take action (i.e., Approve/reject/decide later) on current
MOC/OV, If the user group is having right to Approve. After review, Press save button, to
save the review comments.

Pre-requisites
The login user should belong to maintenance responsible group, and should have
review rights and also the group should have MOCEDIT to edit this tab.
2. The login user is ADMIN or the login user is the MOC/OV creator (i.e., Initiator),
can edit this tab.
1.

Page 232 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


When the respective MOC/OV is following sequence or priority days workflow, can
edit this tab.
4. When the admin selected unlock in After MOC/OV priority days Lock the tabs
column present in MOC workflow configuration, can edit this tab.
5. The login user should have the access to the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request
List menu item.
6. The system will not allow the user to edit this tab, in the following scenarios.
a. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, if the respective MOC
status is Approve/Rejected/extended and withdrawn.
b. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, if MOC/OV request does
not follow either sequential or MOC/OV priority Days workflow.
c. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, once the MOC priority
Max days is over, and the lock option is selected in the MOC workflow
configuration window.
3.

Steps to the usage of this window


1.

Access the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request List:- The user should click on
the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request List menu. Once the window is open,
selected the respective asset in the asset hierarchy, for which the MOC/OV request is
created and pending for the maintenance group review/approval and double click on
the MOC/OV request (i.e., the MOC/OV status will be OPEN) .
a. Edit from the Asset Level MOC/OV Request List.:- Once the Asset
Level & Total MOC/OV Request List menu is clicked, selected the
respective asset in the asset hierarchy, for which the MOC/OV request is
created and pending for the maintenance group review/approval and double
click on the MOC/OV request (i.e., the MOC/OV status will be OPEN)
b. Edit from the Total MOC/OV Request List:- Once the Asset Level &
Total MOC/OV Request List menu is clicked, select the total MOC/OV
request list tab and after that select the Open tab. And select the respective
MOC/OV request pending for the maintenance group review/approval and
double click on the MOC/OV request (i.e., the MOC/OV status will be
OPEN)

2.

Access through the MOC button:- If there is any Management of change or


Operating variation request is pending for review/approval by the engineer group, the
system will enable the MOC button present in the screen. Once the user click on the
MOC button, the system will open a window with entire management of change or
operating variation request, which are pending for the review/approval by the
maintenance group.
a. If there is no Management of change or operating variation request is
pending for review/approval by the login responsible group, the MOC
button will be in disable mode.

3.

Press Print button:- The system will give print job of the current display page.

4.

Press Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1.

The user should have MOC/OV review right, to enter the review comments.

Page 233 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


2.
3.
4.

5.
6.

The user should have the MOC/OV approval right, to approve/reject the respective
MOC/OV request.
The user should have MOCDEL responsibility to delete the documents.
The user should have ASTEDT to access the Asset Hierarchy tree, to select the asset
for which the MOC/OV request is created and pending for the review/approve by
the maintenance group.
The user should have DOC EDIT responsibility to edit the document.
The user should have MOCEDIT to access the MOC/OV requests.

Navigation
MainMenu
Management of Change
on Maintenance tab.

Click on MOC Request menu item

Click

Column Description
1.

Review Date (D/O)


a. When user enters any comments in the review comments column, the system
displays the current day date in this column. And also the column is Editable.
i. The review date should not less than MOC/OV raised date.
ii. If the user try to save the review comments by changing the review
date less than the MOC/OV raised date, the system display the
following message The Review Date should be greater than the
MOC Raised Date. And the system will not update the data, unless
user enters the correct date.
iii. If the user try to save the review comments by changing the review
date greater than the current day date, the system display the
following message The Review Date should be not be greater than
or less than the Today's Date. And the system will not update the
data, unless user enters the correct date.

2.

Review Comments (E/O)


a. The user will enter the review comments for the respective MOC/OV.

Page 234 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. If the user does not have review rights, the system will not allow the
user to edit this column.
ii. If the respective MOC/OV is following the sequence workflow, the
system will allow the user to edit this column.
iii. If the respective MOC/OV is following the priority days workflow,
the system should allow the user to edit this column, only after the
user group qualifies the priority days, from the date of MOC/OV
request is raised.
3.

Work Order Required (E/O)


a. By default the value for this check box is No. If the user wants to request for
the work order generation for the MOC, the user has to check this option.
i. If the Maintenance group has the final authority to approve the MOC
status and the group approves the MOC/OV request, by checking
this option, the system will generate a work order request and create a
row in the Interface table by displaying a user message "The Work
Order is requested for the Following Management of Change.

4.

Acceptance (E/O)
a. If the Maintenance group has the approval right, the user can take decision
(i.e. Approved/Rejected/Decide later.), for the respective MOC/OV
Request.
b. If the Maintenance group has the approval right and Final authority to take
decision on MOC/OV Request, then based on the decision ((i.e.
Approved/Rejected/Decide later.), the system will change the MOC status.
i. If the Maintenance group has the approval right, and having final
authority to take decision on MOC/OV Request and selected
approved and save the MOC/OV, then the system will change the
MOC status to Approved. And the system will display the MOC due
date (Today + the number of days enter in the MOC/OV due days in
the MOC workflow configuration setup).
ii. If the Maintenance group has the approval right, and having final
authority to take decision on MOC/OV Request and selected rejected
and save the MOC/OV, then the system will change the MOC status
to rejected. And the system will not allow the user the edit any of the
columns in the MOC/OV request form, except if the user is admin
or MOC/OV request initiator.
iii. If the Maintenance group has the approval right, and having final
authority to take decision on MOC/OV Request and selected decide
later and save the MOC/OV, then the system will not change the
MOC status (i.e., MOC/OV open). And their will not be any value in
the MOC due date or in complete date column.

5.

Update date (D)


a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.

6.

Updated user (D)


a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.

Report

Page 235 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


1. None

12.12 HOW TO REVIEW THE SENIOR MANAGEMENT TAB


After the MOC/OV is raised, when the Senior Management group user login into the
system, If the Senior Management group is having review right the user can edit the Senior
Management tab page and review. The user can also take action (i.e., Approve/reject/decide
later) on current MOC/OV, If the user group is having right to Approve. After review,
Press save button, to save the review comments.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

The login user should belong to Senior Management responsible group, and should
have review rights and also the group should have MOCEDIT to edit this tab.
The login user is ADMIN or the login user is the MOC/OV creator (i.e., Initiator),
can edit this tab.
When the respective MOC/OV is following sequence or priority days workflow, can
edit this tab.
When the admin selected unlock in After MOC/OV priority days Lock the tabs
column present in MOC workflow configuration, can edit this tab.
The login user should have the access to the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request
List menu item.
The system will not allow the user to edit this tab, in the following scenarios.
a. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, if the respective MOC
status is Approve/Rejected/extended and withdrawn.
b. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, if MOC/OV request does
not follow either sequential or MOC/OV priority Days workflow.
c. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, once the MOC priority
Max days is over, and the lock option is selected in the MOC workflow
configuration window.

Steps to the usage of this window


1.

Access the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request List:- The user should click on
the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request List menu. Once the window is open,
selected the respective asset in the asset hierarchy, for which the MOC/OV request is
created and pending for the Senior Management group review/approval and double
click on the MOC/OV request (i.e., the MOC/OV status will be OPEN).
a. Edit from the Asset Level MOC/OV Request List.:- Once the Asset
Level & Total MOC/OV Request List menu is clicked, selected the
respective asset in the asset hierarchy, for which the MOC/OV request is
created and pending for the Senior Management group review/approval and
double click on the MOC/OV request (i.e., the MOC/OV status will be
OPEN)
b. Edit from the Total MOC/OV Request List:- Once the Asset Level &
Total MOC/OV Request List menu is clicked, select the total MOC/OV
request list tab and after that select the Open tab. And select the respective
MOC/OV request pending for the Senior Management group
review/approval and double click on the MOC/OV request (i.e., the
MOC/OV status will be OPEN).

Page 236 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


2.

Access through the MOC button:- If there is any Management of change or


Operating variation request is pending for review/approval by the engineer group, the
system will enable the MOC button present in the screen. Once the user click on the
MOC button, the system will open a window with entire management of change or
operating variation request, which are pending for the review/approval by the Senior
Management group.
a. If there is no Management of change or operating variation request is
pending for review/approval by the login responsible group, the MOC
button will be in disable mode.

3.

Press Print button:- The system will give print job of the current display page.

4.

Press Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.

The user should have MOC/OV review right, to enter the review comments.
The user should have the MOC/OV approval right, to approve/reject the respective
MOC/OV request.
The user should have MOCDEL responsibility to delete the documents.
The user should have ASTEDT to access the Asset Hierarchy tree, to select the asset
for which the MOC/OV request is created and pending for the review/approve by
the Senior Management group.
The user should have DOC EDIT responsibility to edit the document.
The user should have MOCEDIT to access the MOC/OV requests.

Navigation
MainMenu
Management of Change
on Senior Management tab.

Click on MOC Request menu item

Click

Column Description
1.

Review Date (D/O)


Page 237 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


a. When user enters any comments in the review comments column, the system
displays the current day date in this column. And also the column is Editable.
i. The review date should not less than MOC/OV raised date.
ii. If the user try to save the review comments by changing the review
date less than the MOC/OV raised date, the system display the
following message The Review Date should be greater than the
MOC Raised Date. And the system will not update the data, unless
user enters the correct date.
iii. If the user try to save the review comments by changing the review
date greater than the current day date, the system display the
following message The Review Date should be not be greater than
or less than the Today's Date. And the system will not update the
data, unless user enters the correct date.
2.

Review Comments (E/O)


a. The user will enter the review comments for the respective MOC/OV.
i. If the user does not have review rights, the system will not allow the
user to edit this column.
ii. If the respective MOC/OV is following the sequence workflow, the
system will allow the user to edit this column.
iii. If the respective MOC/OV is following the priority days workflow,
the system should allow the user to edit this column, only after the
user group qualifies the priority days, from the date of MOC/OV
request is raised.

3.

Work Order Required (E/O)


a. By default the value for this check box is No. If the user wants to request for
the work order generation for the MOC, the user has to check this option.
i. If the Senior Management group has the final authority to approve
the MOC status and the group approves the MOC/OV request, by
checking this option, the system will generate a work order request
and create a row in the Interface table by displaying a user message
"The Work Order is requested for the Following Management of
Change".

4.

Acceptance (E/O)
a. If the Senior Management group has the approval right, the user can take
decision (i.e. Approved/Rejected/Decide later.), for the respective
MOC/OV Request.
b. If the Senior Management group has the approval right and Final authority to
take decision on MOC/OV Request, then based on the decision ((i.e.
Approved/Rejected/Decide later.), the system will change the MOC status.
i. If the Senior Management group has the approval right, and having
final authority to take decision on MOC/OV Request and selected
approved and save the MOC/OV, then the system will change the
MOC status to Approved. And the system will display the MOC due
date (Today + the number of days enter in the MOC/OV due days in
the MOC workflow configuration setup).
ii. If the Senior Management group has the approval right, and having
final authority to take decision on MOC/OV Request and selected
rejected and save the MOC/OV, then the system will change the
MOC status to rejected. And the system will not allow the user the

Page 238 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


edit any of the columns in the MOC/OV request form, except if the
user is admin or MOC/OV request initiator.
iii. If the Senior Management group has the approval right, and having
final authority to take decision on MOC/OV Request and selected
decide later and save the MOC/OV, then the system will not change
the MOC status (i.e., MOC/OV open). And their will not be any
value in the MOC due date or in complete date column.
5.

Update date (D)


a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.

6.

Updated user (D)


a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.

Report
1. None

12.13 HOW TO REVIEW THE HSE TAB


After the MOC/OV is raised, when the HSE group user login into the system, If the HSE
group is having review right the user can edit the HSE tab page and review. The user can
also take action (i.e., Approve/reject/decide later) on current MOC/OV, If the user group
is having right to Approve. After review, Press save button, to save the review comments.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

The login user should belong to HSE responsible group, and should have review rights
and also the group should have MOCEDIT to edit this tab.
The login user is ADMIN or the login user is the MOC/OV creator (i.e., Initiator),
can edit this tab.
When the respective MOC/OV is following sequence or priority days workflow, can
edit this tab.
When the admin selected unlock in After MOC/OV priority days Lock the tabs
column present in MOC workflow configuration, can edit this tab.
The login user should have the access to the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request
List menu item.
The system will not allow the user to edit this tab, in the following scenarios.
a. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, if the respective MOC
status is Approve/Rejected/extended and withdrawn.
b. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, if MOC/OV request does
not follow either sequential or MOC/OV priority Days workflow.
c. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, once the MOC priority
Max days is over, and the lock option is selected in the MOC workflow
configuration window

Steps to the usage of this window


1.

Access the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request List.- The user should click on
the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request List menu. Once the window is open,
Page 239 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


selected the respective asset in the asset hierarchy, for which the MOC/OV request is
created and pending for the HSE group review/approval and double click on the
MOC/OV request (i.e., the MOC/OV status will be OPEN).
a. Edit from the Asset Level MOC/OV Request List.:- Once the Asset
Level & Total MOC/OV Request List menu is clicked, selected the
respective asset in the asset hierarchy, for which the MOC/OV request is
created and pending for the HSE group review/approval and double click
on the MOC/OV request (i.e., the MOC/OV status will be OPEN)
b. Edit from the Total MOC/OV Request List:- Once the Asset Level &
Total MOC/OV Request List menu is clicked, select the total MOC/OV
request list tab and after that select the Open tab. And select the respective
MOC/OV request pending for the HSE group review/approval and double
click on the MOC/OV request (i.e., the MOC/OV status will be OPEN)
2.

Access through the MOC button:- If there is any Management of change or


Operating variation request is pending for review/approval by the engineer group, the
system will enable the MOC button present in the screen. Once the user click on the
MOC button, the system will open a window with entire management of change or
operating variation request, which are pending for the review/approval by the HSE
group.
a. If there is no Management of change or operating variation request is
pending for review/approval by the login responsible group, the MOC
button will be in disable mode.

3.

Press Print button:- The system will give print job of the current display page.

4.

Press Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.

The user should have MOC/OV review right, to enter the review comments.
The user should have the MOC/OV approval right, to approve/reject the respective
MOC/OV request.
The user should have MOCDEL responsibility to delete the documents.
The user should have ASTEDT to access the Asset Hierarchy tree, to select the asset
for which the MOC/OV request is created and pending for the review/approve by
the HSE group.
The user should have DOC EDIT responsibility to edit the document.
The user should have MOCEDIT to access the MOC/OV requests.

Navigation
MainMenu
on HSE tab.

Management of Change

Click on MOC Request menu item

Click

Page 240 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1.

Review Date (D/O)


a. When user enters any comments in the review comments column, the system
displays the current day date in this column. And also the column is Editable.
i. The review date should not less than MOC/OV raised date.
ii. If the user try to save the review comments by changing the review
date less than the MOC/OV raised date, the system display the
following message The Review Date should be greater than the
MOC Raised Date. And the system will not update the data, unless
user enters the correct date.
iii. If the user try to save the review comments by changing the review
date greater than the current day date, the system display the
following message The Review Date should be not be greater than
or less than the Today's Date. And the system will not update the
data, unless user enters the correct date.

2.

Review Comments (E/O)


a. The user will enter the review comments for the respective MOC/OV.
i. If the user does not have review rights, the system will not allow the
user to edit this column.
ii. If the respective MOC/OV is following the sequence workflow, the
system will allow the user to edit this column.
iii. If the respective MOC/OV is following the priority days workflow,
the system should allow the user to edit this column, only after the
user group qualifies the priority days, from the date of MOC/OV
request is raised.

3.

Work Order Required (E/O)


a. By default the value for this check box is No. If the user wants to request for
the work order generation for the MOC, the user has to check this option.
i. If the HSE group has the final authority to approve the MOC status
and the group approves the MOC/OV request, by checking this
option, the system will generate a work order request and create a row
Page 241 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


in the Interface table by displaying a user message "The Work Order
is requested for the Following Management of Change".
4.

Acceptance (E/O)
a. If the HSE group has the approval right, the user can take decision (i.e.
Approved/Rejected/Decide later.), for the respective MOC/OV Request.
b. If the HSE group has the approval right and Final authority to take decision
on MOC/OV Request, then based on the decision ((i.e.
Approved/Rejected/Decide later.), the system will change the MOC status.
i. If the HSE group has the approval right, and having final authority to
take decision on MOC/OV Request and selected approved and save
the MOC/OV, then the system will change the MOC status to
Approved. And the system will display the MOC due date (Today +
the number of days enter in the MOC/OV due days in the MOC
workflow configuration setup).
ii. If the HSE group has the approval right, and having final authority to
take decision on MOC/OV Request and selected rejected and save
the MOC/OV, then the system will change the MOC status to
rejected. And the system will not allow the user the edit any of the
columns in the MOC/OV request form, except if the user is admin
or MOC/OV request initiator.
iii. If the HSE group has the approval right, and having final authority to
take decision on MOC/OV Request and selected decide later and
save the MOC/OV, then the system will not change the MOC status
(i.e., MOC/OV open). And their will not be any value in the MOC
due date or in complete date column.

consequences button (Button)


a. The user can select the COF values, by pressing the consequences button.
i. The system will allow the HSE user the press consequences button.
ii. The system will prompt a message You have done some changes, do
you wish to save changes first? to the HSE user, if the user enter
any review comments and without saving them, if user press the
consequences button.
iii. When user presses No button in the message box, system will open
the COF values window.
6. Update date (D)
a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.
5.

7.

Updated user (D)


a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.

Report
1. None
12.13.1 HOW TO SET THE COF VALUE IN HSE TAB
This is window is the part of the HSE tab. The system allows only HSE group user and
ADMIN to edit the consequences button present in the HSE tab. The user has to select the

Page 242 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


value (i.e., Negligible, High, Low, Medium, High and Severe) for people factor, Asset factor,
Environment Factor and Reputation Factor. Once the user selects all the values, based on
that the system will display the highest risk factor in Overall Consequence column. After that
user will presses Ok button. Then the Overall Consequence will display in the consequences
column present in the HSE tab. If user presses the No button, there will be no change in the
Consequence column present in the HSE Tab.

Pre-requisites
The login user should belong to HSE responsible group.
The login user is ADMIN or the login user is the MOC/OV creator (i.e., Initiator),
can click this button.
3. The system will not allow the user to click this button, in the following scenarios.
a. The system will not allow the user to click this button, if the respective MOC
status is Rejected withdrawn.
b. The system will not allow the user to click this button, if MOC/OV request
does not follow either sequential or MOC/OV priority Days workflow.
c. The system will not allow the user to click this button, once the MOC
priority Max days is over, and the lock option is selected in the MOC
workflow configuration window.
1.
2.

Steps to the usage of this window


1.

Access the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request List:- The user should click on
the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request List menu. Once the window is open,
selected the respective asset in the asset hierarchy, for which the MOC/OV request is
created and pending for the HSE group review/approval and double click on the
MOC/OV request (i.e., the MOC/OV status will be OPEN).
a. Edit from the Asset Level MOC/OV Request List.:- Once the Asset
Level & Total MOC/OV Request List menu is clicked, selected the
respective asset in the asset hierarchy, for which the MOC/OV request is
created and pending for the HSE group review/approval and double click
on the MOC/OV request (i.e., the MOC/OV status will be OPEN), then
go to HSE tab page.
b. Edit from the Total MOC/OV Request List:- Once the Asset Level &
Total MOC/OV Request List menu is clicked, select the total MOC/OV
request list tab and after that select the Open tab. And select the respective
MOC/OV request pending for the HSE group review/approval and double
click on the MOC/OV request (i.e., the MOC/OV status will be OPEN),
then go to HSE tab page.

2.

Access through the MOC button:- If there is any Management of change or


Operating variation request is pending for review/approval by the HSE group, the
system will enable the MOC button present in the screen. Once the user click on the
MOC button, the system will open a window with entire management of change or
operating variation request, which are pending for the review/approval by the HSE
group.
a. If there is no Management of change or operating variation request is
pending for review/approval by the login responsible group, the MOC
button will be in disable mode.

Page 243 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


3.

Press Ok button:- The system will update the changes made in COF value window to
HSE tab page.

4.

Press close button:- The system will close the COF Value window.

Responsibilities
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.

The user should have MOC/OV review right, to enter the review comments.
The user should have the MOC/OV approval right, to approve/reject the respective
MOC/OV request.
The user should have MOCDEL responsibility to delete the documents.
The user should have ASTEDT to access the Asset Hierarchy tree, to select the asset
for which the MOC/OV request is created and pending for the review/approve by
the HSE group.
The user should have DOC EDIT responsibility to edit the document.
The user should have MOCEDIT to access the MOC/OV requests.

Navigation
MainMenu
HSE tab

Management of Change
Click on MOC Request menu item
Press the Consequences tab.

Click on

Column Description
1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

People factor (O/E)


a. The user selects the value (i.e.,
Severe) from the dropdown.
Asset Factor (O/E)
a. The user selects the value (i.e.,
Severe) from the dropdown
Environment Factor (O/E)
a. The user selects the value (i.e.,
Severe) from the dropdown.
Reputation Factor (O/E)
a. The user selects the value (i.e.,
Severe) from the dropdown.
Overall Consequence (D)

Negligible, High, Low, Medium, High and


Negligible, High, Low, Medium, High and
Negligible, High, Low, Medium, High and
Negligible, High, Low, Medium, High and

Page 244 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


a. Based on the user selection, the system will display the highest COF values in
this column.
6. Update date (D)
a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.
7. Updated user (D)
a. The system should display the updated user, with the Admin user id, when
ever user modifies the data in this window.

Report
1. None

12.14 HOW TO REVIEW THE WITHDRAWN TAB


After the MOC/OV is raised, any user having the withdrawn right can request for
withdrawn. The user is to enter the comments and withdrawn by and press the save button.

Pre-requisites
The login user should have withdrawn request rights.
The MOC/OV status should be open.
If the login user is ADMIN or the login user is the MOC/OV creator (i.e., Initiator),
can edit this tab.
4. When the respective MOC/OV is following sequence or priority days workflow, the
login user having withdrawn rights can edit this tab.
5. The login user should have the access to the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request
List menu item.
6. The system will not allow the user to edit this tab, in the following scenarios.
a. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, if the respective MOC
status is Approve/Rejected/extended and withdrawn.
b. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, if MOC/OV request does
not follow either sequential or MOC/OV priority Days workflow.
c. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, once the MOC priority
Max days is over, and the lock option is selected in the MOC workflow
configuration window.
1.
2.
3.

Steps to the usage of this window


1.

Access the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request List:- The user should click on
the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request List menu. Once the window is open,
selected the respective asset in the asset hierarchy, for which the MOC/OV request is
created, double click on the MOC/OV request and click on withdrawn tab.
a. Edit from the Asset Level MOC/OV Request List:- Once the Asset Level
& Total MOC/OV Request List menu is clicked, selected the respective asset
in the asset hierarchy, for which the MOC/OV request is created and double
click on the MOC/OV request and click on withdrawn tab.
b. Edit from the Total MOC/OV Request List:- Once the Asset Level &
Total MOC/OV Request List menu is clicked, select the total MOC/OV
request list tab and after that select the Open tab. And select the respective

Page 245 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


MOC/OV request and double click on the MOCOV, then click on
withdrawn tab.
2.

Press Print button:- None.

3.

Press Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
The user should have MOC/OV final authority, to approve/reject/decide later the
withdrawn request
2. The user should have the MOC/OV withdrawn right, to make request for withdrawn.
3. The user should have ASTEDT to access the Asset Hierarchy tree, to select the asset
for which the MOC/OV request is created.
4. The user should have MOCEDIT to access the MOC/OV Request.

1.

Navigation
MainMenu
Management of Change
on withdrawn tab.

Click on MOC Request menu item

Click

Column Description
Requested by (O/E)
a. The user will enter the name of the user, who is requesting for the
withdrawn.
2. Withdrawn Comments (O/E)
a. The user enter the reason for the withdrawn request
3. Acceptance (O/E)
a. The system allows only the final authority user to take action on the
withdrawn request made by some other responsible user group or same
responsible user group.

1.

Page 246 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. If the final authority responsible group reject / decide later on
withdrawn request, the MOC/OV status will not change to
withdrawn. And the MOC/OV status is OPEN only.
4. Withdrawn Date (D)
a. The system will display the date, when the withdrawn request is approved by
the Final authority responsible group.
i. The withdrawn date should be always greater than the MOC Raised
date, if the user try to save the record, by entering the lesser date, than
the MOC/OV raised date. The system displays the following message
The withdrawn Date should be Greater than the MOC Raised
Date.
5. Update date (D)
a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies the data
in this window.
6. Updated user (D)
a. The system should display the updated user when ever user modifies the data
in this window.

Report
1. None

12.15 HOW TO REVIEW THE EXTENSION TAB


After the MOC/OV is approved and the moc due date should less than current day date, any
user having the Extension right can request for Extension. The system will not allow the user
to request for extension, if the MOC is completed/Rejected/withdrawn. The system display
the requested date automatically, when any user requested for the extension. The Final
authority responsible group is having right to Approve/Reject/decide later on the requested
moc/ov request.

Pre-requisites
The login user should have extension request right.
The MOC/OV status should be Approved.
The current day date should be greater than MOC/OV due date, to edit this tab.
If the login user is ADMIN or the login user is the MOC/OV creator (i.e., Initiator),
can edit this tab.
5. When the respective MOC/OV is following sequence or priority days workflow, the
login user having extension rights can edit this tab.
6. The login user should have the access to the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request
List menu item.
7. The system will not allow the user to edit this tab, in the following scenarios.
a. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, if the respective MOC
status is rejected withdrawn/open.
b. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, if MOC/OV request does
not follow either sequential or MOC/OV priority Days workflow.
c. The system will not allow the user to edit the tab, once the MOC priority
Max days is over, and the lock option is selected in the MOC workflow
configuration window.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Page 247 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


d. Unless the MOC/OV requested is created, the system will not allow the user
to edit this tab.
e. If the MOC/OV request is not approved, or the system current day date is not
grater than MOC/OV due date, the system will not allow the user to edit this tab page.

Steps to the usage of this window


1.

Access the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request List:- The user should click on
the Asset Level & Total MOC/OV Request List menu. Once the window is open,
selected the respective asset in the asset hierarchy, for which the MOC/OV request is
created, double click on the MOC/OV request and click on extension tab.
a. Edit from the Asset Level MOC/OV Request List:- Once the Asset Level
& Total MOC/OV Request List menu is clicked, selected the respective asset
in the asset hierarchy, for which the MOC/OV request is created and double
click on the MOC/OV request and click on extension tab.
b. Edit from the Total MOC/OV Request List:- Once the Asset Level &
Total MOC/OV Request List menu is clicked, select the total MOC/OV
request list tab and after that select the Open tab. And select the respective
MOC/OV request and double click on the MOCOV, then click on extension
tab.

2.

Press Print button:- None.

3.

Press Exit button:- The system will Exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
The user should have MOC/OV final authority, , to approve/reject/decide later the
extension request
2. The user should have the MOC/OV extension right, to make request for withdrawn.
3. The user should have ASTEDT to access the Asset Hierarchy tree, to select the asset
for which the MOC/OV request is created.
4. The user should have MOCEDIT to access the MOC/OV Request.

1.

Navigation
MainMenu
Management of Change
on extension tab

Click on MOC Request menu item

Click

Page 248 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1.
2.
3.

4.

5.

Requested by (O/E)
a. The user will enter the name, who is requesting for the Extension
Extension Comments (O/E)
a. The user enters the reason for the extension request.
Requested Date (D)
a. The system display the Requested date, when the user request for the
extension.
Acceptance (O/E)
a. The final authority user group will edit this column, to take decision on
Extension request.
i. If the final authority responsible group reject / decide later on
extension request, the MOC/OV status will not change to Extended.
And the status is approved only.
Validity start date (E)
a. The system will display the validity start date the date of Extension approved.
i. The system automatically displays the Validity start date (i.e. The date
of Extension approved), and validity End date (from the day of
extension approved plus the number of days specified in MOC/OV
extension valid days column present in moc/ov workflow
configuration window), when the MOC/OV extension request is
approved by the final authority user group.
ii. If the user tries to save the record, by entering the Extension start
date, less than the MOC/OV raised date, the system will display the
following message The Extension Start Date should be Greater than
the MOC Raised Date.
iii. If the user try to save the record, by entering the lesser date in
extension end date than extension start date, the system display the
following message The Extension End Date should be greater than
the Extension Start Date.
iv. If the user try to save the record, by entering the extension start date
lesser than the MOC/OV due date, the system display the following

Page 249 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


message The Extension Start Date should be greater than the MOC
Due date.
6. Validity end date (E)
a. The system will display the validity end date (the date in this column will be
from the day of extension approved plus the number of days specified in
MOC/OV extension valid days column present in moc/ov workflow
configuration window).
i. If the user try to save the record, by entering the lesser date in
extension end date than extension start date, the system display the
following message The Extension End Date should be greater than
the Extension Start Date.
7. Updated date (D)
a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies the data
in this window.
8. Updated user (D)
a. The system should display the updated user when ever user modifies the data
in this window.

Report
1. None

12.16 HOW TO PRINT THE MOC/OV REPORTS


The Management of change module, is facilitated the user to view/print the different types
of reports.

Pre-requisites
1. The login user should have access to the MOC/OV Request reports menu.
2. The user should have access to the respective report. i.e., the report should be active
in the user access list, in Assign Module/Menu to users window present in
Administration Module.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Press Print button:- the system will print the displayed page.
2. Press Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1.

None.

Navigation
MainMenu
Management of Change
desired report

Click on MOC/OV Reports

Select the

Page 250 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. None.

13 ENGINEERING REFERENCE MODULE


INTORDUCTION
The Module is basically serves as one point entry of all the Engineering References related
data into the system. The Data registered here is then used throughout the application
wherever there is a need.
The Different windows in this Module are
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

Engineering Reference Values


Define Material Specifications
Define Piping Classes
Define Schedule Nominal WT
UOM Conversion table
Failure mechanism
Failure Mode & Mechanism
FM Inspection Effectiveness
FM POF Options
Process Stream lookup
Feature Piping mechanical design
Equipment factor

Discussed below is the step by step overview of the usage and functionality of each of the
above windows

13.1 ENGINEERING REFERENCE VALUES


This window helps basically to define the reference values and description for the different
reference types entered in the system, i.e., the records entered in the Reference Master

Page 251 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


window in the Administrative Module with the ref group defined as ENGREF. This
window has two sections
1. Listing of the Reference Names registered in the system
2. Details of the Reference values corresponding to the reference Name in the listing
section. The reference values correspond to the reference name of the highlighted
record in the list.
The window is having two parts one is List of Reference Section and other one is
Reference Values Section
List of Reference Section:- This section displays Reference values defined in the Reference
master window in the Administration Module with the reference group as ENGREF. This
section is non editable.
Reference Values Section:- Editable section to define different reference codes and
description for the reference selected in the listing section above.

Pre-requisites
1. None

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- Will add a new record in the Reference Values section. User need
to enter the data into
the required field and press Save to finally save into
the system.
2. Delete button:- Deleting the record selected in the Reference Values section .
And it will do so once user says OK to the gentle message appearing Selected
Record will be deleted , do you wish
to continue .
3. Save button:- This menu option can be used to alter the Reference values defined
in the Reference values section.
4. Refresh button:- Will refresh or retrieve all the data once again from the system
once pressed.
5. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ENGEDT Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ENGDEL responsibility can delete the record in this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Item

Engineering Reference

Click on Engineering Reference Values menu

Page 252 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. List of Reference Section
a. Reference Name (D)
i. Name of the Reference parameter as defined in the Reference Master.
b. Description (D)
i. Description of the reference, again as defined in the Reference Master
in Administration Module.
c. Updated Date (D)
i. GALIOM system date as on which Reference Name was entered.
d. Updated User (D)
i. GALIOM user Id for the information as to who entered the
Reference Name
2. Reference Values Section
a. Seq (D)
i. Name of the Reference parameter as defined in the Reference Master.
b. Code (M)
i. Description of the reference, again as defined in the Reference Master
in Administration Module.
c. Reference name (O)
i. The long name of the code defined for the reference value in the
listing section.

Page 253 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

d. Description (O)
i. Definition in details for the Reference Name defined.
e. Active (O)
i. Check box to indicate if the current reference code entered is in
Active status.
f. Updated Date (D)
i. GALIOM system date as on which Reference Code was entered.
g. Updated User (D)
i. GALIOM user Id for the information as to who entered the
Reference Code.

Report
None.

13.2 DEFINE MATERIAL SPECIFICATION


This window is basically to define the Design specific data for the mechanical device
registered into the system. All the materials registered into the system and new materials can
be added through this window. This window is having three sections 1. List of Material specs
2. Material Spec. Details 3. Details
List of material specs:- Displays the list of the Materials registered into the system.
Material Spec. Details:- This section is editable for defining specification for the Material.
Details:- In the details section there are 3 tabs. 1. Stress Values 2. Joint Efficiency 3. YS
Yield.
Stress Vales:- Section to enter design specific data
Joint Effeciency:- sai
Ys-Yield:- sai

Pre-requisites
1. None

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- Will add a new record in the Material Spec Detail section and hence
allowing the user to specify all the parameters concerning this material . Once
saved this material appears in the List of Material Spec listing on the left of the
window as encircled in the figure below.
2. Delete button:- Deleting after selecting the material form the list will delete the
record from the system .
And it will do so once user says OK to the gentle
message appearing Selected Record will be deleted , do you wish to continue .
3. Save button:- This menu option can be used to alter the material specifications for
the particular Material selected.
4. Refresh button:- Will refresh or retrieve all the data once again from the system
once pressed. This option
becomes very evident when user modifies the material
specs of the material and wants to
review the change done.
Page 254 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


5. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ENGDEL responsibility can delete the record in this window.
2. Any user having ENGEDT Responsibility can edit this window

Navigation
Main Menu
Item

Engineering Reference

Click on Define Material Specification menu

Column Description
1. List of Material Spec
a. Material Spec (D)
i. Name of the Material as defined in the Reference Master.
b. Design Code (D)
i. Display the design code.
2. Material Specification Detail
a. . Material Spec (D)
i. Name of the Material as defined in the Reference Master.
b. Description (O)
i. Text in detail about the Material.
c. Design Code (D)
Page 255 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. Displays a dropdown of the reference values as defined in the Define
reference values in Administration Module for Reference type
DESCOD.
d. Material Category (M)
i. Displays a dropdown of the reference values as defined in the Define
reference values in Administration Module for Reference type
MATCAT.
e. Material Type (M)
i. Displays a dropdown of the reference values as defined in the Define
reference values in Administration
Module for Reference type
MATTYP.
f. Composition (O)
i. Text field to enter Design specifications.
g. Long Description (O)
i. Text field to enter Design specification data.
h. SMUTS (O)
i. Design specification data.
i.

UOM (O)
i. Displays a dropdown of the reference values as defined in the Define
reference values in Administration
Module for Reference type
UOM.

j.

Specific Min. Yield (O)


i. Design specification data.

k. Temperature UOM (O)


i. Displays a dropdown of the reference values as defined in the Define
reference values in Administration
Module for Reference type
UOM.
l.

Stress (O)
i. Design specification data.

m. Active (O)
i. Check box to state the active status of the material.
n. Updated Date (D)
i. GALIOM system date as on which the Material Specs were saved.
Data appears automatically when user presses the Save menu option.
o. Updated User (D)
i. GALIOM user Id for the information as to who entered the data for
Material Specs. The data here gets
loaded automatically once user
uses the Save menu option.
3. Details
a. Stress values
Page 256 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. Design Values (D)
1. Name of the Material as defined in the Reference Master.
ii. Stress Value (D)
1. Display the design code
iii. Temp. Coeff (D)
1. Display the design code
iv. Active (D)
1. check box to state the active status of the material
v. Updated Date (D)
1. GALIOM system date as on which the Material Specs were
saved. Data appears automatically when user presses
the
Save menu option.
vi. Updated user (D)
1. GALIOM user Id for the information as to who entered the
data for Material Specs. The data here gets
loaded
automatically once user uses the Save menu option
b. Joint Efficiency
i. Type of Joint (D)
1. Design specification data
ii. Insp. % (D)
1. Design specification data
iii. Joint Efficiency (D)
1. Design specification data
iv. Active (D)
1. Check box to state the active status of the material
v. Updated Date
1. GALIOM system date as on which the Material Specs were
saved. Data appears automatically when user presses
the
Save menu option
vi. Updated User
1. GALIOM user Id for the information as to who entered the
data for Material Specs. The data here gets
loaded
automatically once user uses the Save menu option.
c. Ys- Yield
i. Type of Joint (D)
1. Design specification data
ii. Insp. % (D)
1. Design specification data.
iii. Active (D)
1. Check box to state the active status of the material
iv. Update Date (D)
1. GALIOM system date as on which the Material Specs were
saved. Data appears automatically when user presses
the
Save menu option.
v. Update User (D)
1. GALIOM user Id for the information as to who entered the
data for Material Specs. The data here gets
loaded
automatically once user uses the Save menu option.

Report
None

Page 257 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

13.3 DEFINE PIPING CLASEES


The window is used to define material specifications and other details related to the piping
class. This window is having three sections as 1. Listing of piping class 2. Piping Class Detail
3. Nominal OD and schedule.
Listing of piping class:- Displays the list of the Piping Class registered into the system.
Piping class detail:- This section is editable for defining details of the Piping Class.
Nominal OD and schedule :- Design specification data

Pre-requisites
1. None.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- Will add a new record in the Piping Class Spec Detail section and
hence allowing the user
o specify all the parameters concerning this material .
Once saved this material appears in the List of Material Spec listing on the left of
the window as encircled in the figure below.
2. Delete button:- Deleting after selecting the Piping Class from the list will delete the
record from the system
. And it will do so once user says OK to the gentle
message appearing Selected Record will be deleted, do you wish to continue .
3. Save button:- This menu option can be used to alter the Piping Class specifications
for the particular
Piping Class selected.
4. Refresh button:- Will refresh or retrieve all the data once again from the system
once pressed. This option
becomes very evident when user modifies the material
specs of the material and wants to
review the change done.
5. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ENGDEL responsibility can delete the record in this window.
2. Any user having ENGEDT Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Engineering Reference

Click on Define piping class menu Item

Page 258 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. List of piping class
a. Piping Class (D)
i. Name of the Piping Class.
b. Description (D)
i. Display short detail of the class
2. Piping class Detail
a. Piping Class (D)
i. Name of the Piping Class
b. Description (O)
i. Text in detail about the Piping Class
c. Design Code(D)
i. Displays a dropdown of the reference values as defined in the Define
reference values in Administration Module for Reference type
DESCOD.
d. Material Type (M)
i. Displays a dropdown of the reference values as defined in the Define
reference values in Administration
Module for Reference type
MATTYP.
e. Design Temp Min (O) ( KPa-unit of measurement)
i. Design specification data
f. Design Temp Max (O) ( KPa-unit of measurement)
i. Design specification data
g. Corrosion Allowance (O) (mm-unit of measurement)
i. Design specification data
h. Long Description (O)
i. Displays a dropdown of the reference values as defined in the Define
reference values in Administration
Module for Reference type
UOM.
i. Active (O)
i. Check box to state the active status of the Piping Class.
j. Updated Date (D)
i. GALIOM system date as on which the Piping Class was saved. Data
appears automatically when user
presses the Save menu option.
k. Updated user (D)
i. GALIOM user Id for the information as to who entered the data for
Piping Class. The data here gets
loaded automatically once user
uses the Save menu option.
3. Nominal OD and Schedule
a. NOM OD (M)
i. Design specific data
b. Schedule (O)
i. Text in detail about the Piping Class.
c. Joint Efficiency (O)
i. Design specific data.
d. Active(O)
i. Check box to state the active status of the Piping Class.
e. Updated Date (D)

Page 259 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. GALIOM system date as on which the Piping Class was saved. Data
appears automatically when user
presses the Save menu option.
f. Updated User (D)
i. GALIOM user Id for the information as to who entered the data for
Piping Class. The data here gets
loaded automatically once user
uses the Save menu option.

Report
None

13.4 DEFINE SCHEDULE NOMINAL WT


The window is to give the Nominal Wall thickness for Materials based on the NOM Pipe
size (measured in inches) and Schedule. This is a one time entry window into the application.
Hence whenever the Mechanical data for the Asset is being set in the Asset Management
Window, this data is referred by the system to get the Nominal Wall thickness automatically
once NOM pipe size and Schedule has been selected. This window is having two sections 1.
Listing of material selection 2. Schedule Nominal WT.

Pre-requisites
1. None.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- Will add a new record in the Schedule Nominal WT section. User
needs to define the
Nominal WT for the Nom pipe size and the schedule and also
mention the active status for the record such that if active will automatically
populate the nominal WT column in the
Mechanical Design data for the Asset
one the Material Category, Nom pipe size and
schedule is defined.
2. Delete button:- Will delete the selected record for the Schedule Nominal WT record
defined after user
says ok to the message Selected Record will be deleted, do
you wish to continue..
3. Save button:- User is able to modify the NOM WT for the different Records in the
Schedule Nominal WT
section and also alter the Active status as per the
requirement . Also if the user is inserting
the data, data entered needs to be
saved by using this option.
a. The window again has two sections
b. Listing of the Materials registered into the system
c. Schedule Nominal WT for the material selected from the listing.
4. Refresh button:- Refreshes the data getting displayed.
5. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ENGEDT Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ENGDEL responsibility can delete the record in this window.

Navigation
Page 260 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Main Menu
Item

Engineering Reference

Click on Define schedule Nominal WT menu

Column Description
1. List of Material Spec
a. Code (D)
i. Displays the code for the material (As the Material category).
b. The Name (D)
i. Display the name given to the Material in the system.
c. Description (D)
i. Details about the material in short
2. Schedule Nominal WT
a. Nominal Pipe Size (M)
i. Pipe specific measurement data in inches
b. Schedule (M)
i. Pipe specific measurement data.
c. NOM WT (O) (mm)
i. Numeric data for the Nominal wall thickness based on the Nominal
pipe size and the schedule entered for the Material category.
d. Active (M)
i. Option for the user to specify if the record is applicable to get the
Nominal Wall thickness of the Asset in the Mechanical
Design
data in Asset Management Window or similar window.
e. Update Date (D)
i. GALIOM system date as on which the Schedule Nominal WT was
saved. Data appears automatically when
user presses the Save
menu option.
f. Update User (D)
i. GALIOM user Id for the information as to who entered the data for
Schedule Nominal WT. The data here gets
loaded automatically
once user uses the Save menu option.
Page 261 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Report
None

13.5 UOM CONVERSION TABLE


This window is again is one time entry into the system for defining the measurements related
conversion factors into the system, such that they can be used throughout the application
wherever applicable.

Pre-requisites
1. None

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- Will add a new record in the window. User needs to enter data for
the mandatory columns
to save the data.
2. Delete button:- Deletes the selected record once the user says ok to the message
Selected Record will be deleted, do
you wish to continue..
3. Save button:- Update or insert record into the system once the user uses this option.
4. Refresh button:- Retrieves the data from the system database once again.
5. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ENGDEL responsibility can delete the record in this window.
2. Any user having ENGEDT Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Engineering Reference

Click on UOM Conversion Table menu Item

Column Description
1. UOM From (M)
a. Unit of Measurement from which the conversion is to be done.
Page 262 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

2. UOM to (M)
a. Unit of Measurements to which the conversion is to be done.
3. Operator (M)
a. Arithmetic operator to be applied for the conversion.
4. Factor (M)
a. Conversion related specific data.
5. Active (M)
a. Option for the user to state if the conversion is applicable and can be used in
the system. If no, the conversion will not actually work in the system.
6. Updated Date (D)
a. GALIOM system date as on which the UOM conversion factors were saved.
Data appears automatically when
user presses the Save menu option.
7. Updated User (D)
a. GALIOM user Id for the information as to who entered the data for UOM
conversion factors. The data here
gets loaded automatically once user
uses the Save menu option.

Report
None

13.6 FAILURE MECHANISM


The window is to define and detail all the different failure mechanisms which may cause
failure to the Assets registered in the system. Window also stores all the specific information
regarding the occurrence of the failure, its characteristics and other specific details. This
window is having 3 sections 1. Listing of the Failure Mechanisms. 2. Failure Mechanism
Details 3. Other Information
1.Listing of the Failure Mechanisms:- This section is a non editable section to display all
the Failure Mechanisms that are already registered into the system.
2. Failure Mechanism Details:- This section is a editable section to modify or register new
failure mechanisms into the system.
3.Other Information:- This is where the failure is discussed in details. Thereby a number of
tabs in the window give all kinds of information related to the failure. The tabs here have a
text data entry facility for entering the details. The tabs displayed here are
1. When it occurs
2. Susceptible Material
3. Resistant Alloys
4. When Attack occurs
5. Appearance of Corrosion
6. Other Characteristics
7. Fouling Characteristics
8. Inspection Techniques
9. References
10. Prevention/Mitigation

Page 263 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Pre-requisites
1. None.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- Will add a new record for the failure Mechanism or type in the
window. User needs to enter data for the mandatory columns to save the data.
2. Delete button:- Using this option user removes the record or the failure Mechanism
from the system . Hence deletes the selected record once the user says ok to the
message Selected Record will be deleted, do you wish to
continue..
3. Save button:- Updates or inserts record into the system once the user uses this
option. Modification also updated the Updated user and date automatically.
4. Refresh button:- Retrieves the data from the system database once again.
5. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ENGEDT Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ENGDEL responsibility can delete the record in this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Engineering Reference

Click on Failure Mechanism menu Item

Column Description
1. List of Failure Mechanisms
a. Failure Mechanism (D)
i. Displays the Names of Failure Mechanisms already entered into the
system.
b. Description (D)

Page 264 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. Displays the description for the Failure Mechanism.
c. Updated Date (D)
i. GALIOM system date as on which the Failure Mechanisms were
saved. Data appears automatically when
user presses the Save
menu option.
d. Updated user (D)
i. GALIOM user Id for the information as to who entered the data for
Failure Mechanisms. The data here gets loaded automatically once
user uses the Save menu option.
2. Failure Mechanism Details
a. Failure Mechanism (M)
i. Name of Failure Mechanism to identify the failure kind.
b. Description (O)
i. Short Details regarding the failure.
c. Updated Date (D)
i. GALIOM system date as on which the Failure Mechanisms were
saved. Data appears automatically when
user presses the Save
menu option.
d. Updated User (D)
i. GALIOM user Id for the information as to who entered the data for
Failure Mechanisms. The data here gets loaded automatically once
user uses the Save menu option.
3. Other Information
a. The tabs displayed here.

Report
None

13.7 FAILURE MODE & MECHANISM


The window mention about the different Modes by which the failure of the asset can take
place. It also shows the users the different Failure mechanisms connected to the Failure
Mode. The details of which can again be accessed in the Failure mechanism Window. This
window will have two sections 1. List of failure Modes 2. Connected failure Mechanism
1.List of failure Modes :- Non editable section which displays all the failure modes
registered in the system.
2.Connected Failure Mechanism :- Editable section to register the Failure Mechanisms
connected to the failure Mode.

Pre-requisites
1. None.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- Will allow the user to add a new record for the Failure Mechanisms
connected to the Failure mode defined
in the system.

Page 265 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


2. Delete button:- Using this option user removes the record for the failure
Mechanism connected to the failure mode. It deletes the selected record once the
user says ok to the message Selected Record will be deleted, do you wish
to
continue..
3. Save button:- Updates or inserts record into the system once the user uses this
option. Modification also updated the Updated user and date automatically.
4. Refresh button:- Retrieves the data from the system database once again.
5. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ENGDEL responsibility can delete the record in this window.
2. Any user having ENGEDT Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Item

Engineering Reference

Click on Failure Mode & Mechanism menu

Column Description
1. List of Failure Modes
a. ID (D)
i. Unique ID for the Failure Mode defined in the system.
b. Failure Mode (D)
i. Name of the Failure Mode as defined in the system. This is defined in
the Reference Values window in
the Administration Module for
the Code FLRMOD.
2. Connected Failure Mechanism
a. SEQ (D)
i. Unique sequence number for the Mechanisms connected to the
failure.
b. Failure Mechanism (M)
i. Dropdown to select the Failure Mechanism connected to the Failure
Mode.

Page 266 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


c. Updated Date (D)
i. GALIOM system date as on which the Failure Mechanisms
connected to the failure mode were saved. Data
appears
automatically when
user presses the Save menu option.
d. Updated User (D)
i. GALIOM user Id for the information as to who entered the data for
Failure Mechanisms connected to the failure mode .The data here
gets loaded automatically once user uses the Save menu option.

Report
None

13.8 FAILURE INSPECTION EFFECTIVENESS


This window mentions about the different Inspection methods that can be done against the
failure and then rank it according to its effectiveness. The section on the top will show a list
of the Failure mechanisms, and the bottom section displays the Inspection methods and their
effectiveness. This window is having two sections. 1. List of Failure mechanism 2. Inspection
Effectiveness.
1. List of Failure Mechanism:- Section displays the list of the failure mechanisms already
entered in the system.
2. Inspection Effectiveness :- This section display the Inspection Effectiveness details.

Pre-requisites
1. None.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Delete button:- Using this option user removes the record for the failure
Mechanism from the list of the failure Mechanisms getting displayed. It deletes the
selected record once the user says ok to the message Selected Record will be
deleted, do you wish to continue..
2. Save button:- Updates the data entered in the section Inspection effectiveness.
Pressing the Set default button in this section inserts 5 records for the Failure
mechanism selected and the Effectiveness anf the POF is auto
populated but
the column Work to do is to be entered by the user. Once the user has added the
data, the
save option can be used to finally register it into the system.
3. Refresh button:- It will refresh current display window.
4. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ENGEDT Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ENGDEL responsibility can delete the record in this window.

Navigation

Page 267 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


Main Menu
Item

Engineering Reference

Click on Failure Inspection Effectiveness menu

Column Description
1. List of Failure Mechanism
a. Failure Mechanism (D)
i. Name of the Failure Mechanism
b. Description (D)
i. Short details about the Failure Mechanism
c. Updated Date (D)
i. GALIOM system date as on which the Failure Mechanisms were
saved. Data appears automatically when
user presses the Save
menu option.
d. Updated User (D)
i. GALIOM user Id for the information as to who entered the data for
Failure Mechanisms. The data here gets loaded automatically once
user uses the Save menu option.
2. Inspection Effectiveness
a. Effectiveness (D)
i. Is the Element Answer as entered in the Head Elements wintion in
the POF setup window for the Head Inspection Effectiveness.
b. POF (M)
i. Is the Element Answers POF as entered in the Head Elements
wintion in the POF setup window for the
Head Inspection
Effectiveness
c. Updated Date (D)
i. GALIOM system date as on which the Inspection Effectiveness data
were saved. Data appears
automatically when user presses the
Save menu option.
Page 268 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


d. Updated User (D)
i. GALIOM user Id for the information as to who entered the data for
Inspection Effectiveness. The data here
gets loaded
automatically once user uses the Save menu option.
3. Intrusive
a. Cost (O)
i. Cost involved for the Inspection Method, for example this cost is
entered when the Inspection requires a
Shutdown of the Asset.
b. Work to do (O)
i. Inspection Method to be used, for example this cost is entered when
the Inspection requires a
Shutdown of the Asset.
4. Non- Intrusive
a. Cost (O)
i. User needs to enter the cost involved for the Inspection Method, for
example this cost is entered when the Inspection does not require a
Shutdown of the Asset.
b. Work to do (O)
i. Inspection Method to be used.

Report
None

13.9 FM POF OPTIONS


This window gives the user provision of entering POF options for the failure mechanism
selected in the listing section. This window is having two sections 1. List of failure
Mechanism 2. POF Options.
1.List of Failure Mechanism:- Section displays the list of the failure mechanisms already
entered in the system.
2. POF Options:- The system display all the POF values.

Pre-requisites
1. None.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Save button:- Updates the data entered in the section Inspection effectiveness.
Pressing the Set default button in this section inserts 5 records for the Failure
mechanism selected and the Effectiveness and the POF is auto
populated but
the column Work to do is to be entered by the user. Once the user has added the
data, the
save option can be used to finally register it into the system.
2. Delete button:- The system deletes the selected record.
3. Refresh button:- Will refresh or retrieve all the data once again from the system
once pressed. This option
becomes very evident when user modifies the material
specs of the material and wants to
review the change done.
4. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Page 269 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ENGEDT Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ENGDEL Responsibility can delete the records in this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Engineering Reference

Click on FM POF Options menu Item

Column Description
1. List of Failure Mechanism
a. Failure Mechanism (D)
i. Name of the Failure Mechanism
b. Description (D)
i. Short details about the Failure Mechanism.
c. Updated Date (D)
i. GALIOM system date as on which the Failure Mechanisms were
saved. Data appears automatically when
user presses the Save
menu option.
d. Updated User (D)
i. GALIOM user Id for the information as to who entered the data for
Failure Mechanisms. The data here gets loaded automatically once
user uses the Save menu option.
2. POF Options.
a. SEQ (D)
i. Unique ID for the POF option.
b. Options (M)
i. Option name.
c. POF (M)
i. Drop down for POF values.
d. Updated Date (D)
i. GALIOM system date as on which the FM POFs were saved. Data
appears automatically when user presses the Save menu option.
e. Updated User (D)
Page 270 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. GALIOM user Id for the information as to who entered the data for
FM POF. The data here
gets loaded automatically once user
uses the Save menu option.

Report
None

14 RISK RANKING SETUP


INTRODUCTION
The Module helps user to configure the parameters for the Risk Based Inspection and
Maintenance and thereby evaluate the inspection procedures and the Risk Assessment for the
Assets. Ultimately it helps the users to categorize and plan, schedule preventive maintenance
for the asset when they come to know the Risk on the Asset due to various factors that can
be defined in the system. The section below demonstrates you
1. What are the different Configurations setups available in the system for Risk
Ranking?
2. How to configure the Different Inspection Checklist?
3. How to configure the Inspection Memo Recommendations?
The Different menu options available in this module are as below:
1. COF Setup
2. POF Setup
3. Risk ranking Setup
4. Confidence Rating setup
5. Inspection Checklist setup
Inspection memo Recommendation Setup

14.1 COF SETUP


The Purpose of the window is to setup all the data needed for the complete setup the
consequence of failure for any Asset in the system based on its type, equipment group and
several other parameters. This window consist five sections 1. COF values 2. COF heads 3.
Head elements 4. Assign to class 5. Assign to data form.
14.1.1 COF VALUES
The window is basically to define all the consequence values based on which the
consequence of Failure can be ranked. This window has two sections 1. COF values 2. Data
Entry/ Modification
1.COF Values :- The system display all the previous COF Values defined in the GALIOM
Application.
2.Data Entry / Modification:- This section display the details of the selected record in the
COF value section.

Pre-requisites

Page 271 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


1. For the COF value setup user should have ADMIN responsibility.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system insert a record in the Data Entry / Modification setion.
2. Delete button:- System deletes the selected record from the COF Values screen.
Before deleting the record, the ystem display the following message Do you wish to
delete the selected record with Yes and No options. If the user selects yes option
the system deletes the selected record from the window. If the user selects No option
the system should not delete the selected record.
3. Save button:- Save the record.
4. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display screen.
5. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Values Icon.

Risk Ranking Setup

Click on COF Setup menu Item

Click on COF

Column Description
1. COF Values
a. ID (D)
i. The system displays the Id of the COF value
b. COF (D)
i. The system displays the COF value description
c. COF VALUE (D)
i. The system displays the COF values
d. Color (D)

Page 272 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. The system displays the number of the color in RGB format.
e. Updated Date (D)
i. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user change or create
a new record in this window.
f. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user change or
create a new record in this window.
2. Data Entry/Modification
a. ID (M)
i. Enter the Id for the COF value
b. COF (M)
i. Enter the description for the COF value
c. COF VALUE (M)
i. Enter the COF value.
d. Color (M)
i. Enter the RGB value for the color to be set for this COF value.
e. Updated Date (D)
i. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user change or create
a new record in this window.
f. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user change or
create a new record in this window.

Report
None
14.1.2 COF HEADS
This window is basically to define the kinds of the COFs that be measured in the system. It
again has two sections. This window has two sections 1. COF Heads 2. Data Entry/
Modification
1.COF HEADS:- The system display all the previous COF heads defined in the GALIOM
Application.
2.Data Entry / Modification:- This section display the details of the selected record in the
COF Head section.

Pre-requisites
1. For the COF value setup user should have ADMIN responsibility.
2. The COF values to be defined.

Page 273 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


3. If there is any formula to define for the respective COF head, the arrtibutes using in
the formula should be defined and have the proper value.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system insert a record in the Data Entry / Modification setion.
2. Delete button:- System deletes the selected record from the COF Values screen.
Before deleting the record, the ystem display the following message Do you wish to
delete the selected record with Yes and No options. If the user selects yes option
the system deletes the selected record from the window. If the user selects No option
the system should not delete the selected record.
3. Save button:- Save the record.
4. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display screen.
5. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Heads Icon.

Risk Ranking Setup

Click on COF Setup menu Item

Click on COF

Column Description
1. COF Heads
a. COF Head(D)
i. The system displays all the previous defined COF heads.
b. Description (D)
i. The system displays the descriptions of the COF heads against each
COF Head value.
c. Updated Date (D)
i. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user change or create
a new record in this window.

Page 274 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

d. Updated User (D)


i. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user change or
create a new record in this window.
2. Data entry/Modification
a. COF Head(M)
i. Enter the COF head name.
1. If the user try to save the record, without entering any value
in theis column. Ths system displays the following message
The COF Head is Mandatory.
b. Description (M)
i. Enter the COF Head description
c. Formula (O)
i. Enter the Formula, if the COF head is having any formula.
d. Updated Date (D)
i. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user change or create
a new record in this window.
e. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user change or
create a new record in this window.

Report
None
14.1.3 HEAD ELEMENTS
This window is used to define the elements for the selected Head and to define the element
answers for the selected head. This window is having four sections 1. Select a head, 2.
Elements of Head, 3. Data Entry/Modification, 4.Element Answers.
1. Select a head :- This section provide a drop down to select the COF heads.
2. Elements of head :- This section display all the elements defined for the selected head
value in the select head section.
3.Data Entry/Modification:- This section display the details of the element selected in the
Elements of head section.
4.Element answers:- This section display all the Answers with respective COF value setup
against each element of head.

Pre-requisites
1. For the COF value setup user should have ADMIN responsibility.
2. The COF heads to be defined.
3. If there is any formula to define for the respective COF elements, the arrtibutes using
in the formula should be defined and have the proper value.

Page 275 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system insert a record in the Data Entry / Modification setion.
2. Delete button:- System deletes the selected record from the COF Values screen.
Before deleting the record, the ystem display the following message Do you wish to
delete the selected record with Yes and No options. If the user selects yes option
the system deletes the selected record from the window. If the user selects No option
the system should not delete the selected record.
3. Save button:- Save the record.
4. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display screen.
5. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Risk Ranking Setup
Elements Icon.

Click on COF Setup menu Item

Click on COF

Column Description
1. Select a head
a. Head name (M)
i. Select the Head name from the drop down.
1. The system displays all the Head values, which are defined in
the COF heads section.
2. Element of Head
a. Seq (D)

Page 276 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. The system displays the seq number of the Elements,
b. Element name (D)
i. The system displays the element names.
c. Description (D)
i. The system displays the description of the elements against each
element.
d. Updated Date (D)
i. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user change or create
a new record in this window.
e. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user change or
create a new record in this window.
3. Data Entry/Modification.
a. Seq (M)
i. Enter the seq number to the element.
1. If the user try to save the record without entering any value in
this window. The system displays the following message
Enter the seq number.
b. Default COF Answer (O)
i. Select the default COF answer from the drop down.
c. Element Name (M)
i. Enter the Element name
1. If the user try to save the record without entering any value in
this window. The system displays the following message
Enter the element name.
d. Description (O)
i. Enter the description for the element.
e. Formula (O)
i. Define the formula for the selected element.
f. Updated Date (D)
i. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user change or create
a new record in this window.
g. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user change or
create a new record in this window.
4. Element answers
a. Seq (M)
i. Enter the seq no for the Answer.
b. Answer (M)
i. Enter the answer.
c. COF (M)
Page 277 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. Select the COF value from the drop down
d. Updated Date (D)
i. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user change or create
a new record in this window.
e. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user change or
create a new record in this window.

Report
None
14.1.4 ASSIGN TO CLASS
This window is used to assign the assessment type for each class. This window is having four
sections 1. select a class, 2.Element of class, 3. Data Entry/Modification, 4. Element
Answers.
1. Select a class :- This section provide a drop down to select the class.
2. Elements of class :- This section display all the elements defined for the selected class
and selected assessment type.
3.Data Entry/Modification:- This section display the details of the element selected in the
Elements of class section.
4.Element answers:- This section display all the

Pre-requisites
1. For the COF value setup user should have ADMIN responsibility.
2. The COF elements to be defined.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- When user press the Inser button, the system display the following
message This will auto populate COF defined. Do you wish to proceed ? with
Yes and No Options. If user selecte No the system keep the existing COF values.
If the user press Yes button, the system will populate the COF values defined.
2. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Risk Ranking Setup
Assign to class Icon.

Click on COF Setup menu Item

Click on

Page 278 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Select a class
a. Class name (M)
i. Select the class name from the drop down
b. Assessment Type (M)
i. Select the Assessment type from the drop down for the selected class.
c. Formula (O)
i. If there is any formula to be defined, using the formula editor user
can define the formula for the selected class and assessment type.
2. Element of class (D)
a. Based on the class value and type of assessment, the element of class will be
displayed.
3. Data Entry/Modification (D)
a. Based on the class value and type of assessment, the element of class will be
displayed.
4. Element Answers (D)
a. Based on the class value and type of assessment, the element of class will be
displayed.

Report
None

Page 279 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


14.1.5 ASSIGN TO DATA FORM
This window represents the different dataforms that can be attached into the system for
particular Class and assessment Type Combination. Initially user selects the Class in the
Select a Class section based on which the Assessment Types automatically appear in the
section below List of Assessment Types. In the Third Section of the data Entry forms entry
user can affiliate the dataforms for the measurement of the Assessment Type based on the
Class Name using the menu options of Insert and delete. The Dataforms column in the Data
Entry section displays a drop down of all the data forms available in the system. User needs
to select the one desired and save the change. This window is having three sections 1. select a
class, 2. List of assessment type, 3. Data Form Entry/Modification.

Pre-requisites
1. For the COF value setup user should have ADMIN responsibility.
2. The Assessment Type is defined for the class name.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system insert a record in dataform Entry/modification section.
2. Delete button:- System deletes the selected record from the dataform
Entry/modification section. Before deleting the record, the system display the
following message Do you wish to delete the selected record with Yes and No
options. If the user selects yes option the system deletes the selected record from the
window. If the user selects No option the system should not delete the selected
record.
3. Save button:- Save the record.
4. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display screen.
5. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Risk Ranking Setup
assign to data form Icon.

Click on COF Setup menu Item

Click on

Page 280 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. select a class
a. class Name (M)
i. select the class from the drop down
2. List of Assessment name
a. Assessment Name (D)
i. The system display the assessment Name
b. Description (D)
i. The system displays the description of the assessment.
c. Updated Date (D)
i. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user change or create
a new record in this window
d. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user change or
create a new record in this window.
3. Data From Entry/Modification
a. Data form Name (M)
i. Select the data form from the drop down
b. Updated Date (D)
c. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user change or create a new
record in this window
d. Updated User (D)
e. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user change or create a
new record in this window

Report
None

14.2 POF SETUP


The Purpose of the window is to setup all the data needed for the complete setup the
Probability of failure for any Asset in the system based on its type, equipment group. This
window consists of five sections 1. POF values 2. POF Heads, 3.Head elements, 4. Assign to
class, 5. Assign to Data Form.
14.2.1 POF VALUES
The window is basically to define all the probability values based on which the probability of
Failure can be ranked. This window has two sections 1. POF values 2. Data Entry/
Modification
1.POF Values :- The system display all the previous POF Values defined in the GALIOM
Application.
2.Data Entry / Modification:- This section display the details of the selected record in the
POF value section.

Page 281 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Pre-requisites
1. For the POF value setup user should have ADMIN responsibility.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system insert a record in the Data Entry / Modification setion.
2. Delete button:- System deletes the selected record from the POF Values screen.
Before deleting the record, the ystem display the following message Do you wish to
delete the selected record with Yes and No options. If the user selects yes option
the system deletes the selected record from the window. If the user selects No option
the system should not delete the selected record.
3. Save button:- Save the record.
4. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display screen.
5. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Values Icon.

Risk Ranking Setup

Click on POF Setup menu Item

Click on POF

Column Description
1. POF Values
a. ID (D)
i. The system displays the Id of the POF value
b. POF (D)
i. The system displays the POF value description
c. POF VALUE (D)

Page 282 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. The system displays the POF values
d. Color (D)
i. The system displays the number of the color in RGB format.
e. Updated Date (D)
i. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user change or create
a new record in this window.
f. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user change or
create a new record in this window.
2. Data Entry/Modification
a. ID (M)
i. Enter the Id for the POF value
b. POF (M)
i. Enter the description for the POF value
c. POF VALUE (M)
i. Enter the POF value.
d. Color (M)
i. Enter the RGB value for the color to be set for this COF value.
e. Updated Date (D)
i. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user change or create
a new record in this window.
f. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user change or
create a new record in this window.

Report
None
14.2.2 POF HEADS
This window is basically to define the kinds of the POFs that be measured in the system. It
again has two sections. This window has two sections 1. POF Heads 2. Data Entry/
Modification
1.POF HEADS:- The system display all the previous POF heads defined in the GALIOM
Application.
2.Data Entry / Modification:- This section display the details of the selected record in the
POF Head section.

Pre-requisites
1. For the POF value setup user should have ADMIN responsibility.

Page 283 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


2. The POF values to be defined.
3. If there is any formula to define for the respective POF head, the arrtibutes using in
the formula should be defined and have the proper value.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system insert a record in the Data Entry / Modification setion.
2. Delete button:- System deletes the selected record from the POF Values screen.
Before deleting the record, the ystem display the following message Do you wish to
delete the selected record with Yes and No options. If the user selects yes option
the system deletes the selected record from the window. If the user selects No option
the system should not delete the selected record.
3. Save button:- Save the record.
4. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display screen.
5. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Heads Icon.

Risk Ranking Setup

Click on POF Setup menu Item

Click on POF

Column Description
1. POF Heads
a. COF Head(D)
i. The system displays all the previous defined POF heads.
b. Description (D)
i. The system displays the descriptions of the POF heads against each
POF Head value.
c. Updated Date (D)

Page 284 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user change or create
a new record in this window.
d. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user change or
create a new record in this window.
2. Data entry/Modification
a. POF Head(M)
i. Enter the POF head name.
ii. If the user try to save the record, without entering any value in theis
column. Ths system displays the following message The POF Head
is Mandatory.
b. Description (M)
i. Enter the POF Head description
c. Formula (O)
i. Enter the Formula, if the POF head is having any formula.
d. Updated Date (D)
i. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user change or create
a new record in this window.
e. Updated User (D)
f. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user change or create a
new record in this window.

Report
None
14.2.3 HEAD ELEMENTS
This window is used to define the elements for the selected Head and to define the element
answers for the selected head. This window is having four sections 1. Select a head, 2.
Elements of Head, 3. Data Entry/Modification, 4.Element Answers.
1. Select a head :- This section provide a drop down to select the POF heads.
2. Elements of head :- This section display all the elements defined for the selected head
value in the select head section.
3.Data Entry/Modification:- This section display the details of the element selected in the
Elements of head section.
4.Element answers:- This section display all the Answers with respective POF value setup
against each element of head.

Pre-requisites
1. For the POF value setup user should have ADMIN responsibility.
2. The POF heads to be defined.
3. If there is any formula to define for the respective POF elements, the arrtibutes using
in the formula should be defined and have the proper value.

Page 285 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system insert a record in the Data Entry / Modification section.
2. Delete button:- System deletes the selected record from the POF Values screen.
Before deleting the record, the system display the following message Do you wish to
delete the selected record with Yes and No options. If the user selects yes option
the system deletes the selected record from the window. If the user selects No option
the system should not delete the selected record.
3. Save button:- Save the record.
4. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display screen.
5. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Risk Ranking Setup
Elements Icon.

Click on POF Setup menu Item

Click on POF

Column Description
1. Select a head
a. Head name (M)
i. Select the Head name from the drop down.
1. The system displays all the Head values, which are defined in
the POF heads section.
2. Element of Head
a. Seq (D)

Page 286 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. The system displays the seq number of the Elements,
b. Element name (D)
i. The system displays the element names.
c. Description (D)
i. The system displays the description of the elements against each
element.
d. Updated Date (D)
i. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user change or create
a new record in this window.
e. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user change or
create a new record in this window.
3. Data Entry/Modification.
a. Seq (M)
i. Enter the seq number to the element.
1. If the user try to save the record without entering any value in
this window. The system displays the following message
Enter the seq number.
b. Default POF Answer (O)
i. Select the default POF answer from the drop down.
c. Element Name (M)
i. Enter the Element name
1. If the user try to save the record without entering any value in
this window. The system displays the following message
Enter the element name.
d. Description (O)
i. Enter the description for the element.
e. Formula (O)
i. Define the formula for the selected element.
f. Updated Date (D)
i. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user change or create
a new record in this window.
g. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user change or
create a new record in this window.
4. Element answers
a. Seq (M)
i. Enter the seq no for the Answer.
b. Answer (M)
i. Enter the answer.
c. POF (M)
Page 287 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. Select the POF value from the drop down
d. Updated Date (D)
i. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user change or create
a new record in this window.
e. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user change or
create a new record in this window.

Report
None
14.2.4 ASSIGN TO CLASS
This window is used to assign the assessment type for each class. This window is having four
sections 1. select a class, 2.Element of class, 3. Data Entry/Modification, 4. Element
Answers.
1. Select a class :- This section provide a drop down to select the class.
2. Elements of class :- This section display all the elements defined for the selected class
and selected assessment type.
3.Data Entry/Modification:- This section display the details of the element selected in the
Elements of class section.
4.Element answers:- This section display all the

Pre-requisites
1. For the POF value setup user should have ADMIN responsibility.
2. The POF elements to be defined.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- When user press the Insert button, the system display the following
message This will auto populate POF defined. Do you wish to proceed ? with
Yes and No Options. If user select No the system keep the existing POF values. If
the user press Yes button, the system will populate the POF values defined.
2. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Risk Ranking Setup
Assign to class Icon.

Click on POF Setup menu Item

Click on

Page 288 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Select a class
a. Class name (M)
i. Select the class name from the drop down
b. Assessment Type (M)
i. Select the Assessment type from the drop down for the selected class.
c. Formula (O)
i. If there is any formula to be defined, using the formula editor user
can define the formula for the selected class and assessment type.
2. Element of class (D)
a. Based on the class value and type of assessment, the element of class will be
displayed.
3. Data Entry/Modification (D)
a. Based on the class value and type of assessment, the element of class will be
displayed.
4. Element Answers (D)
a. Based on the class value and type of assessment, the element of class will be
displayed.

Report
None

Page 289 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


14.2.5 ASSIGN TO DATA FROM
This window represents the different dataforms that can be attached into the system for
particular Class and assessment Type Combination. Initially user selects the Class in the
Select a Class section based on which the Assessment Types automatically appear in the
section below List of Assessment Types. In the Third Section of the data Entry forms entry
user can affiliate the dataforms for the measurement of the Assessment Type based on the
Class Name using the menu options of Insert and delete. The Dataforms column in the Data
Entry section displays a drop down of all the data forms available in the system. User needs
to select the one desired and save the change. This window is having three sections 1. select a
class, 2. List of assessment type, 3. Data Form Entry/Modification.

Pre-requisites
1. For the POF value setup user should have ADMIN responsibility.
2. The Assessment Type is defined for the class name.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system insert a record in dataform Entry/modification section.
2. Delete button:- System deletes the selected record from the dataform
Entry/modification section. Before deleting the record, the system display the
following message Do you wish to delete the selected record with Yes and No
options. If the user selects yes option the system deletes the selected record from the
window. If the user selects No option the system should not delete the selected
record.
3. Save button:- Save the record.
4. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display screen.
5. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Risk Ranking Setup
assign to data form Icon.

Click on POF Setup menu Item

Click on

Page 290 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Select a class
a. class Name (M)
i. select the class from the drop down
2. List of Assessment name
a. Assessment Name (D)
i. The system display the assessment Name
b. Description (D)
i. The system displays the description of the assessment.
c. Updated Date (D)
i. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user change or create
a new record in this window
d. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user change or
create a new record in this window.
3. Data From Entry/Modification
a. Data form Name (M)
i. Select the data form from the drop down
b. Updated Date (D)
i. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user change or create
a new record in this window
c. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user change or
create a new record in this window

Report
None

14.3 RISK RANKING SETUP


This window is to basically define the formula for each block according to the COF and
POF values by using the formula editor and thereby defining one formula for the risk. This
window is having 3 sections 1. Select class and Assessment type 2. Risk Ranking Template 3.
Risk Ranking Details.
1. Select class and Assessment type :- Gives an option to the user to initially choose the class
and Assessment type for the formulas to be finally defined for RiskMatrix
2.Risk Ranking Template:- The matrix depicts the position of the different block buttons in
the matrix and their position according to the COF and POF value.
Formula for Risk here is the provision for the user to define formula to get the Risk Value
for the whole Class.
3. Risk ranking Details:- The system display all the details of the risk ranking.

Pre-requisites
1. The COF setup and POF setup configured.

Page 291 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- Inserts a new row in the Risk Ranking details section, but will be
unable to insert a record if there already 25v records in the section.
2. Delete button:- Deletes a record in the Risk Ranking Details section, once the user
says ok to the message prompt
Selected Record will be deleted , do you wish
to continue ?.
3. Save button:- Modified formula can be registered into the system by using this menu
option.
4. Refresh button:- The matrix as well as the Risk Ranking Details section will again be
retrieved from the database.
5. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Risk Ranking Setup

Click on Risk Ranking Setup menu Item .

Column Description
1. select a class and Assessment type
a. class Name (M)
i. select the class from the drop down
b. Assessment type (M)
i. Select the Assessment type from the drop down

Page 292 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

2. Risk Ranking Template


a. Formula For Risk (O)
i. Enter the formula.
3. Risk Ranking Details
a. Button (D)
i. Each of the buttons on the Matrix have been named as
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5

The POF values appearing column wise and the COF values Row
wise. The values in this colum appears automatically user needs to set
values in other column in the record.
b. color (O)
i. Color to be displayed for the chosen button.
4. Value (O)
a. The value defines in the each cube. (for example 2 in the above figure)
5. Formula for Buttons (O)
a. As the signifying using this option user can define the formula for the button
using the formula editor.
6. Updated Date (D)
a. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user change or create a new
record in this window
7. Updated User (D)
a. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user change or create a
new record in this window.

Report
None

14.4 CONFIDENCE RATING SETUP


This window is used for defining the parameters of confidence factor for any Asset. This is
again a one time setup window and data entered here will be applicable for all the Assets
registered into the system. This window is having two section 1. Select COF 2. Confidence
Rating.
1. Select COF:- Displays the dropdown of the list of all the COF values as defined in
the COF setup window.
2. Confidence Rating:- Data entry section to define the confidence factor.

Pre-requisites

Page 293 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

1. Select the COF value from the drop down.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- Inserts a new row in the confidence Rating.
2. Save button:- Save the record..
3. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Risk Ranking Setup

Click on Confidence Rating setup menu Item .

Column Description
1. Select COF
a. COF (M)
i. Select the COF from the drop down
2. Confidence Rating
a. Confidence Criteria (M)
i. Displays a dropdown of the reference values as defined in the Define
reference values in Administration Module for Reference type
CONRAT.
b. Confidence Factor (M)
i. Numeric value given by the Admin user as a measurement of the
Confidence on the Asset based on the Confidence criteria. The value
should be 1 or less then 1but not less than 0.
c. Updated Date (D)
i. GALIOM system date as on which the Confidence criteria record is
saved. Data appears automatically when
user presses the Save
menu option.
d. Updated User (D)
i. GALIOM user Id for the information as to who entered the
Confidence criteria record. The data here gets loaded automatically
once user uses the Save menu option.

Report
None

Page 294 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

14.5 INSPECTION CHECKLIST SETUP


This is a listing window displaying all the Inspection type checklist that can registered into
the system.

Pre-requisites
1. ******.
2. *******

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- On clicking this menu option application opens a new window for
registering a new Checklist into the system.
14.5.1 CHECKLIST ENTRY SCREEN
Using this screen the ADMIN Defines the new check list for the selected inspection
type.

Pre-requisites
1. *******.
2. ******.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Save button:- Save the record.
2. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display screen.
3. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Insert button.

Risk Ranking Setup

Click on Inspection checklist

Press

Page 295 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Checklist Header
a. Checklist ID(D)
i. The system display the check list Id, when user save the
new checklist..
b. Checklist Name (M)
i. Enter the checklist name
c. Inspection Type (M)
i. Select the inspection type from the drop down.
d. Description (O)
i. Enter the description for the new checklist.
.
e. Updated Date (D)
i. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user
change or create a new record in this window.
f. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user
change or create a new record in this window.
2. Checklist Details
a. Seq (D)
i. The system displays the sequence number.
b. Section (O)
i. Enter the section
c. Subsection (O)
i. Enter the subsection
d. Inspection Description (D)
i. Enter the Inspection description
e. Updated Date (D)
i. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user
change or create a new record in this window.
f. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user
change or create a new record in this window.

Report
None
2. Delete button:- It deletes the selected record from the List of the checklist getting
displayed.
3. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.
4. Double click:- Select the record and double click on it. The system display the
details of the selected record in the new window.

Page 296 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Risk Ranking Setup

Click on Inspection Checklist setup menu Item.

Column Description
1. ID (D)
a. The system displays the ID of the checklist.
2. Checklist Name (D)
a. The system displays all the checklist names.
3. Inspection Type (D)
a. The system displays all the type of inspection against each checklist.
4. Description (D)
a. The system displays the description of the checklist.
5. Updated Date (D)
a. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user change or create a new
record in this window.
6. Updated User (D)
a. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user change or create a
new record in this window.

Report
None

14.6 INSPECTION MEMO RECOMMENDATION SETUP


The window depicts the Inspection Findings Recommendations according to the conditional
codes. The window again has two sections 1. Listing Section 2. Details section.
1. Listing section- Listing all the data already registered into the system.
Page 297 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


2.

Details section Data entry section for the Setup.

Pre-requisites
1. *******.
2. ******.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Save button:- On using this menu option user is able to finally save the changes or
insert a new Recommendation into the
Application.
2. Insert button:- On using this menu option the system allows user to insert a record
in the Inspection Memo
Recommendation setup section and thus on using the
save option the user saves a new Recommendation for the Conditional Code
Selected.
3. Delete button:- Delete the Record in the bottom Inspection Memo
Recommendation setup section and refreshes the list of
Inspection
Memo
Recommendation.
4. Refresh button:- Refreshes the list of Inspection Memo Recommendations, thereby
update all the new changes. Once clicked
it displays all the Recommendations as
is there in the database.
5. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. The user needs to have the ADMIN responsibility to edit data in the window

Navigation
Main Menu
setup
.

Risk Ranking Setup

Click on Inspection memo Recommendation

Column Description
1. Inspection memo Recommendation Listing section

Page 298 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


a. Conditional Code (D)
i. Displays a dropdown of the reference values as defined in the
Define reference values in Administration Module for
Reference type CONCOD.
b. Inspection Findings (D)
i. Text data entered by user related to the Inspection.
c. Recommendation (D)
i. Text data entered by user related to the recommendations for
the Inspection findings.
d. Maintenance Priority (D)
i. Displays a dropdown of the reference values as defined in the
Define reference values in Administration
Module for
Reference type MEMPRI,
e. FFP Status (D)
i. Follow up for Proposal status
f. Days After (D)
i. Numeric data specific to the Recommendation for the
Inspection Findings.
g. Updated Date (D)
i. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user change
or create a new record in this window.
h. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user
change or create a new record in this window.
2. Inspection Memo Recommendation setup details section
a. Conditional Code (M)
i. Select the value from the drop down
1. Displays a dropdown of the reference values as
defined in the Define reference values in
Administration Module for Reference type
CONCOD.
b. Inspection Findings (O)
i. Enter the Inspection Findings
c. Recommendation (O)
i. Enter the Recommendation.
d. Maintenance Priority (O)
i. Select the value from the drop down
1. Displays a dropdown of the reference values as
defined in the Define reference values in
Administration
Module for Reference type
MEMPRI,

Page 299 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


e. FFP Status (O)
i. Follow up for Proposal status
f. Days After (O)
i. Enter the Numeric data specific to the Recommendation for
the Inspection Findings.
g. Updated Date (D)
i. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user change
or create a new record in this window.
h. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user change or
create a new record in this window

Report
None

15 DATA LOADING UTILITIES


15.1 TAG & FEATURE DATA UPLOADING
This window is used to load the data of tag and feature into selected data form. This window
also uploads the tag & feature attributes.

Pre-requisites
1. The data form should exist.
2. The data form should be in specific format.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.
2. Upload Tag:- The system loads all the tag values into selected data form from the file.
3. Upload Tag Attributes :- The system loads all the tag attributes into selected data form
from the file.
4. Upload Feature:- The system loads all the tag values into selected data form from the
file.
5. Upload Feature Attributes:- The system loads all the tag attributes into selected data
form from the file.

Responsibilities
1. The user needs to have the ADMIN responsibility to edit data in the window

Navigation
Main Menu
item.

Data Loading Utilities

Click on Tag & Feature Data Uploading menu

Page 300 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Select Data Form (M)
a. Select the data form from the drop down into which the data is to be loaded.
2. Select File (M)
a. With the help of select file window, select the source file in the system.

Report
None.

16 INTERFACE MANAGEMENT
16.1 INTERFACE SETUP
This window is used to give the information about the interface programmers running with
this Galiom Application (If any). Using this ADMIN will know the schedules to run by the
interface so as to provide the information to the GALIOM Application.

Pre-requisites
1. The Interface should be available and the interface is running successfully.
2. The Interface should have feature to handshake with Galiom Application. Or it is
capable of providing the information to the Galiom Application.

Steps to the usage of this window


1.
2.
3.
4.

Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.


Insert button: - The system Insert a new record.
Delete button:- The system deletes the selected record.
Save button:- The system save the record.

Responsibilities
1. The user needs to have the ADMIN responsibility to edit data in the window

Navigation

Page 301 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


Main Menu

Interface Management

Click on Interface Setup menu item.

Column Description
1. Interface setup List section
a. ID (D)
i. The system display the Id
b. Name (D)
i. The system displays the Interface name
c. Description (D)
i. The system displays the description for the Interface.
d. Category (D)
i. The system displays the Category Name of the interface.
e. Schedule Type (D)
i. The system displays the Schedule for the interface to run.
f. Start Date Time (D)
i. The system displays the schedule start date & Time
g. Updated Date (D)
i. The system displays the Updated Date.
h. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the Updated User.
2. Interface setup Entry section
a. SeqNo (D)
i. The system displays the seq no.
b. Name (M)
i. Enter the name of the Interface.
c. Description (O)

Page 302 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. Enter the description of the Interface.
d. Category (O)
i. Enter the category of the Interface.
e. Schedule type (O)
i. Select the schedule type to run the interface.
f. Start Date&Time (O)
i. Enter the start date time.
g. Updated Date (D)
i. The system display the date, when the ADMIN user change or create a
new record in this window.
h. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the User Id of the ADIM when user change or create
a new record in this window.

Report
None.

16.2 INTERFACE LOGS


This window provides the Interface logs. Based on the selection of Interface in the Interface
Log screen, the system display the all the log details of the selected Interface in the Interface
Log Details section.

Pre-requisites
1. The interface should run at least once.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Responsibilities
1. The user needs to have the ADMIN responsibility to edit data in the window

Navigation
Main Menu

Interface Management

Click on Interface Logs menu item.

Page 303 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Interface Logs
a. Interface type (D)
i. The system displays the Interface type
b. Sync Date (D)
i. The system displays the date of schedule run
c. Sync Status (D)
i. The system displays the status of the schedule job (i.e., Completed/In
progress/not completed).
2. Interface Logs Details
a. Seq No (D)
i. The system displays the seq no
b. Description (O)
i. The system displays the description of all the messages
c. Message Type (O)
i. The system displays the Message type.

Report
None.

17 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) STRATEGY


INTRODUCTION
Preventative Maintenance (PM) Strategy is to have planned, proactive maintenance of plant
and equipment that is designed to improve equipment life and avoid any unplanned
maintenance activity. Preventative maintenance includes activities such as inspection, testing,
painting, lubrication, cleaning, adjusting, and minor parts replacement to extend the life and
function of the equipment and facilities.
Page 304 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

17.1 PM CONCEPT
A concept or maintenance philosophy is always required for every equipment type. The
preventative maintenance activities performed in a pump may not be same as activities
performed in air receivers and filters. Hence the preventative maintenance concept has to be
build for every type of equipments. This assists the planner to know what kind of equipment
need what sort of PM activities due to what failure mechanism and their maintenance
frequencies.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. At least one asset is registered in the asset hierarchy tree.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:-.The system insert a record in the PM Activities window.
2. Delete button:-.The system deletes the selected record in the PM concept window.
The system will display the following message do you wish to delete the selected
record with Yes and No buttons. If the user press Yes, the system deletes the
selected record. If the user presses No button the system will not delete the selected
record.
3. Save button:- The system save the new or modify values.
4. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current active window.
5. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu

Preventative Maintenance

Click on PM Concept menu Item

Column Description

Page 305 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

1. List of Equipment Type


a. Class Value (D)
i. The system displays the class value.
b. Description (D)
i. The system displays the Description of the selected class value.
c. Active (D)
i. The system displays whether the class value is active are not.
ii. The system displays A, if it is active. The system displays I, if it is
inactive.
d. Updated Date (D)
i. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies the
data.
e. Updated User (D)
i. The system should display the updated user, when ever user modifies the
data in this window.
2. PM Activities
a. Sno. (D)
i. The system displays the sequence number automatically.
b. Failure Mechanism (M)
i. The user is to select the failure mechanism from the drop down.
c. Activity Code (D)
i. Based on the selected failure mechanism in the Failure Mechanism
column system displays the respective Activity code.
d. Frequency (O)
i. Based on the selected failure mechanism in the Failure Mechanism
column system displays the frequency.
1. The system allows the user to edit this column.
e. Freq.UOM (O)
i. Based on the selected failure mechanism in the Failure Mechanism
column system displays the freq. unit of measurement.
1. The system allows the user to edit this column.
f. Shutdown (M)
i. If the user check this value, the shout down is required. If the check
box is checked i.e., Yes. If the check box is not checked i.e., NO
1. By default the system always check the check box (i.e., Yes)
g. Updated Date (D)
i. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies
the data.
h. Updated User (D)
Page 306 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. The system should display the updated user, when ever user modifies
the data in this window.

Report
None

17.2 PM PROGRAMME
Preventative Maintenance Programme helps the planner to organize the planning for
inspection programs designed to run over years. The same preventative measures which are
periodically done are automatically scheduled by the system. When one cycle is complete the
next cycle PM schedule will be planned automatically as soon as the PM schedule status is
changed to complete. In this screen the programme type is the inspection types like
ONSTREAM, SHUTDOWN, and VISUAL etc. The following steps would help in
planning/changing the preventative maintenance program.
Note :- Preventative maintenance is planned mainly in maintenance management system
outside GALIOM and is downloaded into GALIOM for the knowledge and action by the
inspection group.

Pre-requisites
1.
2.
3.
4.

The user should be active GALIOM Application user


At least one asset is registered in the asset hierarchy tree.
At least one inspection has taken place in the selected tag.
Select the Tag or Facility you wish to program preventative maintenance.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:-. The system inserts a new record in the Inspection Report/memo
window.
2. Delete button:- The system delete the current display record in Inspection
Report/memo window.
3. Save button: - The system save the record.
4. Refresh button:- Refresh the current display screen
5. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
PM Programme.

Click Asset Management menu Item

Select the

Page 307 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. PM Programme
a. Programme type (D)
i. The system displays all the previously defined program type.
1. System would list all previously defined programs with their
programme type.
b. Freq (D)
i. The system displays all the previously defined freq against respective
programme type
c. UOM (D)
i. The system displays all the previously defined UOM against
respective programme type
d. Start Date (D)
i. The system displays all the previously defined programme start date
against respective programme type.
e. End Date (D)
The system displays all the previously defined programme End date
against respective programme type.
f. Updated Date (D)
i. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies
the data.
g. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the user id, when the user is modify the value in
this window.
2. PM Programme Detail
a. Programme type (M)
i. Select the Programme type (Inspection Type) that needs to be
scheduled for a period of time in a defined frequency.

Page 308 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

b. Programme Freq.(M)
i. Enter the frequency with unit of measurement (daily/monthly/yearly)
for the programme
c. Freq.UOM (O)
i. Select the appropriate frequency UOM, based on the selected
frequency.
d. Active (M)
i. If the programme is active, check the check box
1. By default is No. i.e., unchecked.
e. Start date (M)
i. Enter the start date of the programme. This tells the system when the
actual work would start and which year.
f. End Date (M)
i. Enter the stop date of the programme. This tells the system when the
actual work would stop and which year.
g. Programme Description (O)
i. Enter the programme description
h. Updated Date (D)
i. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies
the data.
a. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the user id, when the user is modify the value in
this window.
3. Programme Chart
a. The chart will be displayed by the system.
REPORT
None.

17.3 PM SCHEDULE
GALIOM allows creating PM schedule for tags and facilities either based on PM programme
or it is manually entered for scheduling. PM schedule can either be downloaded thru
interface from maintenance management systems or can be scheduled manually. The
following steps explain how to schedule the preventative maintenance activity.
Note:- When the task is completed the PM schedule status could be changed to
COMPLETED.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user

Page 309 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


2. At least one asset is registered in the asset hierarchy tree.
3. Select the tag or facility that needs the scheduling.
4. To create automatically a planned schedule for long period at a frequency, use PM
programme to automate the scheduling.
5. If the PM schedule is downloaded from other maintenance management systems
then work order number, work order priority and status would automatically
downloaded for the knowledge of engineers working in GALIOM for inspection
management and work scope creation.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:-. The system inserts a new record in the Inspection Report/memo
window.
2. Delete button:- The system delete the current display record in Inspection
Report/memo window.
3. Save button: - The system save the record.
4. Refresh button:- Refresh the current display screen
5. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
PM Schedule.

Asset Management

Click Asset Management menu Item

Select the

Column Description
1. PM Schedule
a. Schedule type (D)
i. The system displays the schedule type like RBI, ADHOC, BLI, CVI,
ONSTREAM etc.
Page 310 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


1. The system display all the schedules done in past either by PM
programme automatically or entered manually into PM
schedule by the users.
b. Start Date (D)
i. The system display the Start date of all the previous PM schedules
programme by automatically or manually.
c. End Date (D)
i. The system display the End Date of all the previous PM schedules
programme by automatically or manually
d. Schedule Status (D)
i. The system displays the schedule status like Cancelled, Completed,
Initiated, On going.
1. The system display the schecule status of all the previous PM
schedules programme by automatically or manually
e. Updated Date (D)
i. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies
the data.
1. The system display the all previous PM schedules updated
Date programme by automatically or manually
f. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the user id, when the user is modify the value in
this window.
1. The system display the all previous PM schedules Updated
user ids programme by automatically or manually
2. PM Schedule Detail
a. Schedule type (M)
i. Select the schedule type from the drop down.
b. Schedule status (O)
i. Select the Schedule status from the drop down.
c. Start date (M)
i. Enter the Start date
d. End Date (M)
i. Enter the End Date.
e. Work Order Number (O)
i. Enter the work order number.
f. Work Order Status (O)
i. Select the Work Order status from the drop down (i.e., Cancelled,
Completed, On going, Technically complete and yet to start.
g. Work Order Priority (O)
i. Select the work order priority from the drop down box (i.e., HIGH,
LOW, MEDIUM)
Page 311 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

h. Updated Date (D)


i. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies
the data.
i.

Updated User (D)


i. The system displays the user id, when the user is modify the value in
this window.

REPORT
None.

17.4 DEFINE MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES


Through this window user defines the List of activity in Galiom Application.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user
2. At least one asset is registered in the asset hierarchy tree.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:-. The system inserts a new record in the activity Detail.
2. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record. Before deleting the record
the system display the following message Do you wish to delete the selected
record with yes and No buttons. If the user selects the yes button, the system
deletes the selected record. If the user selects the No button, the system will not
delete the selected record.
3. Save button: - The system save the record.
4. Refresh button:- Refresh the current display screen
5. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
menu Item.

Preventative Maintenance

Click Define Maintenance Activities

Page 312 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. List of Activity
a. Activity code (D)
i. The system displays the activity code.
b. Activity Name (D)
i. The system displays the activity name
c. Description (D)
i. The system displays the Description of the Activity code
d. Activity Type (D)
i. The system displays the Activity type.
e. Active (D)
i. The system display the active value (A/I)
f. Updated date (D)
i. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies
the data
g. Updated user (D)
i. The system should display the updated user, when ever user modifies
the data in this window.
2. Activity Detail
a. Activity code (M)
i. Enter the activity code
1. If the user try to save the record, without entering any value
in this column, the system display the following message
Activity code is mandatory
b. Activity Name (M)
i. Enter the activity name

Page 313 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


1. If the user try to save the record, without entering any value
in this column, the system display the following message
Activity name is mandatory
c. Description (O)
i. Enter the description
d. Activity Type (M)
i. Select the value (i.e., Preventative/Corrective) from the drop down.
e. Active (M)
i. The system by default check the check box (i.e., Yes)
f. Updated Date (D)
i. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies
the data.
g. Updated user (D)
i. The system should display the updated user, when ever user modifies
the data in this window.
j.

Schedule type (M)


ii. Select the schedule type from the drop down.

REPORT
None.

17.5 PM ACTIVITIES FOR THE FAILURE MECHANISM


This window is used to define the maintenance activities for the selected Failure Mechanism.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user
2. At least one asset is registered in the asset hierarchy tree.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:-. The system inserts a new record in the PM Activities.
2. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record. Before deleting the record
the system display the following message Do you wish to delete the selected
record with yes and No buttons. If the user selects the yes button, the system
deletes the selected record. If the user selects the No button, the system will not
delete the selected record.
3. Save button: - The system save the record.
4. Refresh button:- Refresh the current display screen
5. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application

Responsibilities

Page 314 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Preventative Maintenance
Mechanism menu Item.

Click PM Activities for the failure

Column Description
1. List of Failure Mechanism
a. Failure Mechanism (D)
i. The system displays the failure mechanisms
b. Description (D)
i. The system displays the description of the failure mechanisms
c. Updated date (D)
i. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies
the data.
d. Updated user (D)
i. The system should display the updated user, when ever user modifies
the data in this window.
2. PM Activities
a. Activity code (M)
i. Select the Activity code from the drop down list
1. if the user does not select any value and try to save this
record, the system displays the following message Activity
code is mandatory
b. Maint.Freq (O)
i. Select the maint.Frq from the drop down list.
c. Freq UOM (O)

Page 315 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. Select the appropriate UOM from the drop down list, based on the
value selected in the Maint.Freq.
h. Shutdown (M)
i. By default the system select the check box (i.e., Yes)
i.

Updated date (D)


i. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies
the data.

j.

Updated user (D)


i. The system should display the updated user, when ever user modifies
the data in this window.

REPORT
None.

18 MONITORED DATA
INTRODUCTION
This module will be used to record, manage, analyze the Inspections done on the
equipments/tags in the organization. Different Inspection methods have been incorporated
into the system and user would be able to record their Inspections via different modes.
Based on these records Reports can be generated which can be further used for analysis,
forecasting and scheduling of activities.
The Different Inspection Methods that can be recorded into the system as under:
1) Ultrasonic Wall Thickness
2) Radiography
3) Teletest (Long Range UT)
4) Corrosion Coupon
5) Corrosion Probe
6) MPI
7) LPI
8) Dimension Check
9) Oxide scale thickness measurement
10) Intelligent Pigging
11) Free Span Measurement
12) Cathodic protection.
The Different reports that can be generated for the recorded data are as under
1) Audit Report for Ultra Wall Thickness
2) Audit for Ultra Wall Thickness for MAWT defined
3) Cathodic protection Measurement
4) MPI Measurement

Page 316 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


5) LPI Measurement
6) Dimension Check Measurement
7) Freespan Measurement
8) Ultrasonic wall thickness
9) Oxide Scale Thickness Measurement
10) Intelligent Pigging Inspection
11) Corrosion Coupons
12) Corrosion Probe Data
13) Radiography Data
14) Teletest Data
In the following section we would be discussing the windows which form the part of the
Monitoring data module:
1) Configuration setup windows
2) Asset Management Monitoring data tab
3) Single entry All Inspection Methoss
Inspection Method Windows
4) Ultra Wall thickness window
5) Radiography Data window
6) Corrosion Probe window
7) Corrosion Coupon window
8) Cathodic Protection window
9) Oxide Scale Measurement window
10) Dimension Check window
11) Teletest window
12) Intelligent Pigging window
13) Freespan Measurement window
14) Magnetic particle Inspection window
15) Liquid Penetrant Inspection window

18.1 ASSET MANGEMENT MONITORING DATA TAB


The Monitoring data tab, which is a tab in the Asset management window, will show all the
monitoring data available for the Asset at one go.
Note:- The data is going to appear in this tab is as follows
When there is atleast one or more then one UTWT readings has been registered into the
system.
Below is the screen shot of the monitoring data tab
Figure 10. Layout of the Monitoring Tab in the Asset Management Window.
The Ellipse in the above screen show the list section of the window wherein the list of all the
inspections registered into the system for UTWT for the different test points which in turn
corresponds to the level of the Asset Hierarchy selected in the tree as shown below.

Page 317 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Figure11. Depicting the Asset hierarchy according to which data gets displayed in the
Monitoring tab on the right.
The list will have the columns of
1. Tag
2. Feature.
3. Testpoint
4. Inspection Date
5. Report Number
6. Other related columns for the inspection Method
These columns will precisely give an idea of the Testpoint location and level in the
Hierarchy as well as give the precise dates as on which the measurement were done.
Apart from some details of the inspection.
The details of the Record can be reviewed by selecting the record in the list and the
Details section below will reflect all the concerned details. This is shown below in the
elliptical area.

Page 318 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Figure12. Depicting the Details section of the Inspection data.

Pre-requisites
1. The Monitor Data Tab as a whole will appear only once the user is at the Tag or
Feature or Testpoint level of the Asset Hierarchy tree. In the other levels in the Asset
management window the monitoring data tab will not appear and in the window
Single Entry All Inspection methods, nothing appears or it appears blank.
2. The different Inspection Method tabs within the Monitor data tab will appears only
when.
a. For the Monitoring type there is atleast one or more than one test points
defined of the Tag or the Feature. And if user is directly at the testpoint level
then the corresponding tab will appear only if the Monitoring type of the
Testpoint is matching with the Monitoring Tab name.
b. If the testpoints of the Monitoring Type have a approval flag of A ie
Approved.
c. If the link status of the testpoint and the immediate predecessor of the
testpoint in the asset tree under consideration is not D or deleted.
d. If the class values of the Monitoring Type is defined in the window Define
Class values for the class type MONTYP.
e. Only if the Reference code for the desired Monitoring type, is also registered
in the References masters window of Administrative module for the
reference type as LNKIMN. ie for every MONTYP defined in the Class
values have to have a related record in the Reference master table of
sys_reference_t. for example the class value of UTWT has the reference code
of UTWT record in the reference table ( technically ar_class_t record is
linked to the record in sys_reference_t).

Page 319 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


3. When there is at least one or more then one UTWT readings has been registered into
the system.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Save button:- User can change or rectify some of the data that has already been
registered into the system. Here it is to be noted that fields in the window will follow
the general norm in the application ie the Display only fields will have box borders
and mandatory fields will have white background. Eg Updated user and updated date
is display only field and will always appear with box borders. Use the Save Toolbar
button to finally save the changes and update into the database once user is finished
with modifications.
2. Insert button:- Register new inspection into the system.
When user attempts to insert a record, all the columns initially remain blank except
the inspection date column, which by default will have todays date.
In the Insert option, the columns
a.) Feature and
b.) Testpoint behave differently based on the asset level of selection.
 At Tag Level Initially the Feature dropdown will be available and the
Testpoint dropdown will be display only. On clicking the Feature column, it
will show a list of all the features under the Tag having testpoints of the
corresponding monitoring type. Once there feature is selected the Testpoint
column appears editable and dropdown is active and clicking on the testpoint
it will show a list of all the testpoints under the feature selected earlier and of
the corresponding monitoring type .
 At Feature Level - The Feature dropdown will appear display only with the
feature name already selected as the feature selected in the Asset tree. The
testpoint column on clicking will list all the testpoints under the feature and
the corresponding monitoring type.
 At testpoint level - Both the Feature and the Testpoint column will be
display only with the data according to the testpoint selected in the Asset tree.
Once the Feature and Testpoint has been selected the other columns can be filled
in to finally press the Save Toolbar button to register the data into the system.
3. Print button:- Takes a printout of the current data under observation . User can user
the print preview option to view the layout of the report. This is depicted in the
figure below.
4. Delete button:- User can user this toolbar button to delete a record from the list of
the data appearing. The system will softly ask Do you wish to Delete the selected
record and will delete only if yes is the option selected. The list will get automatically
refreshed once deleted.
5. Refresh button:- The option is available to the user to refresh the list so as to
reflect some of the changes that might be done to the data through some other
window and that might have an impact on the data here . Or there is an parallel entry
being done and this option will just show what is there in the system at the moment.
6. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM Application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.

Page 320 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.
4. The user needs to have the MONEDT responsibility to edit the monitor data.
5. The user needs to have the MONDEL responsibility to delete any Monitor data
record.

Navigation
Mainmenu  Asset Management  Asset Management

Column Description
Note:- based on the Inspection type the columns differ.

Report
None.

18.2 ULTRASONIC WALL THICKNESS INSPECTION METHOD


This window will allow the user to register Ultra Wall Thickness records into the system.
Once registered, they can be accessed anytime and anywhere, wherever the GALIOM
Application is available to the user.

Pre-requisites
1. The Monitor Data Tab as a whole will appear only once the user is at the Tag or
Feature or Testpoint level of the Asset Hierarchy tree. In the other levels in the Asset
management window the monitoring data tab will not appear and in the window
Single Entry All Inspection methods, nothing appears or it appears blank.

Page 321 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


2. The different Inspection Method tabs within the Monitor data tab will appears only
when.
a. For the Monitoring type there is atleast one or more than one test points
defined of the Tag or the Feature. And if user is directly at the testpoint level
then the corresponding tab will appear only if the Monitoring type of the
Testpoint is matching with the Monitoring Tab name.
b. If the testpoints of the Monitoring Type have a approval flag of A ie
Approved.
c. If the link status of the testpoint and the immediate predecessor of the
testpoint in the asset tree under consideration is not D or deleted.
d. If the class values of the Monitoring Type is defined in the window Define
Class values for the class type MONTYP.
e. Only if the Reference code for the desired Monitoring type, is also registered
in the References masters window of Administrative module for the
reference type as LNKIMN. ie for every MONTYP defined in the Class
values have to have a related record in the Reference master table of
sys_reference_t. for example the class value of UTWT has the reference code
of UTWT record in the reference table ( technically ar_class_t record is
linked to the record in sys_reference_t).
4. When there is at least one or more then one UTWT readings has been registered into
the system.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:-. The system inserts a new record in the selected inspection tab.
2. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record in the Inspection tab. Before
deleting the record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete
the selected record with Yes and No options. If the user selects the yes button, the
system deletes the selected record. If the user selects the No button, the system will
not delete the selected record.
3. Save button: - The system save the record.
4. Refresh button:- Refresh the current display screen.
5. Print button:- The system display the print setup window, to select the printer by
the user to print the current display screen.
6. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application

Responsibilities
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.


Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.
The user needs to have the MONEDT responsibility to edit the monitor data
The user needs to have the MONDEL responsibility to delete any Monitor data
record.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
Monitoring data tab.
Click on Ultra Wall Thickness tab

Select the

Page 322 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Feature (M)
a. This column represents the feature name of the testoint under observation
This column represents the feature name of the testoint under observation.
b. Validation check on the column Please select Feature First message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.
2. Testpoint(M)
a. The column represents the Testpoint name of the testpoint under
observation.
b. Validation check on the column Please select Testpoint message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.
3. Insp . Date (M)
a. This column represents the Inspection date for the record.
b. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Inspection date is Mandatory .
4. Report No (M)
a. The column represents the Report Name for the Inspection under
observation.
b. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Report Number is Mandatory.
5. Nom.WT (D)
a. This column represents the Nominal wall thickness as defined for the feature
corresponding to the testpoint and gets automatically loaded when the
inspection record is saved.

Page 323 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


6. MAWT (D)
a. The column represents the Minimun allowable wall thickness as defined for
the feature under which the testpoint is located. This column gets
automatically loaded when the inspection record is saved.
7. R1 (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
8. R2(O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
9. R3 (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
10. R4 (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
11. R5 (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
12. R6 (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
13. R7 (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
14. R8 (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.

Page 324 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


15. R9 (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
16. R10 (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
17. R11 (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
18. R12 (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
19. Cond.1 (O)
a. Condition code 1 for the inspection done.
20. Cond.2 (O)
a. Condition code 2 for the inspection done.
21. Cond.3 (O)
a. Condition code 3 for the inspection done.
22. Cond.4 (O)
a. Condition code 4 for the inspection done.
23. MIN.WT (D)
a. Column represents the Minimum wall thickness measured during the
inspection. This gets automatically computed once the data for the readings
R1 R12 are available and this occurs at after the save has been done . In
case of modification too the computation is refreshed.
24. MAX.WT (D)
a. Column represents the Maximum wall thickness measured during the
inspection. This gets automatically computed once the data for the readings
R1 R12 are available and this occurs at after the save has been done . In
case of modification too the computation is refreshed.
25. AVG.WT (D)
a. Column represents the Average wall thickness measured during the
inspection. This gets automatically computed once the data for the readings
R1 R12 are available and this occurs at after the save has been done . In
case of modification too the computation is refreshed.
Page 325 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

26. Defect Width (O)


a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
27. Defect Length (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
28. Diameter (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
29. Circumference (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
30. Insp Comments (O)
a. Inspection specific comments on the inspection.
31. Updated Date (D)
a. Todays or the system date is automatically loaded into the filed once data is
registered.
32. Updated user (D)
a. User code of the user updating the data is automatically loaded into the field
once data is registered.
REPORT
File
Print Preview

Page 326 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

18.3 INSPECTION OF RADIOGRAPHY DATA


This window will allow the user to register Radiography data records into the system. Once
registered, they can be accessed anytime and anywhere, wherever the GALIOM Application
is available to the user.

Pre-requisites
1. The Monitor Data Tab as a whole will appear only once the user is at the Tag or
Feature or Testpoint level of the Asset Hierarchy tree. In the other levels in the Asset
management window the monitoring data tab will not appear and in the window
Single Entry All Inspection methods, nothing appears or it appears blank.
2. The different Inspection Method tabs within the Monitor data tab will appears only
when.
a. For the Monitoring type there is atleast one or more than one test points
defined of the Tag or the Feature. And if user is directly at the testpoint level
then the corresponding tab will appear only if the Monitoring type of the
Testpoint is matching with the Monitoring Tab name.
b. If the testpoints of the Monitoring Type have a approval flag of A ie
Approved.
c. If the link status of the testpoint and the immediate predecessor of the
testpoint in the asset tree under consideration is not D or deleted.
d. If the class values of the Monitoring Type is defined in the window Define
Class values for the class type MONTYP.
e. Only if the Reference code for the desired Monitoring type, is also registered
in the References masters window of Administrative module for the
reference type as LNKIMN. ie for every MONTYP defined in the Class
values have to have a related record in the Reference master table of
sys_reference_t. for example the class value of UTWT has the reference code
of UTWT record in the reference table ( technically ar_class_t record is
linked to the record in sys_reference_t).

Page 327 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


3. When there is at least one or more then one UTWT readings has been registered into
the system.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:-. The system inserts a new record in the selected inspection tab.
2. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record in the Inspection tab. Before
deleting the record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete
the selected record with Yes and No options. If the user selects the yes button, the
system deletes the selected record. If the user selects the No button, the system will
not delete the selected record.
3. Save button: - The system save the record.
4. Refresh button:- Refresh the current display screen.
5. Print button:- The system display the print setup window, to select the printer by
the user to print the current display screen.
6. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application

Responsibilities
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.


Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.
The user needs to have the MONEDT responsibility to edit the monitor data
The user needs to have the MONDEL responsibility to delete any Monitor data
record.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
Monitoring data tab.
Click on Radiography Data tab

Select the

Column Description
1. Feature (M)
Page 328 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


a. This column represents the feature name of the testoint under observation.
b. Validation check on the column Please select Feature First message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.
2. Testpoint(M)
a. The column represents the Testpoint name of the testpoint under
observation.
b. Validation check on the column Please select Testpoint message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.
3. Insp . Date (M)
a. This column represents the Inspection date for the record.
b. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Inspection date is Mandatory .
4. Report No (M)
a. The column represents the Report Name for the Inspection under
observation.
b. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Report Number is Mandatory.
5. Nom.WT (D)
a. This column represents the Nominal wall thickness as defined for the feature
corresponding to the testpoint and gets automatically loaded when the
inspection record is saved.
6. MAWT (D)
a. The column represents the Minimun allowable wall thickness as defined for
the feature under which the testpoint is located. This column gets
automatically loaded when the inspection record is saved.
7. R1 (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
8. R2(O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
9. R3 (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
10. R4 (O)
a. Inspection specific data.

Page 329 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
11. Flow direction (O)
a. Inspection specific textual data.
12. Orientation (O)
a. Inspection specific textual data.
13. Cond.1 (O)
a. Condition code 1 for the inspection done.
14. Cond.2 (O)
a. Condition code 2 for the inspection done.
15. Cond.3 (O)
a. Condition code 3 for the inspection done.
16. Cond.4 (O)
a. Condition code 4 for the inspection done.
17. NRWT(O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
18. Defect Depth(O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
19. Defect Length (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
20. Datum Distance(O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
21. Comments (O)
a. Inspection specific comments on the inspection.
22. Updated Date (D)
a. Todays or the system date is automatically loaded into the filed once data is
registered.

Page 330 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


23. Updated user (D)
a. User code of the user updating the data is automatically loaded into the field
once data is registered.
REPORT
File
Print Preview

18.4 INSPECTION OF TELETEST


This window will allow the user to register Teletest data records into the system. Once
registered, they can be accessed anytime and anywhere, wherever the GALIOM Application
is available to the user.

Pre-requisites
1. The Monitor Data Tab as a whole will appear only once the user is at the Tag or
Feature or Testpoint level of the Asset Hierarchy tree. In the other levels in the Asset
management window the monitoring data tab will not appear and in the window
Single Entry All Inspection methods, nothing appears or it appears blank.
2. The different Inspection Method tabs within the Monitor data tab will appears only
when.
a. For the Monitoring type there is atleast one or more than one test points
defined of the Tag or the Feature. And if user is directly at the testpoint level
then the corresponding tab will appear only if the Monitoring type of the
Testpoint is matching with the Monitoring Tab name.
b. If the testpoints of the Monitoring Type have a approval flag of A ie
Approved.
c. If the link status of the testpoint and the immediate predecessor of the
testpoint in the asset tree under consideration is not D or deleted.
d. If the class values of the Monitoring Type is defined in the window Define
Class values for the class type MONTYP.
e. Only if the Reference code for the desired Monitoring type, is also registered
in the References masters window of Administrative module for the
reference type as LNKIMN. ie for every MONTYP defined in the Class
values have to have a related record in the Reference master table of
sys_reference_t. for example the class value of UTWT has the reference code
of UTWT record in the reference table ( technically ar_class_t record is
linked to the record in sys_reference_t).
3. When there is at least one or more then one UTWT readings has been registered into
the system.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:-. The system inserts a new record in the selected inspection tab.
2. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record in the Inspection tab. Before
deleting the record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete
the selected record with Yes and No options. If the user selects the yes button, the
system deletes the selected record. If the user selects the No button, the system will
not delete the selected record.
3. Save button: - The system save the record.
4. Refresh button:- Refresh the current display screen.
Page 331 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


5. Print button:- The system display the print setup window, to select the printer by
the user to print the current display screen.
6. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application

Responsibilities
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.


Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.
The user needs to have the MONEDT responsibility to edit the monitor data
The user needs to have the MONDEL responsibility to delete any Monitor data
record.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
Monitoring data tab.
Click on Teletest tab

Select the

Column Description
1. Feature (M)
a. This column represents the feature name of the testoint under observation.
b. Validation check on the column Please select Feature First message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.
2. Testpoint(M)
a. The column represents the Testpoint name of the testpoint under
observation.
b. Validation check on the column Please select Testpoint message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.

Page 332 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

3. Insp . Date (M)


a. This column represents the Inspection date for the record.
b. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Inspection date is Mandatory .
4. Report No (M)
a. The column represents the Report Name for the Inspection under
observation.
b. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Report Number is Mandatory.
5. Nom.WT (D)
a. This column represents the Nominal wall thickness as defined for the feature
corresponding to the testpoint and gets automatically loaded when the
inspection record is saved.
6. MAWT (D)
a. The column represents the Minimum allowable wall thickness as defined for
the feature under which the testpoint is located. This column gets
automatically loaded when the inspection record is saved.
7. R1 (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
8. R2(O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
9. R3 (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
10. R4 (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
11. Outside Diameter(O)
a. Inspection specific textual data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0. the field will only
allow user to enter up to 3 places of decimal only.

Page 333 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


12. Distance Covered (O)
a. Inspection specific textual data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0. the field will only
allow user to enter up to 3 places of decimal only.
13. External Clock Position (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
14. External Length (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
15. External Width (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
16. Maximum Pit Depth (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
17. Adjusted Wall thickness (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
18. Wall loss (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
19. Internal length (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
20. Internal Width (O)
a. Inspection specific data.

Page 334 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
21. Coating Type (O)
a. Inspection specific textual data.
22. Cond.1 (O)
a. Condition code 1 for the inspection done.
23. Cond.2 (O)
a. Condition code 2 for the inspection done.
24. Cond.3 (O)
a. Condition code 3 for the inspection done.
25. Cond.4 (O)
a. Condition code 4 for the inspection done.
26. Comments (O)
a. Inspection specific comments on the inspection.
27. Updated Date (D)
a. Todays or the system date is automatically loaded into the filed once data is
registered.
28. Updated user (D)
a. User code of the user updating the data is automatically loaded into the field
once data is registered.
REPORT
File
Print Preview

18.5 INSPECTION OF CORROSION COUPON


This window will allow the user to register Corrosion Coupon data records into the system.
Once registered, they can be accessed anytime and anywhere, wherever the GALIOM
Application is available to the user.

Pre-requisites
1. The Monitor Data Tab as a whole will appear only once the user is at the Tag or
Feature or Testpoint level of the Asset Hierarchy tree. In the other levels in the Asset
management window the monitoring data tab will not appear and in the window
Single Entry All Inspection methods, nothing appears or it appears blank.
2. The different Inspection Method tabs within the Monitor data tab will appears only
when.
a. For the Monitoring type there is atleast one or more than one test points
defined of the Tag or the Feature. And if user is directly at the testpoint level
then the corresponding tab will appear only if the Monitoring type of the
Testpoint is matching with the Monitoring Tab name.

Page 335 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


b. If the testpoints of the Monitoring Type have a approval flag of A ie
Approved.
c. If the link status of the testpoint and the immediate predecessor of the
testpoint in the asset tree under consideration is not D or deleted.
d. If the class values of the Monitoring Type is defined in the window Define
Class values for the class type MONTYP.
e. Only if the Reference code for the desired Monitoring type, is also registered
in the References masters window of Administrative module for the
reference type as LNKIMN. ie for every MONTYP defined in the Class
values have to have a related record in the Reference master table of
sys_reference_t. for example the class value of UTWT has the reference code
of UTWT record in the reference table ( technically ar_class_t record is
linked to the record in sys_reference_t).
3. When there is at least one or more then one UTWT readings has been registered into
the system.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:-. The system inserts a new record in the selected inspection tab.
2. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record in the Inspection tab. Before
deleting the record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete
the selected record with Yes and No options. If the user selects the yes button, the
system deletes the selected record. If the user selects the No button, the system will
not delete the selected record.
3. Save button: - The system save the record.
4. Refresh button:- Refresh the current display screen.
5. Print button:- The system display the print setup window, to select the printer by
the user to print the current display screen.
6. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application

Responsibilities
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.


Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.
The user needs to have the MONEDT responsibility to edit the monitor data
The user needs to have the MONDEL responsibility to delete any Monitor data
record.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
Monitoring data tab.
Click on corrosion coupon tab

Select the

Page 336 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Feature (M)
a. This column represents the feature name of the testoint under observation.
b. Validation check on the column Please select Feature First message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.
2. Testpoint(M)
a. The column represents the Testpoint name of the testpoint under
observation.
b. Validation check on the column Please select Testpoint message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.
3. Insp . Date (M)
a. This column represents the Inspection date for the record.
b. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Inspection date is Mandatory.
4. Report No (M)
a. The column represents the Report Name for the Inspection under
observation.
b. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Report Number is Mandatory.
5. Serial No (O)
a. Inspection specific textual data.
6. Date Install (O)
a. Inspection specific date.
b. Validation check on the column if user attempts to enter a non date specific
data then the system will prompt the message Please Enter Valid date.
7. Date Retrieve (O)

Page 337 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


a. Inspection specific date.
b. Validation check on the column if user attempts to enter a non date specific
data then the system will prompt the message Please Enter Valid date.
8. Days exposed(O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
9. Initial Weight (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0. The field will only
allow user to enter up to 3 places of decimal only.
10. Final Weight (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0. The field will only
allow user to enter up to 3 places of decimal only.
11. Corrosion Rate(O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0. the field will only
allow user to enter up to 3 places of decimal only.
12. Area factor (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0. The field will only
allow user to enter up to 3 places of decimal only.
13. Remarks (O)
a. Inspection specific comments on the inspection done.
14. Cond.1 (O)
a. Condition code 1 for the inspection done.
15. Cond.2 (O)
a. Condition code 2 for the inspection done.
16. Cond.3 (O)
a. Condition code 3 for the inspection done.
17. Cond.4 (O)
a. Condition code 4 for the inspection done.
Page 338 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

18. Comments (O)


a. Inspection specific comments on the inspection.
19. Updated Date (D)
a. Todays or the system date is automatically loaded into the filed once data is
registered.
20. Updated user (D)
a. User code of the user updating the data is automatically loaded into the field
once data is registered.
REPORT
File
Print Preview

18.6 INSPECTION OF CORROSION PROBE


This window will allow the user to register Corrosion Probe data records into the system.
Once registered, they can be accessed anytime and anywhere, wherever the GALIOM
Application is available to the user.

Pre-requisites
1. The Monitor Data Tab as a whole will appear only once the user is at the Tag or
Feature or Testpoint level of the Asset Hierarchy tree. In the other levels in the Asset
management window the monitoring data tab will not appear and in the window
Single Entry All Inspection methods, nothing appears or it appears blank.
2. The different Inspection Method tabs within the Monitor data tab will appears only
when.
a. For the Monitoring type there is atleast one or more than one test points
defined of the Tag or the Feature. And if user is directly at the testpoint level
then the corresponding tab will appear only if the Monitoring type of the
Testpoint is matching with the Monitoring Tab name.
b. If the testpoints of the Monitoring Type have a approval flag of A ie
Approved.
c. If the link status of the testpoint and the immediate predecessor of the
testpoint in the asset tree under consideration is not D or deleted.
d. If the class values of the Monitoring Type is defined in the window Define
Class values for the class type MONTYP.
e. Only if the Reference code for the desired Monitoring type, is also registered
in the References masters window of Administrative module for the
reference type as LNKIMN. ie for every MONTYP defined in the Class
values have to have a related record in the Reference master table of
sys_reference_t. for example the class value of UTWT has the reference code
of UTWT record in the reference table ( technically ar_class_t record is
linked to the record in sys_reference_t).
3. When there is at least one or more then one UTWT readings has been registered into
the system.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:-. The system inserts a new record in the selected inspection tab.
Page 339 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


2. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record in the Inspection tab. Before
deleting the record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete
the selected record with Yes and No options. If the user selects the yes button, the
system deletes the selected record. If the user selects the No button, the system will
not delete the selected record.
3. Save button: - The system save the record.
4. Refresh button:- Refresh the current display screen.
5. Print button:- The system display the print setup window, to select the printer by
the user to print the current display screen.
6. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application

Responsibilities
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.


Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.
The user needs to have the MONEDT responsibility to edit the monitor data
The user needs to have the MONDEL responsibility to delete any Monitor data
record.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
Monitoring data tab.
Click on corrosion Probe tab

Select the

Column Description
1. Feature (M)
a. This column represents the feature name of the testpoint under observation.
b. Validation check on the column Please select Feature First message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.
2. Testpoint(M)

Page 340 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


a. The column represents the Testpoint name of the testpoint under
observation.
b. Validation check on the column Please select Testpoint message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.
3. Insp . Date (M)
a. This column represents the Inspection date for the record.
b. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Inspection date is Mandatory .
4. Report No (M)
a. The column represents the Report Name for the Inspection under
observation.
b. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Report Number is Mandatory.
5. Serial No(O)
a. Inspection specific textual data.
6. Date Install (O)
a. Inspection specific date.
b. Validation check on the column if user attempts to enter a non date specific
data then the system will prompt the message Please Enter Valid date.
7. Date retrieve (O)
a. Inspection specific date.
b. Validation check on the column if user attempts to enter a non date specific
data then the system will prompt the message Please Enter Valid date.
8. Days exposed (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
9. Initial weight (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
10. Final weight (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
11. Corrosion Rate (O)
a. Inspection specific textual data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0. the field will only
allow user to enter up to 3 places of decimal only.
Page 341 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

12. Remarks (O)


a. Inspection specific comments on the inspection done.
13. Cond.1 (O)
a. Condition code 1 for the inspection done.
14. Cond.2 (O)
a. Condition code 2 for the inspection done.
15. Cond.3 (O)
a. Condition code 3 for the inspection done.
16. Cond.4 (O)
a. Condition code 4 for the inspection done.
17. Comments (O)
a. Inspection specific comments on the inspection.
18. Updated Date (D)
a. Todays or the system date is automatically loaded into the filed once data is
registered.
19. Updated user (D)
a. User code of the user updating the data is automatically loaded into the field
once data is registered.
REPORT
File
Print Preview

18.7 INSPECATION OF MAGNETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION


This window will allow the user to register Magnetic Particle Inspection records into the
system. Once registered, they can be accessed anytime and anywhere, wherever the
GALIOM Application is available to the user.

Pre-requisites
1. The Monitor Data Tab as a whole will appear only once the user is at the Tag or
Feature or Testpoint level of the Asset Hierarchy tree. In the other levels in the Asset
management window the monitoring data tab will not appear and in the window
Single Entry All Inspection methods, nothing appears or it appears blank.
2. The different Inspection Method tabs within the Monitor data tab will appears only
when.
a. For the Monitoring type there is atleast one or more than one test points
defined of the Tag or the Feature. And if user is directly at the testpoint level
then the corresponding tab will appear only if the Monitoring type of the
Testpoint is matching with the Monitoring Tab name.
b. If the testpoints of the Monitoring Type have a approval flag of A ie
Approved.

Page 342 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


c. If the link status of the testpoint and the immediate predecessor of the
testpoint in the asset tree under consideration is not D or deleted.
d. If the class values of the Monitoring Type is defined in the window Define
Class values for the class type MONTYP.
e. Only if the Reference code for the desired Monitoring type, is also registered
in the References masters window of Administrative module for the
reference type as LNKIMN. ie for every MONTYP defined in the Class
values have to have a related record in the Reference master table of
sys_reference_t. for example the class value of UTWT has the reference code
of UTWT record in the reference table ( technically ar_class_t record is
linked to the record in sys_reference_t).
3. When there is at least one or more then one UTWT readings has been registered into
the system.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:-. The system inserts a new record in the selected inspection tab.
2. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record in the Inspection tab. Before
deleting the record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete
the selected record with Yes and No options. If the user selects the yes button, the
system deletes the selected record. If the user selects the No button, the system will
not delete the selected record.
3. Save button: - The system save the record.
4. Refresh button:- Refresh the current display screen.
5. Print button:- The system display the print setup window, to select the printer by
the user to print the current display screen.
6. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application

Responsibilities
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.


Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.
The user needs to have the MONEDT responsibility to edit the monitor data
The user needs to have the MONDEL responsibility to delete any Monitor data
record.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
Monitoring data tab.
Click on Magnetic particle inspection tab

Select the

Page 343 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Feature (M)
a. This column represents the feature name of the testoint under observation.
b. Validation check on the column Please select Feature First message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.
2. Testpoint(M)
a. The column represents the Testpoint name of the testpoint under
observation.
b. Validation check on the column Please select Testpoint message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.
3. Insp . Date (M)
a. This column represents the Inspection date for the record.
c. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Inspection date is Mandatory .
4. Report No (M)
a. The column represents the Report Name for the Inspection under
observation.
b. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Report Number is Mandatory.
5. Location (O)
a. Inspection specific textual data.
6. Parts name (O)
a. Inspection specific textual data.
7. Drawing Number (O)
a. Inspection specific text data specifying the drawing number enclosed.

Page 344 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

8. Procedure Reference(O)
a. Inspection specific text data specifying the procedure followed for
measurement.
9. Surface condition (O)
a. Dropdown list for the specifying the surface condition during Inspection.
10. Dry or Wet method used (O)
a. List options for the method used for Inspection.
11. HW AC DC Yoke (O)
a. Dropdown list for the specifying conditions during Inspection.
12. Magnetization Type (O)
a. Inspection specific comments on the inspection done.
13. Prod Spacing and magnetization (O)
a. Inspection specific comments on the inspection done.
14. Demagnetized (O)
a. Check box to specify if Demagnetized or not . In case Demagnetized please
check the check box.
15. Examination result (O)
a. Inspection specific comments on the inspection done.
16. Imprint location and relevant indicators (O)
a. Inspection specific comments on the inspection done.
17. Cond.1 (O)
a. Condition code 1 for the inspection done.
18. Cond.2 (O)
a. Condition code 2 for the inspection done.
19. Cond.3 (O)
a. Condition code 3 for the inspection done.
20. Cond.4 (O)
a. Condition code 4 for the inspection done.
21. Accepted (O)
a. Check box to specify if the Inspection data has been accepted.
22. CT Noticed (O)
a. Check box to specify if CT Noticed.
23. Sketch Enclosed (O)
a. Check box to specify if the sketch is enclosed.
24. Updated Date (D)

Page 345 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


a. Todays or the system date is automatically loaded into the filed once data is
registered.
25. Updated user (D)
a. User code of the user updating the data is automatically loaded into the field
once data is registered.
REPORT
File
Print Preview

18.8 INSPECTION OF LIQUID PENETRATION


This window will allow the user to register Liquid Penetration Inspection records into the
system. Once registered, they can be accessed anytime and anywhere, wherever the
GALIOM Application is available to the user.

Pre-requisites
1. The Monitor Data Tab as a whole will appear only once the user is at the Tag or
Feature or Testpoint level of the Asset Hierarchy tree. In the other levels in the Asset
management window the monitoring data tab will not appear and in the window
Single Entry All Inspection methods, nothing appears or it appears blank.
2. The different Inspection Method tabs within the Monitor data tab will appears only
when.
a. For the Monitoring type there is atleast one or more than one test points
defined of the Tag or the Feature. And if user is directly at the testpoint level
then the corresponding tab will appear only if the Monitoring type of the
Testpoint is matching with the Monitoring Tab name.
b. If the testpoints of the Monitoring Type have a approval flag of A ie
Approved.
c. If the link status of the testpoint and the immediate predecessor of the
testpoint in the asset tree under consideration is not D or deleted.
d. If the class values of the Monitoring Type is defined in the window Define
Class values for the class type MONTYP.
e. Only if the Reference code for the desired Monitoring type, is also registered
in the References masters window of Administrative module for the
reference type as LNKIMN. ie for every MONTYP defined in the Class
values have to have a related record in the Reference master table of
sys_reference_t. for example the class value of UTWT has the reference code
of UTWT record in the reference table ( technically ar_class_t record is
linked to the record in sys_reference_t).
3. When there is at least one or more then one UTWT readings has been registered into
the system.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:-. The system inserts a new record in the selected inspection tab.
2. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record in the Inspection tab. Before
deleting the record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete
the selected record with Yes and No options. If the user selects the yes button, the
Page 346 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

3.
4.
5.
6.

system deletes the selected record. If the user selects the No button, the system will
not delete the selected record.
Save button: - The system save the record.
Refresh button:- Refresh the current display screen.
Print button:- The system display the print setup window, to select the printer by
the user to print the current display screen.
Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application

Responsibilities
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.


Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.
The user needs to have the MONEDT responsibility to edit the monitor data
The user needs to have the MONDEL responsibility to delete any Monitor data
record.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
Monitoring data tab.
Click on Liquid Penetration tab

Select the

Column Description
1. Feature (M)
a. This column represents the feature name of the testoint under observation.
b. Validation check on the column Please select Feature First message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.
2. Testpoint(M)
a. The column represents the Testpoint name of the testpoint under
observation.

Page 347 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


b. Validation check on the column Please select Testpoint message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.
3. Insp . Date (M)
a. This column represents the Inspection date for the record.
b. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Inspection date is Mandatory .
4. Report No (M)
a. The column represents the Report Name for the Inspection under
observation.
b. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Report Number is Mandatory.
5. Location (O)
a. Inspection specific textual data.
6. Drawing Number (O)
a. Inspection specific text data specifying the drawing number enclosed.
7. Procedure Reference (O)
a. Inspection specific text data specifying the procedure followed for
measurement.
8. Surface condition (O)
a. Dropdown list for the specifying the surface condition during Inspection.
9. Penetrant supplier Details (O)
a. List options for the method used for Inspection.
10. Cleaner Supplier Details (O)
a. Dropdown list for the specifying conditions during Inspection.
11. Developer Supplier Details (O)
a. Inspection specific comments on the inspection done.
12. Part temperature (O)
a. Inspection specific comments on the inspection done.
13. Dwell time (O)
a. Check box to specify if Demagnetized or not. In case Demagnetized please
check the check box.
14. Develop time (O)
a. Inspection specific comments on the inspection done.
15. Examination Results (O)
a. Inspection specific comments on the inspection done.
16. Imprint location and relevant indicators (O)
a. Inspection specific comments on the inspection done.
17. Dr No (O)
Page 348 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


a. Inspection specific comments on the inspection done.
18. Cond.1 (O)
a. Condition code 1 for the inspection done.
19. Cond.2 (O)
a. Condition code 2 for the inspection done.
20. Cond.3 (O)
a. Condition code 3 for the inspection done.
21. Cond.4 (O)
a. Condition code 4 for the inspection done.
22. Updated Date (D)
a. Todays or the system date is automatically loaded into the filed once data is
registered.
23. Updated user (D)
a. User code of the user updating the data is automatically loaded into the field
once data is registered.
REPORT
File
Print Preview

18.9 INSPECTION OF DIMENSION CHECK


This window will allow the user to register Dimension Measurements data records into the
system. Once registered, they can be accessed anytime and anywhere, wherever the
GALIOM Application is available to the user.

Pre-requisites
1. The Monitor Data Tab as a whole will appear only once the user is at the Tag or
Feature or Testpoint level of the Asset Hierarchy tree. In the other levels in the Asset
management window the monitoring data tab will not appear and in the window
Single Entry All Inspection methods, nothing appears or it appears blank.
2. The different Inspection Method tabs within the Monitor data tab will appears only
when.
a. For the Monitoring type there is atleast one or more than one test points
defined of the Tag or the Feature. And if user is directly at the testpoint level
then the corresponding tab will appear only if the Monitoring type of the
Testpoint is matching with the Monitoring Tab name.
b. If the testpoints of the Monitoring Type have a approval flag of A ie
Approved.
c. If the link status of the testpoint and the immediate predecessor of the
testpoint in the asset tree under consideration is not D or deleted.
d. If the class values of the Monitoring Type is defined in the window Define
Class values for the class type MONTYP.
e. Only if the Reference code for the desired Monitoring type, is also registered
in the References masters window of Administrative module for the
reference type as LNKIMN. ie for every MONTYP defined in the Class

Page 349 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


values have to have a related record in the Reference master table of
sys_reference_t. for example the class value of UTWT has the reference code
of UTWT record in the reference table ( technically ar_class_t record is
linked to the record in sys_reference_t).
3. When there is at least one or more then one UTWT readings has been registered into
the system.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:-. The system inserts a new record in the selected inspection tab.
2. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record in the Inspection tab. Before
deleting the record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete
the selected record with Yes and No options. If the user selects the yes button, the
system deletes the selected record. If the user selects the No button, the system will
not delete the selected record.
3. Save button: - The system save the record.
4. Refresh button:- Refresh the current display screen.
5. Print button:- The system display the print setup window, to select the printer by
the user to print the current display screen.
6. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application

Responsibilities
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.


Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.
The user needs to have the MONEDT responsibility to edit the monitor data
The user needs to have the MONDEL responsibility to delete any Monitor data
record.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
Monitoring data tab.
Click on Dimension Check tab

Select the

Column Description
Page 350 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

1. Feature (M)
a. This column represents the feature name of the testoint under observation.
b. Validation check on the column Please select Feature First message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.
2. Testpoint(M)
a. The column represents the Testpoint name of the testpoint under
observation.
b. Validation check on the column Please select Testpoint message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.
3. Insp . Date (M)
a. This column represents the Inspection date for the record.
b. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Inspection date is Mandatory .
4. Report No (M)
a. The column represents the Report Name for the Inspection under
observation.
b. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Report Number is Mandatory.
5. Diameter (M)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0. The field will only
allow user to enter up to 3 places of decimal only.
c. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data in the
column, the system gives the message Diameter Measurement is Mandatory.
6. Thickness (M)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0. The field will only
allow user to enter up to 3 places of decimal only.
c. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data in the
column, the system gives the message Thickness Measurement is
Mandatory.
7. Cond.1 (O)
a. Condition code 1 for the inspection done.
8. Cond.2 (O)
a. Condition code 2 for the inspection done.
9. Cond.3 (O)
a. Condition code 3 for the inspection done.
10. Cond.4 (O)
a. Condition code 4 for the inspection done.
Page 351 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

11. Updated Date (D)


a. Todays or the system date is automatically loaded into the filed once data is
registered.
12. Updated user (D)
a. User code of the user updating the data is automatically loaded into the field
once data is registered.
REPORT
File
Print Preview

18.10 INSPECTION
OF
MEASUREMENT

OXIDE

SCALE

THICKNESS

This window will allow the user to register Oxide Scale Thickness Measurements data
records into the system. Once registered, they can be accessed anytime and anywhere,
wherever the GALIOM Application is available to the user.

Pre-requisites
1. The Monitor Data Tab as a whole will appear only once the user is at the Tag or
Feature or Testpoint level of the Asset Hierarchy tree. In the other levels in the Asset
management window the monitoring data tab will not appear and in the window
Single Entry All Inspection methods, nothing appears or it appears blank.
2. The different Inspection Method tabs within the Monitor data tab will appears only
when.
a. For the Monitoring type there is atleast one or more than one test points
defined of the Tag or the Feature. And if user is directly at the testpoint level
then the corresponding tab will appear only if the Monitoring type of the
Testpoint is matching with the Monitoring Tab name.
b. If the testpoints of the Monitoring Type have a approval flag of A ie
Approved.
c. If the link status of the testpoint and the immediate predecessor of the
testpoint in the asset tree under consideration is not D or deleted.
d. If the class values of the Monitoring Type is defined in the window Define
Class values for the class type MONTYP.
e. Only if the Reference code for the desired Monitoring type, is also registered
in the References masters window of Administrative module for the
reference type as LNKIMN. ie for every MONTYP defined in the Class
values have to have a related record in the Reference master table of
sys_reference_t. for example the class value of UTWT has the reference code
of UTWT record in the reference table ( technically ar_class_t record is
linked to the record in sys_reference_t).
3. When there is at least one or more then one UTWT readings has been registered into
the system.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:-. The system inserts a new record in the selected inspection tab.

Page 352 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


2. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record in the Inspection tab. Before
deleting the record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete
the selected record with Yes and No options. If the user selects the yes button, the
system deletes the selected record. If the user selects the No button, the system will
not delete the selected record.
3. Save button: - The system save the record.
4. Refresh button:- Refresh the current display screen.
5. Print button:- The system display the print setup window, to select the printer by
the user to print the current display screen.
6. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application

Responsibilities
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.


Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.
The user needs to have the MONEDT responsibility to edit the monitor data
The user needs to have the MONDEL responsibility to delete any Monitor data
record.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
Monitoring data tab.
Click on Oxide scale thickness measurement tab

Select the

Column Description
1. Feature (M)
a. This column represents the feature name of the testoint under observation.
b. Validation check on the column Please select Feature First message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.
2. Testpoint(M)
a. The column represents the Testpoint name of the testpoint under
observation.
b. Validation check on the column Please select Testpoint message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.
3. Insp . Date (M)

Page 353 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


a. This column represents the Inspection date for the record.
b. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Inspection date is Mandatory .
4. Report No (M)
a. The column represents the Report Name for the Inspection under
observation.
b. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Report Number is Mandatory.
5. Oxide scale Thickness (M)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0. The field will only
allow user to enter up to 3 places of decimal only.
c. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data in the
column, the system gives the message Thickness Measurement are
Mandatory.
6. Tube Thickness (M)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0. The field will only
allow user to enter up to 3 places of decimal only.
c. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data in the
column, the system gives the message Thickness Measurement ar e
Mandatory.
7. Temperature (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0. The field will only
allow user to enter up to 3 places of decimal only.
8. Residual Span (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0. The field will only
allow user to enter up to 3 places of decimal only.
9. Cond.1 (O)
a. Condition code 1 for the inspection done.
10. Cond.2 (O)
a. Condition code 2 for the inspection done.
11. Cond.3 (O)
a. Condition code 3 for the inspection done.

Page 354 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


12. Cond.4 (O)
a. Condition code 4 for the inspection done.
13. Updated Date (D)
a. Todays or the system date is automatically loaded into the filed once data is
registered.
14. Updated user (D)
a. User code of the user updating the data is automatically loaded into the field
once data is registered.
REPORT
File
Print Preview

18.11 INSPECTION OF INTELLIGENT PIGGING


This window will allow the user to register intelligent pigging Inspection data records into the
system. Once registered, they can be accessed anytime and anywhere, wherever the
GALIOM Application is available to the user.

Pre-requisites
1. The Monitor Data Tab as a whole will appear only once the user is at the Tag or
Feature or Testpoint level of the Asset Hierarchy tree. In the other levels in the Asset
management window the monitoring data tab will not appear and in the window
Single Entry All Inspection methods, nothing appears or it appears blank.
2. The different Inspection Method tabs within the Monitor data tab will appears only
when.
a. For the Monitoring type there is atleast one or more than one test points
defined of the Tag or the Feature. And if user is directly at the testpoint level
then the corresponding tab will appear only if the Monitoring type of the
Testpoint is matching with the Monitoring Tab name.
b. If the testpoints of the Monitoring Type have a approval flag of A ie
Approved.
c. If the link status of the testpoint and the immediate predecessor of the
testpoint in the asset tree under consideration is not D or deleted.
d. If the class values of the Monitoring Type is defined in the window Define
Class values for the class type MONTYP.
e. Only if the Reference code for the desired Monitoring type, is also registered
in the References masters window of Administrative module for the
reference type as LNKIMN. ie for every MONTYP defined in the Class
values have to have a related record in the Reference master table of
sys_reference_t. for example the class value of UTWT has the reference code
of UTWT record in the reference table ( technically ar_class_t record is
linked to the record in sys_reference_t).
3. When there is at least one or more then one UTWT readings has been registered into
the system.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:-. The system inserts a new record in the selected inspection tab.

Page 355 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


2. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record in the Inspection tab. Before
deleting the record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete
the selected record with Yes and No options. If the user selects the yes button, the
system deletes the selected record. If the user selects the No button, the system will
not delete the selected record.
3. Save button: - The system save the record.
4. Refresh button:- Refresh the current display screen.
5. Print button:- The system display the print setup window, to select the printer by
the user to print the current display screen.
6. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application

Responsibilities
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.


Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.
The user needs to have the MONEDT responsibility to edit the monitor data
The user needs to have the MONDEL responsibility to delete any Monitor data
record.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
Monitoring data tab.
Click on Intelligent Pigging tab

Select the

Column Description
1. Feature (M)
a. This column represents the feature name of the testoint under observation.
b. Validation check on the column Please select Feature First message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.
2. Testpoint(M)
Page 356 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


a. The column represents the Testpoint name of the testpoint under
observation.
b. Validation check on the column Please select Testpoint message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.
3. Insp . Date (M)
a. This column represents the Inspection date for the record.
b. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Inspection date is Mandatory .
4. Report No (M)
a. The column represents the Report Name for the Inspection under
observation.
c. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Report Number is Mandatory.
5. Ip runcode (O)
a. Inspection specific Textual data.
6. Log Distance (O)
a. Inspection specific Numeric data.
7. Temperature (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0. The field will only
allow user to enter up to 3 places of decimal only.
8. Defect Type (O)
a. Inspection specific textual data.
9. Description (O)
a. Inspection specific textual data.
10. Comments (O)
a. Inspection specific textual data.
11. Clock Position (O)
a. Inspection specific textual data.
12. Maximum Depth (O)
a. Inspection specific data
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
13. Average Depth (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.

Page 357 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


14. Length (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
15. Width (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
16. Nom. Wall thickness (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
17. ERF (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
18. Internal External Pipeline (O)
a. Inspection specific textual data.
19. Cond.1 (O)
a. Condition code 1 for the inspection done.
20. Cond.2 (O)
a. Condition code 2 for the inspection done.
21. Cond.3 (O)
a. Condition code 3 for the inspection done.
22. Cond.4 (O)
a. Condition code 4 for the inspection done.
23. Updated Date (D)
a. Todays or the system date is automatically loaded into the filed once data is
registered.
24. Updated user (D)
a. User code of the user updating the data is automatically loaded into the field
once data is registered.
REPORT
File
Print Preview

Page 358 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

18.12 INSPECTION OF FREE SPAN MEASUREMENT


This window will allow the user to register FreeSpan Measurement records into the system.
Once registered, they can be accessed anytime and anywhere, wherever the GALIOM
Application is available to the user.

Pre-requisites
1. The Monitor Data Tab as a whole will appear only once the user is at the Tag or
Feature or Testpoint level of the Asset Hierarchy tree. In the other levels in the Asset
management window the monitoring data tab will not appear and in the window
Single Entry All Inspection methods, nothing appears or it appears blank.
2. The different Inspection Method tabs within the Monitor data tab will appears only
when.
a. For the Monitoring type there is atleast one or more than one test points
defined of the Tag or the Feature. And if user is directly at the testpoint level
then the corresponding tab will appear only if the Monitoring type of the
Testpoint is matching with the Monitoring Tab name.
b. If the testpoints of the Monitoring Type have a approval flag of A ie
Approved.
c. If the link status of the testpoint and the immediate predecessor of the
testpoint in the asset tree under consideration is not D or deleted.
d. If the class values of the Monitoring Type is defined in the window Define
Class values for the class type MONTYP.
e. Only if the Reference code for the desired Monitoring type, is also registered
in the References masters window of Administrative module for the
reference type as LNKIMN. ie for every MONTYP defined in the Class
values have to have a related record in the Reference master table of
sys_reference_t. for example the class value of UTWT has the reference code
of UTWT record in the reference table ( technically ar_class_t record is
linked to the record in sys_reference_t).
3. When there is at least one or more then one UTWT readings has been registered into
the system.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:-. The system inserts a new record in the selected inspection tab.
2. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record in the Inspection tab. Before
deleting the record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete
the selected record with Yes and No options. If the user selects the yes button, the
system deletes the selected record. If the user selects the No button, the system will
not delete the selected record.
3. Save button: - The system save the record.
4. Refresh button:- Refresh the current display screen.
5. Print button:- The system display the print setup window, to select the printer by
the user to print the current display screen.
6. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
Page 359 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.
4. The user needs to have the MONEDT responsibility to edit the monitor data
5. The user needs to have the MONDEL responsibility to delete any Monitor data
record.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
Monitoring data tab.
Click on Free Span Measurement tab

Select the

Column Description
1. Feature (M)
a. This column represents the feature name of the testoint under observation.
b. Validation check on the column Please select Feature First message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.
2. Testpoint(M)
a. The column represents the Testpoint name of the testpoint under
observation.
b. Validation check on the column Please select Testpoint message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.
3. Insp . Date (M)
a. This column represents the Inspection date for the record.
c. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Inspection date is Mandatory .
4. Report No (M)
a. The column represents the Report Name for the Inspection under
observation.
b. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Report Number is Mandatory.
Page 360 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

5. Key Point Position (O)


a. Inspection specific Textual data.
6. Log Distance (O)
a. Inspection specific Numeric data.
7. Defect Type (O)
a. Inspection specific textual data.
8. Description (O)
a. Inspection specific textual data.
9. Comments (O)
a. Inspection specific textual data.
10. Features (O)
a. Inspection specific textual data.
11. First Sholder soil type (O)
a. Inspection specific Text data.
12. First Sholder transition (O)
a. Inspection specific Text data.
13. Second Sholder soil type (O)
a. Inspection specific Text data.
14. Second Sholder Transition (O)
a. Inspection specific Text data.
15. Average Gap (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
16. Maximum Gap (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
17. Length (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
18. Cond.1 (O)
a. Condition code 1 for the inspection done.
19. Cond.2 (O)
Page 361 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


a. Condition code 2 for the inspection done.
20. Cond.3 (O)
a. Condition code 3 for the inspection done.
21. Cond.4 (O)
a. Condition code 4 for the inspection done.
22. Updated Date (D)
a. Todays or the system date is automatically loaded into the filed once data is
registered.
23. Updated user (D)
a. User code of the user updating the data is automatically loaded into the field
once data is registered.
REPORT
File
Print Preview

18.13 INSPECTION OF CATHODIC PROTECTION


This window will allow the user to register Cathodic Protection Measurement records into
the system. Once registered, they can be accessed anytime and anywhere, wherever the
GALIOM Application is available to the user.

Pre-requisites
1. The Monitor Data Tab as a whole will appear only once the user is at the Tag or
Feature or Testpoint level of the Asset Hierarchy tree. In the other levels in the Asset
management window the monitoring data tab will not appear and in the window
Single Entry All Inspection methods, nothing appears or it appears blank.
2. The different Inspection Method tabs within the Monitor data tab will appears only
when.
a. For the Monitoring type there is atleast one or more than one test points
defined of the Tag or the Feature. And if user is directly at the testpoint level
then the corresponding tab will appear only if the Monitoring type of the
Testpoint is matching with the Monitoring Tab name.
b. If the testpoints of the Monitoring Type have a approval flag of A ie
Approved.
c. If the link status of the testpoint and the immediate predecessor of the
testpoint in the asset tree under consideration is not D or deleted.
d. If the class values of the Monitoring Type is defined in the window Define
Class values for the class type MONTYP.
e. Only if the Reference code for the desired Monitoring type, is also registered
in the References masters window of Administrative module for the
reference type as LNKIMN. ie for every MONTYP defined in the Class
values have to have a related record in the Reference master table of
sys_reference_t. for example the class value of UTWT has the reference code
of UTWT record in the reference table ( technically ar_class_t record is
linked to the record in sys_reference_t).

Page 362 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


3. When there is at least one or more then one UTWT readings has been registered into
the system.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:-. The system inserts a new record in the selected inspection tab.
2. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record in the Inspection tab. Before
deleting the record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete
the selected record with Yes and No options. If the user selects the yes button, the
system deletes the selected record. If the user selects the No button, the system will
not delete the selected record.
3. Save button: - The system save the record.
4. Refresh button:- Refresh the current display screen.
5. Print button:- The system display the print setup window, to select the printer by
the user to print the current display screen.
6. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application

Responsibilities
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.


Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.
The user needs to have the MONEDT responsibility to edit the monitor data
The user needs to have the MONDEL responsibility to delete any Monitor data
record.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
Monitoring data tab.
Click on Cathodic Protection tab

Select the

Column Description
1. Feature (M)

Page 363 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


a. This column represents the feature name of the testoint under observation.
b. Validation check on the column Please select Feature First message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.
2. Testpoint(M)
a. The column represents the Testpoint name of the testpoint under
observation.
b. Validation check on the column Please select Testpoint message is
displayed if the column is left blank on saving.
3. Insp . Date (M)
a. This column represents the Inspection date for the record.
b. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Inspection date is Mandatory .
4. Report No (M)
a. The column represents the Report Name for the Inspection under
observation.
c. Validation check on the column if tried to save without proper data , the
system gives the message Report Number is Mandatory.
5. Key Point Position (O)
a. Inspection specific Textual data.
6. Log Distance (O)
a. Inspection specific Numeric data.
b. validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
Cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
7. Measured Potential (O)
a. Inspection specific Numeric data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
8. Description (O)
a. Inspection specific textual data.
9. Comments (O)
a. Inspection specific textual data.
10. No. of Anodes Installed (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
11. Anode Consumption (O)
a. Inspection specific data.
b. Validation check on the column Data should be Numeric message will be
displayed if user tries to enter non numeric data in the column and Data
cannot be less than 0 if the number entered is less than 0.
Page 364 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

12. Cond.1 (O)


a. Condition code 1 for the inspection done.
13. Cond.2 (O)
a. Condition code 2 for the inspection done.
14. Cond.3 (O)
a. Condition code 3 for the inspection done.
15. Cond.4 (O)
a. Condition code 4 for the inspection done.
16. Updated Date (D)
a. Todays or the system date is automatically loaded into the filed once data is
registered.
17. Updated user (D)
a. User code of the user updating the data is automatically loaded into the field
once data is registered.
REPORT
File
Print Preview

18.14 THE SINGLE ENTRY WINDOW ALL INSPECTION


METHODS
This window will show all the monitoring data available for the Asset at one go. These are
the other window through which Inspection measurement can be registered into the system.
This window will may have two tabs on corresponding to representation of the historical
data and the other corresponding to the Graphical Presentation of the data. We discuss these
sections one by one. All these windows will have two sections

Page 365 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

1. The Left side or the encircled portion in the figure 23 will show the Feature and the
Testpoint . This is the fixed portion of the window and the horizontal scroll bar
given here need not be touched.
2. The Right side or the non-encircled portion of the window will show all the other
columns related to the measurement for registering the inspection into the system.
The Horizontal scroll will enable the user to do the same.
3. The window will have the Insert, Save, Delete, Print options enabled in tool bar.
4. User will be able to print preview the data in the landscape layout as it will reflect all
the data showing in the window.

Pre-requisites
1. The Tabs the the window will appear only once the user is at the Tag or Feature or
Testpoint level of the Asset Hierarchy tree. In the other levels in the Single Entry
All Inspection methods window nothing appears or it appears blank.
2. The different Inspection Method tabs within the Monitor data tab will appears only
when.
a. For the Monitoring type there is atleast one or more than one test points
defined of the Tag or the Feature. And if user is directly at the testpoint level
then the corresponding UTWT tab will appear only if the Monitoring type of
the Testpoint is UTWT. Thereby these tabs tabs dynamically based on the
testpoints monitoring type for the testpoints under the Tag or Feature.
b. If the testpoints of the Monitoring Type UTWT have a approval flag of A ie
Approved.
c. If the link status of the testpoint and the testpoint under consideration is not
D or deleted.
d. If the class values of the Monitoring Type is defined in the window Define
Class values.
e. Only the Reference code for the desired Monitoring type is also registered in
the references masters module for the reference type as LNKIMN. ie for
every MONTYP defined in the Class values have to have a related record in
the Reference master table of sys_reference_t. for example the class value of
UTWT has the reference code of UTWT record in the reference table (
technically ar_class_t record is linked to the record in sys_reference_t ).
3. When there is at least one or more then one UTWT readings has been registered into
the system.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:-. The system inserts a new record in the selected inspection tab
At the Tag level- All the testpoints under the TAG will appear at one go and user can
enter data as per measurements for all the testpoints in one shot. The Inspection date
will appear by default as the todays date and can be modified as per requirement.
The below figure depicts all the testpoints of the inspection Method UTWT defined
under the TAG. This appears once the insert button is clicked will automatically
refresh the Historical data window (as shown in the below screen)

Page 366 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

2.

3.
4.
5.
6.

a. At the feature level Similar to above all the testpoints defined under the
feature and of the inspection Method UTWT will come up as different
records in the Multiple data entry window.
b. At the testpoint level only one record will appear in the screen Multiple
data entry window , since the user is already at the testpoint level.
Delete button:- The system delete the selected record in the Inspection tab. Before
deleting the record, the system display the following message Do you wish to delete
the selected record with Yes and No options. If the user selects the yes button, the
system deletes the selected record. If the user selects the No button, the system will
not delete the selected record.
Save button: - The system save the record.
Refresh button:- Refresh the current display screen.
Print button:- The system display the print setup window, to select the printer by
the user to print the current display screen.
Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application

Responsibilities
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.


Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.
The user needs to have the MONEDT responsibility to edit the monitor data
The user needs to have the MONDEL responsibility to delete any Monitor data
record.

Navigation
Main Menu

Monitoring data

Single Entry All Inspection Methods.

Page 367 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
Based on the Inspection tabs select.
REPORT
None.
18.14.1 HOW TO ATTACH THE DOCUMENTS IN THE INSPECTION

TABS
To attach the documents in the inspection tabs, follow the below steps. User can attach one
or more documents depending on the requirement. . Each record hence has one of the two
images discussed below attached to it

Figure :- Document attachment option in the Monitoring data window for UTWT.

Page 368 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


image suggests the at least one or more than one documents are attached to the
Inspection record.
image suggests that no documents yet have been attached to the inspection record
In case user needs to attach additional documents to the already attached document, the user
can use the insert button once the Document listing is open. As in the Figure below.

Figure:- Depicting Insertion/Deletion of a document to the list of documents attached to


the inspection record.
Similar window as in fig.18 will appear for uploading the documents. Once the uploading is
done the documents will get automatically appended to the list of documents for the
Inspection record.
The delete option can be used to delete an attached document through the Attached
Document window as above figure.

volume
-

Insert Text data (Multi-line Text Editor)


The system will provide user with the Text Editor wherever there is a need to enter
text data in the column or the field. This can depicted as in the figure below
This Image represents the Multi-line Text Editor , as can be seen in the figure below

too.
The usage of the editor is simple, once user clicks on the image above the text editor opens
as the encircled portion in the figure below. User needs to enter the data in this editor and
then apply the changes . On Apply the text entered in the editor will automatically get loaded
in the column. Close button here will just close the Multi line editor without making any
changes to the data in the column.

Page 369 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Figure:- Depiction of the Multi line text editor available to various columns in Monitoring
data windows.
18.14.2 GRAPHICAL PRESENTATION TAB IN INSPECTION TABS
We Take the general example of the Ultra Wall Thickness Graphical presentation tab.
It is a line graph that shows you the Minimum Allowable Wall thickness variation over a
period of time for the Feature Testpoint.
Details of the Graph
Category will be the Feature-Testpoint combination
Value axis - is the data value of MAWT or the Minimum Allowable Wall Thickness.
The series will be according to the Year of measurement.

Page 370 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

18.15 EXPLANATION OF THE WINDOWS FOR DIFFERENT


INSPECTION METHODS
18.15.1 ULTRA WALL THICKNESS DATA
This window will allow the user to register Ultra Wall Thickness records into the system. The
functioning of the window in different modes is the same, as mentioned, generally, in the
above section. Once registered, they can be accessed anytime and anywhere, wherever the
GALIOM Application is available to the user.
Column Description
1. Feature (Display only)
a. This column represents the feature name of the testpoint under observation.
2. Testpoint(Display only)
a. The column represents name of the testpoint under observation.
Other columns:- remains column description are written in the section Ultra wall
thickness inspection method under the Monitored data section.
18.15.2 RADIOGRAPHY DATA
This window will allow the user to register Radiography data records into the system. The
functioning of the window in different modes is the same, as mentioned, generally, in the
above section. Once registered, they can be accessed anytime and anywhere, wherever the
GALIOM Application is available to the user.
Column Description
1. Feature (Display only)
a. This column represents the feature name of the testpoint under observation.
2. Testpoint (Display only)
a. The column represents name of the testpoint under observation.
Other columns:- remains column description are written in the section Inspection of
Radiography data under the Monitored data section.
18.15.3 TELETEST
This window will allow the user to register Teletest data records into the system. The
functioning of the window in different modes is the same, as mentioned, generally, in the
above section. Once registered, they can be accessed anytime and anywhere, wherever the
GALIOM Application is available to the user.
Column Description
1. Feature (Display only)
a. This column represents the feature name of the testpoint under observation.
3. Testpoint(Display only)
a. The column represents name of the testpoint under observation
Other columns:- remains column description are written in the section Inspection of
Teletest under the Monitored data section.

Page 371 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


18.15.4 CORROSION COUPON
This window will allow the user to register Corrosion Coupon data records into the system.
The functioning of the window in different modes is the same, as mentioned, generally, in
the above section. Once registered, they can be accessed anytime and anywhere, wherever
the GALIOM Application is available to the user.
Column Description
1. Feature (Display only)
b. This column represents the feature name of the testpoint under observation.
2. Testpoint(Display only)
a. The column represents name of the testpoint under observation.
Other columns:- remains column description are written in the section Inspection of
Corrosion coupon under the Monitored data section
18.15.5 CORROSION PROBE
This window will allow the user to register Corrosion Probe data records into the system.
The functioning of the window in different modes is the same, as mentioned, generally, in
the above section. Once registered, they can be accessed anytime and anywhere, wherever
the GALIOM Application is available to the user.
Column Description
1. Feature (Display only)
a. This column represents the feature name of the testpoint under observation.
2. Testpoint(Display only)
a. The column represents name of the testpoint under observation
Other columns:- remains column description are written in the section Inspection of
Corrosion Probe under the Monitored data section.
18.15.6 MPI
This window will allow the user to register Magnetic Particle Inspection records into the
system. The functioning of the window in different modes is the same, as mentioned,
generally, in the above section. Once registered, they can be accessed anytime and anywhere,
wherever the GALIOM Application is available to the user.
Column Description
1. Feature (Display only)
a.This column represents the feature name of the testpoint under observation.
2. Testpoint (Display only)
a. The column represents name of the testpoint under observation.
Other columns:- remains column description are written in the section Inspection of
Magnetic particle Inspection under the Monitored data section.

Page 372 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


18.15.7 LPI
This window will allow the user to register Liquid Penetrant Inspection records into the
system. The functioning of the window in different modes is the same, as mentioned,
generally, in the above section. Once registered, they can be accessed anytime and anywhere,
wherever the GALIOM Application is available to the user.
Column Description
1. Feature (Display only)
a.This column represents the feature name of the testpoint under observation.
2. Testpoint (Display only)
a. The column represents name of the testpoint under observation.
Other columns:- remains column description are written in the section Inspection of LPI
under the Monitored data section
18.15.8 DIMENSION CHECK
This window will allow the user to register Dimension Measurements data records into the
system. The functioning of the window in different modes is the same, as mentioned,
generally, in the above section. Once registered, they can be accessed anytime and anywhere,
wherever the GALIOM Application is available to the user.
Column Description
1. Feature (Display only)
a. This column represents the feature name of the testpoint under observation.
2. Testpoint (Display only)
a.The column represents name of the testpoint under observation
Other columns:- remains column description are written in the section Inspection of
Dimension check under the Monitored data section
18.15.9 OXIDE SCALE THICKNESS MEASUREMENT
This window will allow the user to register Oxide Scale Thickness Measurements data
records into the system. The functioning of the window in different modes is the same, as
mentioned, generally, in the above section. Once registered, they can be accessed anytime
and anywhere, wherever the GALIOM Application is available to the user.
Column Description
1. Feature (Display only)
a. This column represents the feature name of the testpoint under observation.
2. Testpoint (Display only)
a. The column represents name of the testpoint under observation.
Other columns:- remains column description are written in the section Inspection of Oxide
Scale thickness Measurement under the Monitored data section
18.15.10 INTELLIGENT PIGGING

Page 373 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


The functioning of the window in different modes is the same, as mentioned, generally, in
the above section. Once registered, they can be accessed anytime and anywhere, wherever
the GALIOM Application is available to the user.
Column Description
1. Feature (Display only)
a. This column represents the feature name of the testpoint under observation.
2. Testpoint (Display only)
a. The column represents name of the testpoint under observation
Other columns:- remains column description are written in the section Inspection of
Intelligent Pigging under the Monitored data section
18.15.11 FREE SPAN MEASUREMENT
This window will allow the user to register FreeSpan Measurement records into the system.
The functioning of the window in different modes is the same, as mentioned, generally, in
the above section. Once registered, they can be accessed anytime and anywhere, wherever
the GALIOM Application is available to the user.
Column Description
1. Feature (Display only)
a.This column represents the feature name of the testpoint under observation.
2. Testpoint (Display only)
a. The column represents name of the testpoint under observation
Other columns:- remains column description are written in the section Inspection of Free
Span Measurement under the Monitored data section.
18.15.12 CATHODIC PROTECTION
This window will allow the user to register Cathodic protection Measurement records into
the system. The functioning of the window in different modes is the same, as mentioned,
generally, in the above section. Once registered, they can be accessed anytime and anywhere,
wherever the GALIOM Application is available to the user.
Column Description
1. Feature (Display only)
a.This column represents the feature name of the testpoint under observation.
2. Testpoint (Display only)
a.The column represents name of the testpoint under observation
Other columns:- remains column description are written in the section Inspection of
Cathodic Protection under the Monitored data section

19 SHUTDOWN WORKSCOPE PREPARATION


GALIOM assists engineer to create shutdown work scope. Normally shutdown work scope
contains what inspection method and techniques to apply for detecting particular failure
mechanisms in the form of written scheme of examination. Apart from that, engineers would
print anomalous condition reports with recommendations.

Page 374 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

19.1 WORKSCOPE PREPARATION


Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user
2. At least one asset is registered in the asset hierarchy tree.
3. The PM schedule & PM Programme should be present.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:-. The system inserts a new record in the work scope details window.
2. Delete button:- The system delete the current display record from the work scope
details window. Before deleting the record, the system displays the following message
with Yes and No options. If the user press yes button the system deletes the
selected record. If the user press no button, the system will not delete the selected
record..
3. Save button: - The system save the record.
4. Refresh button:- Refresh the current display screen
5. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Workscope Prep tab.

Click Asset Management menu Item

Select the

Column Description
1. Work Scope List

Page 375 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

a. ID (D)
i. The system display the ID
b. Workscope Date (D)
i. The system display the work scope date
c. Asset Name (D)
i. The system display the asset name
d. Schedule Type (D)
i. The system displays the Schedule Type.
e. Workscope Desc (D)
i. The system displays the work scope description
f. Updated Date (D)
i. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies
the data.
g. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the user id, when the user is modify the value in
this window.
2. Workscope Details
a. Workscope ID (D)
i. The work scope id is displayed by the system automatically, when
user creates the record in the work scope preparation window
b. Workscope Date (D)
i. The system display the current date.
1. The system will not allow the user to edit this column.
c. Schedule (M)
i. Select the schedule from the drop down.
1. If the user try to save the record without entering any value in
this column, the system display the following message
Schedule is must.
2. The entire schedules displayed in the drop down are defined
in the PM schedule window.
d. Workscope Desc (O)
i. Enter the work scope description.
e. Updated Date (D)
i. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies
the data.
f. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the user id, when the user is modify the value in
this window.

Page 376 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

3. Workscope Details by Failure Mechanism


a. Failure Mechanism (O)
i. When user insert a new record, the system automatically insert a new
record in Work scope Details by failure Mechanism section and
display all failure mechanism in the Failure mechanism column.
1. System automatically lists all failure mechanism.
b. Effectiveness (O)
i. Select the effectiveness from the drop down.
1. The system displays the effectiveness value setup against each
failure mechanism from the define Inspection effectiveness
for the failure mechanism window present in Engineering
Reference module.
c. Work Description (O)
i. System displays the work description automatically.
1. The system displays the work description value setup against
each failure mechanism from the define Inspection
effectiveness for the failure mechanism window present in
Engineering Reference module.
d. Update Date (D)
i. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies
the data.
e. Update User (D)
i. The system displays the user id, when the user is modify the value in
this window.
REPORT
None.

19.2 ON-STREAM WORKSCOPE PREPARATION


19.2.1 HOW TO PRINT ULTRASONIC WALL THICKNESS DATASHEET
On stream work scope could be an ultrasonic wall thickness measurement scope or
radiography scope. In GALIOM this depends on the type of Test point registered in the
GALIOM. Note that before using the report of datasheets user must make sure all features
and test points are registered in GALIOM. Inspection datasheet reports are in the range of 1
year from the date of printing and those records which are overdue are also selected in the
work scope. Other reports available are based on records that would overdue between dates,
that is all next inspection due dates that are overdue between specified dates.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. There should be a functional group is registered in the GALIOM Application.

Steps to the usage of this window


Page 377 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

1. Select the functional group/Location in Asset Hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management Report menu Item
Select Ultrasonic wall thickness measurement datasheet.

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

19.2.2 HOW TO PRINT RADIOGRAPHY DATASHEET


On stream work scope could be an ultrasonic wall thickness measurement scope or
radiography scope. In GALIOM this depends on the type of Test point registered in the
GALIOM. Note that before using the report of datasheets user must make sure all features
and test points are registered in GALIOM. Inspection datasheet reports are in the range of 1
year from the date of printing and those records which are overdue are also selected in the
work scope. Other reports available are based on records that would overdue between dates,
that is all next inspection due dates that are overdue between specified dates.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user.
2. The user should have responsibility right to click on Asset Hierarchy tree.
3. There should be a functional group is registered in the GALIOM Application.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Select the functional group/Location in the Asset hierarchy tree.

Responsibilities
Page 378 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

1. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this Report

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Select Radiography Datasheet.

Click Asset Management Report menu Item

REPORT
File

Print (Ctrl +P) or Click on Print Button

20 INSPECTION MEMO/REPORT
Inspection memo and report screen allows user to record the inspection findings. Inspection
memo and report of GALIOM mainly assist different kind of users to record the inspection
findings and recommendation and maintenance. After the inspection is completed, the
inspector would record its findings for different types of inspections. Some of the inspection
types are Close visual inspection (CVI), Baseline (BLI), On-stream, Shutdown etc. This
screen works with responsibility of different groups like inspectors, document linking,
reliability engineer, maintenance coordinator and operations. After inspector has filled the
inspection findings, the reliability engineer would check for level 1 screening for anomalies
and would record recommendation with due dates for its completion. All critical
recommendations are put in GALIOM with priority high and Fitness for Purpose (FFP)
status as RED. The RED FFP status means it required immediate repair or replacement.
ORANGE FFP status is put when the recommendation could be completed by specified due
dates. This screen is supported with many reports which makes the reporting and highlight
the action list very effectively.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user
2. At least one tag is registered in the asset hierarchy tree.
3. Select any TAG from the asset hierarchy.

Steps to the usage of this window

Page 379 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


1. Insert button:- The system open a window Inspection Report/Memo
20.1.1 HOW TO ADD INSPECTION REPORT/MEMO FOR THE

SELECTED TAG
This window is used to add the inspection memo for the selected tag. This window is having
7 tabs. 1. Inspection comment, 2.Failure Mechanism, 3. Memo Documents, 4. Screening
Level 1, 5. CM/PM Follow up, 6. Maintenance Comment and operation Comment.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user
2. At least one asset is registered in the asset hierarchy tree.
3. Select any TAG from the asset hierarchy.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:-. The system inserts a new record in the Inspection Report/memo
window.
2. Delete button:- The system delete the current display record in Inspection
Report/memo window.
3. Save button: - The system save the record and close the Inspection Report/memo
windoe.
4. Refresh button:- Refresh the current display screen
5. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
Memo/Report Tab
Click the Insert button.

Select the

Page 380 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Report No (D)
a. The system displays the report number.
i. The system automatically displays the Report number.
2. Inspection Type (O)
a. Select the Inspection Type from the drop down window.
3. Location Desc (O)
a. Enter the Location description where the inspection is done.
4. Condition Codes 1 to 4 (O)
a. Select the Condition codes from the dropdown.
5. Inspection Date (O)
a. Enter the Inspection date.
6. Drawing No(O)
a. Enter the Drawing Number.
7. PEFD No (O)
a. Enter the PEFD Number.
8. Memo Status (M)
a. Select the Memo status (i.e., CANCELLED. COMPLETED,
REINSPECTION, RESCHEDULE, REVIEWING) from the drop down.
9. Status Date (O)
a. The system displays the status Date.
10. Maintenance Req. (O)
a. Check the check box, if the Maintenance is required for the selected tag.
11. Contained (O)
a. Check the check box (Yes), if it is contained. Uncheck the check box (No), if
it is not contained.
i. If the contained check box is not selected the system will protect the
Contained Type and Repair code columns.
12. Contained Type (O)
a. Select the contained Type (i.e., Clam fitted, Permanent repair done, reduced
pressure, and temporary repair done) from the drop down.\
i. If the Contained column is unchecked, then the system will not allow
the user to edit this column.
13. Repair code (O)
a. Select the Repair code (i.e., Painting, Plidco clamp ) from the drop down.
i. If the Contained column is unchecked, then the system will not allow
the user to edit this column.
14. Update date (D)

Page 381 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies the data
15. Update user (D)
a. The system displays the user id, when the user is modify the value in this
window.
16. Inspectors comment Tab
a. Raised Date (O)
i. Enter the Inspection raised date.
b. Comments (O)
i. Enter the Inspection comments.
c. Issued to group (O)
i. Select the group from the drop down.
d. Issued to User (O)
i. Select the user id from the drop down of the selected group.
e. Updated Date (D)
i. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies
the data.
f. Updated User (D)
i. The system displays the user id, when the user is modify the value in
this window.
17. Failure Mechanism tab
a. Failure Mode (M)
i. Select the failure mode from the drop down
b. Failure Mode Id (M)
i. Select the Failure Mechanism id from the drop down
c. Failure Mechanism (D)
i. The system displays the selected failure mechanism.
d. Observed (O)
i. Check the check box, if user observed anything.
e. Observation Text (O)
i. Enter the description for the Observation Text.
f. Update date (D)
i. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies
the data.
g. Update user (D)
i. The system displays the user id, when the user is modify the value in
this window.

Page 382 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


18. Memo Documents tab
This tab is used to attach the memo documents in the comments page of Inspection
Report/memo window.

Pre-requisites
1. The user should be active GALIOM Application user
2. At least one asset is registered in the asset hierarchy tree.
3. Inspection to be conducted on at least on feature.

Steps to the usage of this window


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Insert button:- The system open a window to upload the documents.


Delete button:- The system delete the current display record.
Refresh button:- The system refresh the current active window
Exit button :- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application
Ok button:-.The system uploads the select document into the memo documents
tab page.
6. Cancel button:- The system does not upload the document in to the memo
document tab page

Responsibilities
1.
2.
3.
4.

Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.


Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
Any user having ASSET VIEW responsibility can view this window.
Any user having DOCEDIT responsibility can attach the documents to this
memo documents tab.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Click Asset Management menu Item
Select
the Memo/Report Tab
Click the insert button or double click on any record present
in the Memo/Report tab
Click on the Memo documents tab.

Column Description
1. Select path (M)
a. Select the path for ht source file, by click the file browse icon.

Page 383 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

2. documents/image list (D)


a. Based on the source selected in the selected path, the system displays all
the relevant type of documents present in the drive/folder.
3. selected documents/image (D)
a. Select the desired document in the document/image and click on >
icon to copy the document in to selected document/image window.
i. If user click on >> icon, all the documents present in the
document/image window are copied to selected
documents/image window.
4. Upload Selected button (B)
a. When the user clicks this button, the selected files are uploaded and
displayed in the memo documents screen.
19. Screening level 1 tab
a. Feature (M)
i. Select the feature from the drop down.
1. When user select the feature, the system automatically display
the values in design code, MAWP, Temperature, Allowable
stress, nominal WT etc columns.
b. Feature Type (O)
i. Selected the feature Type from the drop down (i.e., conical head,
Nozzle, Cylindrical shell, Hemispherical Head etc)
c. FFP Status (M)
i. Select the FFP status from the drop down (i.e., GREEN, ORANGE,
RED)
d. Monitoring Location (M)
i. Based on the selected feature, the monitoring location drop down
display the values.
e. Adjacent WT (O)
i. Enter the value in the Adjacent WT column.
f. Pit Depth (O)
i. Enter the value in the pit depth column.
g. Remaining WT (D)
i. The system display the Remaining WT, based on
h. Diameter (O)
i. Select the Diameter from the drop down.
i.

Material (O)
i. Select the Material from the drop down.
1. The system displays the material data from define Material
specification window present in the Engineering Reference.

j.

Design code (D)


Page 384 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. The system displays the design code of the selected feature, when
user selects the feature in the feature column.
k. MAWP (O)
i. Enter the MAWP value.
l.

Temperature (O)
i. The system display the temperature, based on the feature selected in
the feature column. The system also allows the user to edit this
column.

m. Quality Factor (O)


i. Enter the Quality Factor.
n. Allowable Stress (O)
i. Enter the Allowable Stress.
o. MAWT (D)
i. The system displays the value Minimum Allowable wall thickness.
p. Nominal WT (D)
i. The system display the value in this column, based on the feature
selected in the feature column.
q. Override MAWT (O)
i. Enter the Override MAWT.
r. Anomaly Status (O)
i. Enter the Anomaly Status
s. Rec.Due Date (O)
i. Enter the Rec.Due Date.
t. Recommendation (O)
i. Enter if any recommendation is required.
u. Updated date (D)
i. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies
the data.
v. Updated user (D)
i. The system displays the user id, when the user is modify the value in
this window.
20. CM/PM follow up tab
1. Seq (D)
a. The system displays the seq number.
2. Condition code (M)
a. Select the condition code from the drop down
3. Ins.Finding (O)
a. Enter the Inspection Findings.
Page 385 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

4. Un confirmed (O)
a. Enter the confirmend /un confirmed
5. Follow up text (O)
a. Enter the follow up text
6. Priority (O)
a. Select the priority from the drop down (i.e., HIGH, LOW, MEDIUM)
7. Follow up date (O)
a. Enter the Follow up date
8. Close out date (O)
a. Enter the close date
9. FFP Status (O)
a. Enter the FFP status
21.Maintenance Comment Tab
1. Follow up seq (D)
a. The system displays the Follow up number
2. Review Date (O)
a. Enter the review date
3. Comments (O)
a. Enter the comments
4. Work Request No (D)
a. The system displays the work request No
5. Work Order No (O)
a. The system displays the work order number.
6. Work Order Status (O)
a. The system displays the work order status
7. Work Order Priority (O)
a. The system displays the work order priority.
8. Work Order close date (O)
a. The system displays the work order close date
9. Actual Start date (O)
a. The system displays the work order actual start date.
10. Actual End Date (O)
a. The system displays the work order actual end date.
11. Updated Date (D)
a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies
the data.
Page 386 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

12. Updated user (D)


a. The system displays the user id, when the user is modify the value in
this window.
22. Operation Comment tab
1. Review Date (O)
a.Enter the review date.
2.Comments (O)
a. Enter the comments
3. Updated Date (D)
a.The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies the
data.
4.Updated User (D)
a.The system displays the user id, when the user is modify the value in this
window.
1. Delete button:- The system delete the selected record. When user press the delete
button, after selecting one Inspection report. The system display a message You are
about delete the selected Inspection Report/memo with Yes and No button. If
user press No button, the system will not delete the selected record. If the user
press Yes button, the system delete the selected record.
2. Refresh button:- The system refresh the current display screen.
3. Exit button:- The system will exit from the GALIOM Application.

Responsibilities
1. Any user having ADMIN Responsibility can edit this window.
2. Any user having ASSET EDIT Responsibility can edit this window.
3. Any user having ASSET VIEW Responsibility can view this window.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
Memo/Report Tab

Click Asset Management menu Item

Select the

Page 387 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Report No (D)
a. The system display the Report No
2. Insp. Type(D)
a. The system displays the inspection Type.
3. CC1 (D)
a. The system display the Condition codes 1
4. CC2 (D)
a. The system display the Condition codes 2
5. CC3 (D)
a. The system display the Condition codes 3
6. CC4 (D)
a. The system display the Condition codes 4
7. Repair Code (D)
a. The system displays the repair code.
8. Contained (D)
a. The system display the contained (Y/N)
9. Updated Date (D)
a. The system should display the updated date, when ever user modifies the
data.
10. Update User (D)
a. The system displays the user id, when the user is modify the value in this
window.

Report
None

20.2 HOW TO VIEW/MODIFY EXISTING INSPECTION MEMO/


REPORT?
How to view or modify the existing Inspection memo/ report by the user.

Pre-requisites
1. There should be at least one inspection should present.
2. The system show a list of previous inspection memos of the selected TAG.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Exit button:- The system exit from the GALIOM application.

Page 388 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


2. Double click:- Select the inspection record and double click on it, the system
will open the details of the inspection in Inspection Report/Memo window.

Responsibilities
1. None.

Navigation
Main Menu
Asset Management
memo /Report tab

Click Asset Management menu Item

. Click on

Column Description
None.
REPORT
None

21 HISTORICAL DATA RECORDING


21.1 ULTRASONIC WALL THICKNESS DATA RECORDING
Once inspection for Ultrasonic Wall Thickness (UTWT) reading is done as specified by the
reliability/Inspection/Corrosion engineer using the inspection datasheet reports from
GALIOM, user can input the results into associated test points. This screen automatically
updates the corrosion rate calculations and re-assesses the remaining life as data entered is
saved.
Note: The Current version of GALIOM does not support downloading into Data Logger and Uploading
data from Data Logger. It would be much faster to record data and validate once this interface with Data
Logger would be available in GALIOM.

21.2 HOW TO RECORD UT WALL THICKNESS DATA?


1.
2.
3.
4.

Select the Asset Management Module.


Then select the Asset Management from Menu Item.
Switch to Asset Hierarchy tab in left side of GALIOM application.
Select Tag from the asset hierarchy at level 6.

Page 389 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Select Test point at level 8 for which the wall thickness record will be entered.
Click on historical data tab.
System will show list of previous wall thickness for the point, if any.
Click on Insert tool button.
System will bring up a new empty record for wall thickness entry.
Enter the inspection date, wall thickness etc.
When all the entries are made click on Save tool button.

21.3 RADIOGRAPHY DATA RECORDING


Once inspection for Radiography reading is done as specified by the reliability/ Inspection/
Corrosion engineer using the inspection datasheet reports from GALIOM, user can input
the results into associated test points. This screen automatically updates the corrosion rate
calculations and re-assesses the remaining life as data entered is saved.

21.4 HOW TO RECORD NRWT FROM RADIOGRAPHY?


12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.

Select the Asset Management Module.


Then select the Asset Management from Menu Item.
Switch to Asset Hierarchy tab in left side of GALIOM application.
Select Tag from the asset hierarchy at level 6.
Select Test point at level 8 for which the wall thickness record will be entered.
Click on historical data tab.
System will show list of previous wall thickness for the point, if any.
To add new data, click on Insert tool button.
System would bring up a new empty record for wall thickness recording.
Enter the inspection date and wall thickness data etc.
When all the entries are made click on Save tool button.

Page 390 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

22 POWER BOILER
22.1 POWER BOILER TAG LEVEL MECHANICAL DESIGN DATA
*****
22.2 POWER BOILER FEATURE LEVEL MECHANICAL DESIGN
DATA PIPING *****
22.3 POWER BOILER FEATURE LEVEL MECHANICAL DESIGN
DATA TUBE ******
22.4 POWER BOILER FEATURE LEVEL MECHANICAL DESIGN
DATA-SHELL *******
22.5 POWER BOILER FEATURE LEVEL MECHANICAL DESIGN
DATA-HEAD ******

Page 391 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

23 GENERAL UTILITIES
23.1 HOW THE FILTER OPTION WORKES
This is one the facility provided by the GALIOM application to the user. Using this feature,
the user can filter the data displayed on the current display screen based on the criteria
selected. When user press Options -> Filter, the system display a window with the filter
options. This menu option is enabled/disable based on the functional requirement of
GALIOM Application.

Pre-requisites
1. The filter menu option is enable for the displayed window.
2. The window should have data to apply the filter criteria.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Insert button:- The system insert a new row for filter criteria in the FILTER
window.
2. Delete button:- The system deletes the selected row from the FILTER window.
3. Close button:- The system close the FILTER window.
4. Apply button:- The system apply the Filter criteria on the display window, to
filter the data based on the filter criteria.

Responsibilities
1. None.

Navigation
Options

Click on Filter menu Item.

Column Description
1. Field name (M)
a. Select the field name on which the filter criterion is constructing.

Page 392 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


i. In the drop down, the system display all the fields present in the
current display window.
2. Operator (M)
a. Select the appropriate operator for filter criteria.
3. Value (M)
a. Enter the value, which is the key word for the filter criteria.
4. Logical (O)
a. If the filter criteria is need some logical binding, then select the logical
operator and enter one more filter criteria..
REPORT
None.

23.2 HOW TO WORK WITH SORT OPTION


This is one the facility provided by the GALIOM application to the user. Using this feature,
the user can sort the data displayed on the current display screen based on the columns
selected. When user press Options -> Sort, the system display a window with the field
names. This menu option is enabled/disable based on the functional requirement of
GALIOM Application.

Pre-requisites
1. The sort menu option is enable for the displayed window.
2. The window should have data to apply the sort.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Ok button:- The sort is applied on the data present in the current display
screen.
2. Cancel button:- The sort will not apply on the data and sort window will close.

Responsibilities
1. None.

Navigation
Options

Click on Sort menu Item.

Page 393 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual

Column Description
1. Field name (D)
a. Select the column from left hand window and release in right hand window.
i. The system display all the fields present in the current display
window.
2. Ascending (M)
a. The system will sort the data in ascending.
b. By default the system always check the check box. (i.e., Ascending)
REPORT
None.

23.3 HOW TO CHANGE THE USER PASSWORD


This is one the facility provided by the GALIOM application to the user. Using this feature,
the user can change his/her password.

Pre-requisites
1. The change password menu option is enable.
2. The user must be active GALIOM application user.
3. The user must have valid user name and password.

Steps to the usage of this window


1. Ok button:- The system Apply the new password. And saved into database
2. Cancel button:- The system cancel this window, and will not save the changes
into database made by the user.

Responsibilities
1. None.

Navigation

Page 394 of 395

GALIOM An Asset Integrity Management Software - User Manual


Options

Click on Change password menu Item.

Column Description
1. Old password (M)
a. Enter the current password of the user
i. The system displays the data in non numeric characters.
2. New password (M)
a. Enter the new password.
i. The system displays the data in non numeric characters.
3. Verify Password (M)
a. Enter the new password again.
i. The system displays the data in non numeric characters.
REPORT
None.

Page 395 of 395